Home

HP c50 User's Manual

1. 11 10 Record amp Playback Keystrokes Facility 11 12 Recording Keystrokes eson annen e iR 11 12 Contents 5 Contents Playback KeystroKesS a una nsasayaquachsiapaqakiaycasspa 11 13 Editing Macros ones i ene tbe cians ae uka ia 11 13 Error Codes uu aqa apan hasa mawan aka a as 11 14 Notice Board Facility a ga akan aq t a a aa 11 15 I UOductI6 ns ou y na Q aa kasuk kiwa N 11 15 K ey F netionpsia n a l nie aa aan 11 15 Copying Screen Data To The Display a 11 15 Copying Screen Data To A Function Key 11 16 IBM 5250 Emulation 12 1 INAV OMUCH ON r EAA S Da mo 0 hua ecg PQ a ts Cee ona 12 1 SESSION Configuratii oe ceccccescceesseeesseceeceeeneecseeeueceeaueneaeeceeeeenas 12 1 WB IMO deserri na r E E EEE 12 1 Non WBT Mode ans o a E n Tuis 12 3 Network Virtual Terminal Mode 12 5 The Status LINE in eiiie i niri l iQ EA m SA 12 5 Keyboard MApping 2 ian u OW EK EEE E 12 6 Word Processing Mod iiisrisseisiisiisiiioocnradsieriurer isde pissis 12 6 Text Display ODtions S R akuta u AAREE EEEREN ANEA ERE REAN 12 8 Record amp Playback Keystrokes Facility 12 9 Recording Keystrokes sesan k e nn E EE Ea 12 9 Playback Keystrokes aaa suspi
2. 6 1 Using The MeWWSu c a ua h n eas hove es Re tee eas Reaves 6 2 Dial g BOKEN sissies nih en ia 6 3 Default Selis suasana athe sea eG as 6 4 Specifying Characters In Setup Entries 6 4 Creating A Connection Template CE 6 5 Selecting A Connection Template CE 6 6 Saving The Session Configuration XPe 6 6 Save Using Current Session Name a aaaassassssssss 6 6 Save Using New Session Name a aaassssssssssssssass 6 7 Selecting A Session Configuration XPe 6 7 Men Descriptions ooreen aa ETE E 6 9 Fil MeDU oa iernare ireira soe aiak aana aE a a sap E scaphas 6 9 Edit Men seii a a E E huy R 6 23 Settings MOU L aasussaayqaayaaanapyasayaau E R aA 6 24 Emulation Settings eee eseesseeseeeeeseceseesecesecseeesesseeeseenseeaes 6 26 HP 700292 96 Setting Sosine nnne usaha E EEEa R 6 30 PT250 Ste gS ec u u samana iaia Ea 6 36 IBM 3 151 Settings sus napana aaa i aaa yu 6 39 WYSE SCHIN GS iuc53 aasawa h aasan a oas 6 43 T A6530 S ttmmegs suasana usha u l ush a atiesst 6 48 IBM 3270 SettImgs a na mm h Re ie aaa 6 50 Notice Board Setup us aasasasapaqsanahashaganayipaqaqqhayqhiaqasyican 6 54 IBM 5250 Settmes ican cnc aasan edad u als 6 56 Unisys T27 Set
3. aaa sss 6 106 Saving The Button Tools aaa 6 106 Assigning User Defined Functions 6 106 DEC VT Emulation 7 1 Session Configuration naa 7 1 W BT Mode sass sencriigeniititaacieiad audit atic u nase 7 1 Non WBE Mode rereana re E E este ykasawu putes AT 7 2 The Status BAP T q usun n au onu h Sua eae ka Eases 7 4 Horizo tab Serolline sa a nenie en RE Qa Wea Hal een 7 5 Keyboard Mapping ccccccccccecsecesscesseceeneceeseceeaceceueeesaeeeeaaeceaneceeneeees 7 5 Typing Direction For Hebrew Language a 7 8 BQ 3107 Emulation 8 1 Session Configuration a 8 1 WBT Modes s aa a aap a eesti Hie ee atthe 8 1 NoOn WBT M0g ccsscsiccesces satis ed haeseeetaassosapisaeeeeseessaedeae 8 2 TheStatus BOP q aa aaa Tan Bact teh d cea 8 3 Keyboard Mapping a 8 4 Contents 4 Contents DG 410 412 Emulation 9 1 Session Configuration a 9 1 WBE Mode suid aaa an puas qhaquyku yayay hua e a 9 1 Non WBT Mod usa a naa anu ie 9 2 Keyboard Mapping 9 3 Key Fu
4. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Slo ONN Noo oaa aja a aw w wln ro n o o o D5 Doo G vig OR Daa mao moan 75 61 3D OCTAL DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL B 13 Character Sets WYSE NATIVE MODE CHARACTER SET COLUMN R O w 0 s am xm L 7 em a 8B o 7m oo m gt 2 3 4 5 6 A 7 8 9 DO at 4 lt ar oz om gt N lt x S lt c HO DO v O Z Zr xc 35 OCTAL 29 DECIMAL 1D HEXADECIMAL This character set is used by all Wyse emulations and associated emulations In WY 60 mode this is the default primary character set B 14 Character Sets WY 60 MULTINATIONAL CODE PAGE 437 CHARACTER SET R O w 0 k O o p O We T T L a jis k IL See _ _ m F dl C OO O AIAI OIN o lHa w Kim O C O lt c Emi m DIM e 8o b p NA ar Q M a H S R 245 OCTAL KEY N 165 DECIMAL A5 HEXADECIMAL This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode and is the secondary character set when the Code Page option in the Wyse Settings dialog box is set to
5. u a 20 7 Display sasaqa n e u eR Ra A aoa ae as 20 9 Keyboard amp MoBSe ayata ha ua u ua g sis 20 20 AUXULATY POYES S u k aa ayna a a Has ha aussi 20 21 Virtual Key Names A 1 Character SOUS B 1 Host Command Summar y C 1 Product Specification D 1 Contents 8 Introduction Introduction This chapter introduces the contents of this User s Guide About This User s Guide This User s Guide describes how to use TeemTalk version 5 0 for Windows CE and XPe Most of the functionality is the same for both Windows CE and XPe versions but where there are differences the text will indicate them Most of the dialog box illustrations show the Windows CE version of TeemTalk Note that your version of TeemTalk may not support every emulation or feature described in this User s Guide The User s Guide is divided into the following chapters and appendices Chapter 1 Introduction Introduces the contents of this User s Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started Describes how to configure a session and describes various display features Chapter 3 Keyboard Configuration Describes how to assign functions to keys and how to use the Compose Character function to generate special characters Chapter 4 Mouse Functions Describes the special functions assigned t
6. 12 10 IBM 5250 Emulation 9001 9003 9007 9010 9015 9019 Exceeded the maximum number of allowed keystrokes Remedy Press the Record key to exit Record mode To record a new keystroke sequence either a Press the Record key and the target Fn key that has erasable data then enter the new data b Press the Record key and the target Fn key that has erasable data then press the Delete key to erase the recorded data for that key You pressed an invalid Fn key while performing the Record or Play function Remedy Press the Reset key You pressed an invalid sequence key e g Play while performing the Record function Remedy Press the Reset key While performing the Play function you pressed an Fn key that does not have a keystroke assigned to it Remedy Press the Reset key In communication mode you pressed either the Quit or Pause key Remedy Press the Reset key In Record or Play mode While the Record play pause indicator was displayed on the status line you pressed an invalid key e g Play key in Record mode or Record key in Play mode Remedy Press the Reset key Fax Image Support Fax images in Tiff PCX and G3 format are supported The following display facilities are supported if the host provides them Scrollbars EasyScroll Zoom These are displayed if the image is larger than the screen area allocated to it IBM term for scrolling by dragging the image with
7. TeemTalk for Windows XPe Display The Menu Bar Windows XPe The TeemTalk for Windows XPe menu bar provides access to three menus that enable you to perform various functions and configure TeemTalk for compatibility with the application Fie Edit Settings Factory Default v Clipboard Text Language Reset Terminal Clipboard Graphics Gune ee Emulation New Connection P 2 9 Open Session F a Se Mon li Save Session y Ww y Save Session AS Paste Ctrl f z Select All Bh Printer Setup DS Print Screen Clear Buffer I 57 Print Buffer Auto Print E Cancel Pr Serial Eject Page Auxport Ext Terminal Local Editing Block Transmission Attributes Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Mouse Button Action Button Tools Note The options available in the menus depend on your version ofTeemTalk To display a menu Mouse Keyboard Click the title of the menu required Hold down the Alt key and press the key bearing the underlined character in the menu title For example pressing Alt F will display the File menu Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for a complete description of all the menu options 2 44 Getting Started The Toolbar Windows XPe A toolbar is displayed below the TeemTalk for Windows XPe menu bar This displays a series of buttons which provide a quick way of actioning commands or displaying setup dialog boxes when clicked Sek
8. lt Z Den U QQ o e I I ee Ta ey r Next Previous Default aloes Display Choice Choice Values Functns Key String Treatment Each f key and button definition displayed in the menu consists of two lines The first line begins with the f key number followed by space then a one character attribute field This field will contain either an uppercase L T or N These characters indicate the following L The key string is executed locally T The key string is transmitted to the host only N The key string is treated as keyboard entered data The default selection is T for all f keys To change this setting use the Tab or Shift Tab keys to move the cursor over the field then press F2 Next Choice button or F3 Previous Choice button to cycle through the options until the one required is displayed Function Indicator The remainder of the first line is used to specify what is displayed on the screen button to indicate its function The default display shows the numbers of the f keys The two fields following LABEL represent the upper and lower lines that can be displayed on the button To change the current definition use the Tab or Shift Tab keys to move the cursor into the relevant field and type in the new definition which can consist of a maximum of 16 characters eight characters per field 10 14 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Key String Definition The second line of each f key definition contains the
9. IBM 3270 Emulation Text Display Options Display Right to Left The contents of the screen can be displayed in reverse i e as a right to left mirror image by pressing the keys Shift Backspace This is a toggle function so pressing the keys again will revert to normal left to right display An arrow will be displayed on the status line to indicate normal right arrow or mirror left arrow display Typing Direction The direction in which characters are displayed on the screen when typed can be toggled between normal left to right and right to left by pressing the keys Shift on the keypad The characters gt or lt will be displayed on the status line to indicate the current typing direction Selecting the Symbol Swap option in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box will cause symbols such as round or angle brackets to be displayed the correct way round when typing right to left Close Key If text has been typed using both typing direction modes in the same line or field you can force the right hand text to join the left hand text by pressing the keys Shift on the keypad Push Mode Push mode allows you to edit text whose direction is opposite the screen orientation In this mode the cursor orientation is reversed and a Push segment is created Push mode is toggled on off by pressing the keys Ctrl Shift keypad minus Push mode has two secondary modes Boundary mode and Edit mode Boundary mode is act
10. Notice Board Enabled Zoom Settings Notice Board Above Host Notice Board Below Host Copy to F Key Enabled m F Key Settings Copy Only User Fields to F Key Copy All Data to F Key Copy Function Enabled Single Step Macros This dialog box is displayed by clicking the Notice Board Setup button in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box or by pressing the keys Alt F2 Refer to the Notice Board Facility section in the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter for information on how to use the Notice Board Notice Board Enabled Factory default Unselected When this option is selected pressing the Zoom key will toggle the display between full screen i e the screen currently containing the cursor and split screen host screen and Notice Board mode The following Zoom Settings options determine which is displayed above the other Note that the host screen contains the same number of rows and columns whether displayed full screen or in split screen Zoom Settings Factory default Below Host These toggle settings determine whether the Notice Board is displayed above or below the host screen When viewing the display pointers at each end of the dividing line between the two screens indicate which is the host screen Copy to F Key Enabled Factory default Unselected This enables the facility for copying screen data to a function key Refer to the Copying Screen Data To A Function Key section in the IBM 3270 Emulation ch
11. Session Stored for all users of system Session stored for current user Nigel only Cancel 3 Click the OK button to save the session If you specified a session name that already exists a message box will ask you to confirm whether you want to overwrite the existing session name with the new settings Startup Options Not available in WBT mode The following dialog box will be displayed when this option is selected Startup Options Oke x At Startup Connect from Saved Settings Display Open Session Dialog This enables you specify whether the emulator is to make a host connection using the default connection template display the New Connection dialog box or display the Open Session dialog box when it is loaded but not when it is reset Refer to the relevant descriptions earlier in this section for information on these dialog boxes Printer Setup This will display a dialog box that enables you to specify print settings The options available depend on whether you are running TeemTalk for Windows CE or XPe 6 15 Setup Menus TeemTalk for Windows CE Terminal Emulation Printer Setup Oke x Printer Port Parallel Cable on LPT1 v Use Network Printer LPR 5e Advanced M Print Direct To Port FormFeed Terminator _ Auto Line Feed Output Character Set lo Seconds Close Delay 150 Latin 1 v TeemTalk for Windows XPe T
12. C 32 Host Command Summary Scroll down Scroll up Scroll left Scroll right Select compressed spacing Select normal spacing Set margins Set alternate margins Set scroll rate Set windows lt rows gt lt 0 81 cols 1 135 cols gt Show columns RSI RSH RS FC lt n gt RS FD lt n gt RS FK RSFJ RS F X lt nn gt lt nn gt RS F Y lt nn gt lt nn gt lt nn gt RS FT lt n gt RS FB lt nn gt lt n gt RS F lt nn gt lt nn gt Horizontal scroll enable RS F4 Horizontal scroll disable RSF Restore normal margins RS FZ EDITING Delete character RSK Delete line RSFI Delete line between margins RS F Erase window FF Erase screen RS FE Erase unprotected RS FF Erase to end of line VT Insert character RS J Insert line RS FH Insert line between margins RS F GENERAL Bell BEL Read horizontal scroll offset RSFO Read model ID RSC Reset RSFA Select ANSI mode RSF Select 7 8 bit operation 0 7 bit 1 8 bit RS FU bit Select character set RS FS lt nn gt Set keyboard language 0 match native language 1 US ASCII amp DG International RS Ff Shift in RSN Shift out RSO PRINTING Form bit dump RSF 6 Window bit dump RSF 5 Print form SOH Print pass through on RS F Print pass through off RS Fa Print window DC1 C 33 Host Command Summary DG 410 412 ANSI Standard Mode CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Change attributes CSI count on off q CURS
13. C 93 Host Command Summary Additional Commands DISPLAY COLOUR DEC VT modes Foreground colour Background colour where is one of the following numbers CSI F CSI G 0 Black 4 Red 8 Grey 12 Light Red 1 Blue 5 Magenta 9 Light Blue 13 Light Magenta 2 Green 6 Brown 10 Light Green 14 Yellow 3 Cyan 7 White 11 Light Cyan 15 Light White Reflection 4 compatibility Foreground colour ESC 3xm Foreground bold colour ESC 4xm Background colour ESC 5xm Background bold colour ESC 6xm DISPLAY SIZE Number of screen lines ESC 1 p MOUSE CURSOR Mouse cursor style see table below for value ESC 2 p Default Cursor 0 I Beam 4 8 1 I 5 Z 9 x 2 x 6 10 No Cursor 3 an 7 MOUSE REPORTING IN ALPHANUMERIC APPLICATIONS Arm the emulator for mouse operation ESC arg g where arg is of the format bit7 3 00110 bit 2 when set enables motion events bit 1 when set enables button release events bit 0 when set enables button press events If all bits are cleared then any outstanding arming request is cancelled The mouse remains armed until cancelled When any of the selected events occur the following report format is sent to the host ESC lt Event Type gt lt Button Status gt lt Column gt lt Row gt r Where lt Event Type gt is the event s that caused the report in the same format as the arming sequence C 94 Host Comma
14. Olo O O c c c c Or Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 31 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 ENGLISH U K CHARACTER SET gt gt gt gt A A Dio u O Z Z r Xx c lt ww N lt x Z lt C gt O OJOO NOOU A OIN N Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 32 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 DANISH amp NORWEGIAN CHARACTER SET P gt gt gt O gt y O jS O Z Z r x lt N lt x Z lt C O Oo Orns O Q T G N za o C C C Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 33 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 FRENCH CHARACTER SET gt gt gt gt A A y O S O Z Z r x N lt ww Z lt C O Oo oO O QU R G N N Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 34 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 GERMAN amp AUSTRIAN CHARACTER SET gt bio IO T m O O U gt A A m O sS O Z Z r x c olol N O ao G N za Oo id Legend R
15. Sessions Enable session Session page memory ps pages per session 1 4 Update session Only when active CSI amp x CSI ps1 ps2 ps3 ps4 x CSI y 1 When available 2 At regular intervals 3 Window Management Auto reset mode enabled CSI 98h Auto reset mode disabled CSI 981 Framed windows mode enabled CSI 111h Framed windows mode disabled CSI 1111 Set icon name 12 characters max Set window title 30 characters max Audible Attributes OSC 2 L name ST OSC 2 1 name ST Margin bell volume Off Low High Warning bell volume Off Low High Play sound v Volume d Duration n Note 0 Silent 9 G 5 1 CS 10 A5 2 C 5 11 A 5 3 D5 12 B5 4 D 5 Eb 13 C6 5 E5 14 CH6 6 F5 15 D6 7 F 5 16 D 6 8 G5 17 E6 CSI SPu none 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CSI SPt 1 234 none 0 5 6 7 8 CSI v d n 0 7 0 silent 0 255 1 32nd of a sec 18 F6 19 F 6 20 G6 21 G 6 22 A6 23 A 6 24 B6 25 C7 C 15 Host Command Summary Colour Selection Assign colour CSI i f b i Item Normal text 1 Window frame 2 not actioned f Foreground colour index 0 15 b Background colour index 0 15 Alternate text colour CSI a f b a Attribute 0 Normal text 8 Reverse underline 1 Bold 9 Reverse blink 2 Reverse 10 Underline blink 3 Underline 11 Bold reverse underline 4 Blink 12 Bold reverse blink 5 Bold reverse 13 Bold unde
16. This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode B 18 Character Sets COLUMN WY 60 STANDARD ANSI CHARACTER SET R O w 0 k I O Tm mou o D gt 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 loo ON o MOOT GA ALO ww ro nje jo o o gt o o o O vig OR Daa mao gt fef N lt x Z lt c lt c Amo nm O S This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode ma IV 33 27 1B OCTAL DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL B 19 Character Sets WY 60 GRAPHICS 1 CHARACTER SET COLUMN R O w 0 s 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 156 OCTAL KEY 110 DECIMAL 6E HEXADECIMAL This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode B 20 Character Sets COLUMN WY 60 GRAPHICS 2 CHARACTER SET R O w 0 k 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o ONN Noo oaa aja a ajo w wln a n o o o D5 Doo k G vig OR Daa mao This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode moan 114 76 4C OCTAL DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL B 21 Character Sets COLUMN WY 60 GRAPHICS 3 CHARACTER SET
17. in order division sign Latin 1 multiplication sign Latin 1 XX acute accent Latin 1 dieresis umlaut Latin 1 space Y acute Latin 1 Y y acute Latin 1 y capital Icelandic thorn Latin 1 TH in order small Icelandic thorn Latin 1 th in order capital Icelandic Eth Latin 1 D small Icelandic Eth Latin 1 d 3 8 Mouse Functions Mouse Functions This chapter describes the special functions assigned to the mouse and how to redefine them Introduction You can assign up to six special functions to the left and right mouse buttons when used in conjunction with modifier keys The following functions are defined by default Left Button Right Button Normal Select Edit Copy Shift Extend Selection Edit Paste Control Action Hotspot Unassigned Control Shift Select Rectangle Unassigned Alt Move Cursor Send Keyword Double Click Select Word Unassigned Redefining Mouse Functions You can redefine the functions assigned to the mouse buttons using the Mouse Button Actions dialog box which is displayed from the Settings menu Mouse Button Actions m x Left Right Cc shit CursorSelet 1 fatrate w EE naa z Double Click Select Word Unassigned z M f Mouse Functions This enables you to specify the functions of the left and right mouse buttons when clicked on their own
18. k k 1 H i dalj Ha s a 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 co oo Slus o o oana ala gt alo w oln o w Io o o gt on er OR Daa MAD mo 57 47 2F sk K af H OCTAL DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL E LF W F E F 8 T F mi dg HE a s L E s il ala Ka Ku s s HIS b Kik s F W F F m m W F F T Base TF SIs ee This is a special PT250 character set which is used by some applications B 25 Character Sets SIEMENS 97801 INTERNATIONAL A CHARACTER SET COLUMN R O w OOO NOGO WO N 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt N lt x Z lt c AGO Dn O 9 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 2 pzEciuAL 1B HEXADECIMAL B 26 Character Sets SIEMENS 97801 INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER SET COLUMN R O w 0 k o ON NNa o oaa aja a ajo w wln a nje o o o I O Tm mou o D gt e O O Q WO N 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt S Dlo o G gt N lt x Z lt w lt c lt c Amo mnm O S 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 bEcmaL 1B HEXADECIMAL B 27 Character Sets SIEMENS 97801 GERMAN CHARACTER
19. y Aq peyeolpul se uonounj s y peyxseWUN V 0 dd Besn y IeU1ON eBesn y UW ERE taq 3oV1d3t z L IX3N 4 anno 9 S v Je 9 9 gt led q 6 8 L YHOG avi Aaud awor nn 0 avLyova 30VdSyOV8 amaa p lJlus u uM 9L4 Ld se uollounj 94 d 19 UMA NISI JONNa LNIHd My UNA el yvaua q1oH anas old Hd Old 64 84 44 914 SH 9S3 19 6 Initialization Commands 20 Initialization Commands This chapter describes all the initialization commands that can be included in the registry or on the command line to run the emulator Introduction This chapter describes the registry entries and command line options that can be used to specify how the emulator is initially run Registry entries for the emulator are read from a registry key under HKLM Software Pericom lt product name gt using Startup Default or Startup NAME where NAME is specified using the N command line option Command line options are used to modify the configuration of the emulator on start up They are entered after the name of the emulator and each option must be preceded by a space An option is immediately followed by its setting if one is required without a space in between The following section p
20. 6b 813 ag NLLW 12 7 IBM 5250 Emulation Text Display Options Display Right to Left The contents of the screen can be displayed in reverse i e as a right to left mirror image by pressing the keys Shift Backspace This is a toggle function so pressing the keys again will revert to normal left to right display An arrow will be displayed on the status line to indicate normal right arrow or mirror left arrow display Typing Direction The direction in which characters are displayed on the screen when typed can be toggled between normal left to right and right to left by pressing the keys Shift on the keypad The characters gt or lt will be displayed on the status line to indicate the current typing direction Selecting the Symbol Swap option in the IBM 5250 Settings dialog box will cause symbols such as round or angle brackets to be displayed the correct way round when typing right to left Close Key If text has been typed using both typing direction modes in the same line or field you can force the right hand text to join the left hand text by pressing the keys Shift on the keypad Push Mode Push mode allows you to edit text whose direction is opposite the screen orientation In this mode the cursor orientation is reversed and a Push segment is created Push mode is toggled on off by pressing the keys Ctrl Shift keypad minus Push mode has two seconda
21. If you check the Save box your password will be stored encrypted in the registry along with your key Please bear in mind that this is a security risk Although no one will be able to read your password in the registry anyone who can get a copy of your registry settings can use them to logon as you The Key generated is actually a private public key pair The private key and optionally the password to decrypt it will be stored in your registry The public key will be displayed in the SSH Key Generation dialog box 2 23 Getting Started 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 SSH Key Generation x Filename Close myssh DSA IRSA New Group New key generated ssh dss AASABSNzaC 1 kc3MAAACBAPIW ac2KCSEP205Ly Ho IQ 3d6Z2k 7XPHKY srpVG gB 2X6R gad UNISdtsH e8kyvtkT SJwOse5tGhni FuCFal yt taz2c4q1SILx5IP Gepu w4e4E LUI h4UgHlO5CN pyazw 3NOGEY gnsdGx SfwqwOhijzZeyGdRpbUuS ac3OcOL6 A444FOCL FUSil8rAkKockWO u8LuJxqglIQASAIBY M0i 5 4Ug oRATPYG6IHPOB Abs wt2ZTh FPHwS 2SHMOtucUp AzOtimYL33m LS Ch857 h axvCw sHujEWNUX patD SXFhSyx1 r2jrlNbvE zpE SH2Bue44 gGMHfeG ZHIH WOFY7AaD hl eelwGu LoUJMxDo BFh10 GAAAIACEXC39N66299R SV dB BOcEJXgPNIZ1TBx y To make use of your key you need to copy it on to the server Select all in the text box and then copy to put the key into the Windows clipboard Logon to your server using username and password In your home directory you need to have a sub di
22. SCREEN MEMORY Define number of lines on each page ESC Lines Number of Pages per Page 4 Page Memory 2 Page Memory t 24 4 2 2 48 2 1 3 96 1 Autopage mode on ESC v Autopage mode off ESC w Display previous page ESCJ Display next page ESCK Display page ESC 1 SCROLLING Define a scrolling region ESC t br Enable line lock ESC 1 Disable line lock ESC 2 SENDING SCREEN DATA Reprogram delimiter d characters 1 amp 2 ESC x d 1 2 0 Field Separator 2 Start of protected field 4 Message terminator 1 End of line 3 End of protected field C 74 Host Command Summary Send unprotected characters in cursor line up to amp including cursor ESC4 Send unprotected page up to amp including cursor ESC 5 Send entire cursor line characters up to amp including cursor ESC 6 Send entire page up to amp including cursor ESC 7 Send unprotected message between start of text and end of text ESCS Send whole message between start of text STX and end of text ETX ESC s TAB STOPS Clear typewriter tab stop at cursor position ESC 2 Clear all typewriter tab stops ESC 3 Create column of tab stops at cursor position ESC 1 Move cursor forward to next typewriter or field tab stop HT Move cursor forward to next field tab stop ESCi Move cursor backward to previous typewriter or field tab stop ESCI C 75 Host Command Summary Unisys T27 Emulation FORM OPERATIONS Set forms mode ESC W Reset forms mode ESC X Tog
23. The ANSI 858 character set is used when the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to Ansi and the Ansi Code Page option is set to 858 B 10 Character Sets ANSI 1250 CHARACTER SET 0D _ O oO x O O o o lt O lt CO OO N O OQ OQ N Co c 0 o C c o _ alo lt gt 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 2 DpEcIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This table forms the second half of the ANSI 1250 character set the first half being the ASCII character set The ANSI 1250 character set is used when the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to Ansi and the Ansi Code Page option is set to 1250 B 11 Character Sets DG 410 412 WORD PROCESSING MATH amp GREEK ALPHABET CHARACTER SET COLUMN R O 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 0 8 8 1 D5 Nlo o PP P D E lt x e c lt q Q lt a z R 8 xN enaa S seama a INI KIPAPAK lt mY YM Q ri lt gt N m SS i M mM m lt Rg m 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 pEcIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL B 12 Character Sets COLUMN DG 410 412 LINE DRAWING CHARACTER SET R O w 0 k
24. backing store This enables graphics to be redrawn quickly from local memory when the TeemTalk window is uncovered after being obscured by other windows or when the window is restored or maximized from an iconized state The backing store feature can be disabled so that graphics data sent from the host can be drawn up to 50 faster Enable Plane Masking Registry Entry PlaneMasking on Command Line PM Default Setting off Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support ReGIS mode When TeemTalk is in ReGIS mode and you are using an application that uses multiple surfaces you can use this command to enable TeemTalk to support them Note that your PC must have a display adaptor that supports 256 colour mode and your system must be running in this mode in order for multiple surfaces to be supported Disable Sixel Graphics Scaling Registry Entry ScaleSixels off Command Line Y Default Setting on Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations By default the ReGIS sixel graphics display of 800x400 world coordinates is automatically scaled to fit the current size of the TeemTalk window This command will prevent scaling of the image and cause the right and bottom edges of the image to be clipped to fit the window if it is too big 20 19 Initialization Commands Keyboard amp Mouse Convert To MDIS P9 Registry Entry MDCUK Yes Command Line None De
25. command has been received from the host If you require the port to be kept open all the time to stop the printer resetting enter 1 minus one XPe Direct Print Data To The Print Manager When running TeemTalk for Windows XPe the Printer list box lists the printers handled by the Print Manager You can select from this list when the Use Network Printer LPR option is not selected Clicking the Setup button will display a Print Manager dialog box that enables you to specify printer settings The Microsoft Windows Print Manager normally controls all print formatting translates host characters to supported printer characters and also provides a spooling facility A disadvantage of using the Print Manager is that any print formatting escape sequences received from the host are stripped If you want to use the Print Manager but disable its print formatting process so that the original escape sequences from the host are retained select the PassThrough option Note that the PassThruogh option will be unselectable if the printer driver currently selected does not support this facility If you find a through print results in data being split into lines each treated as a separate print job specify a time in the seconds Close Delay box e g 5 seconds This will enable the next line of data to be sent before the print job is assumed to have finished and therefore prevents the print job from being closed prematurely When set to 0 TeemTal
26. Codes In Setup Entries 6 4 Colour Attributes 6 92 Colour Selection Line styles 6 92 Textattributes 6 92 Command Bar CE 2 41 Command Line Options Action on host connection close 20 5 Aux port bidirectional 20 21 Aux port opened amp bidirectional 20 21 Aux port opened at start up 20 21 Connection template touse 20 7 Crosshair cursor size 20 18 Disable backing store 20 19 Disable bell 20 7 Disable close window menu item 20 11 Disable colour palette 20 16 Disable Command bar 20 12 Disable Editmenu 20 14 Disable Exit box 20 6 Disable Filemenu 20 14 Disable maximize button 20 11 Disable menu bar 20 13 Disable menu bar amp pop up menus 20 13 Disable Menu bar amp toolbar 20 12 Disable Menu bar pop ups amp toolbar 20 13 Disable min maximize amp close button 20 10 Disable minimize button 20 11 Disable mouse editing 20 20 Disable scroll bar 20 15 Disable Settings menu 20 15 Disable sixel graphics scaling 20 19 Disable status bar amp DEC status line 20 16 Disable title bar 20 10 Disable tool buttons 20 12 Disable toolbar 20 13 Disable Tools menu 20 15 Disable window frame resize 20 9 Enable debug File Capture Replay 20 8 Enable Debug Log Send amp Receive 20 8 Enable plane masking 20 19 Flashing forall sessions 20 17 Graphics redraw on resize 20 17 New session warning message 20 5 Preload Winsock DLL for PPP usage 20 5 Reflection 4 colour support 20 17 Save 4014 graphics display 20 18 Set Tek graphics
27. Disable default field attribute ESC Disable field attribute visible renditions ESC Disable host protect ESC amp Disable OIA divide line ESC Disable host protect ESC amp Disable OIA divide line ESC Disable partition separate line ESC Disable read unprotected field ESC Display machine status ESC Enable default field attribute ESC Enable field attribute visible renditions ESC C 39 Host Command Summary Enable host protect Enable OIA divide line Enable read unprotected field Host message write Host message display Set character attribute Set field attribute Set field attribute response Create 1 viewport 24 rows x 80 columns Create 1 viewport 25 rows x 80 columns Create 1 viewport 28 rows x 80 columns Create 1 viewport 24 rows x 132 columns Create 1 viewport 25 rows x 132 columns Create 1 viewport 28 rows x 132 columns Create 2 viewports in 80 column screen Create 2 viewports in 132 column screen Create 3 viewports in 80 column screen Create 3 viewports in 132 column screen ESC amp ESC ESC ESC message ESC ESC ESC 4 attrib operation ESC 3 attrib attrib operation ESC 3 attrib attrib ESC SPr SP8 P ESC SPr SP9 P ESC SPr SP D ESC SPr SP8 D ESC SPr SP9 D ESC SPr SP D ESC SP r SP r1 0 SP r2 P ESC SP r SP r1 SP r2 D ESC SPr SP r1 0 SP r2 0 SP r3 P ESC SP r SP r1 SP r2 SP r3 D The ASCII ch
28. EURO Icelandic B 40 Host Command Summary Host Command Summary This appendix lists the host commands that are valid in each terminal emulation mode Additional special commands are listed at the back The following conventions are used in this command list Spaces in a command are for clarity only and are not to be entered as part of the command A space character that is part of the command will be shown as SP An asterisk in a command indicates the location of one or more parameters except otherwise indicated next to the command Note that IBM 3270 and IBM 5250 emulation commands are not included because of their complexity Refer to the manuals supplied with these terminals for the host commands that are supported VT52 Emulation CHARACTER SET SELECTION Invoke GO character set Invoke G1 character set Select GO character set Select Line Drawing character set CURSOR SI SO ESCG ESCF Direct cursor addressing 1 to 96 SP to DEL Insert FF character amp advance cursor Line feed Move cursor down one line Move cursor down one line Move cursor home Move cursor one column left Move cursor one column left Move cursor one column right Move cursor to left margin of current line Move cursor to next tab stop Move cursor up one line Reverse line feed ESC Y line column FF LF ESCB VT ESCH BS ESC D ESCC CR HT ESCA ESCI Host Command Summary TEXT ERASUR
29. Index Swedish B 38 Swiss French B 39 Swiss German B 39 Close key 11 9 Display right to left 11 9 Displayrule 6 51 Introduction 11 1 Keyboard mapping 11 10 National character settings 6 52 Notice Board facility 11 15 Notice Board setup 6 54 NVT mode 11 4 Printer support 6 50 11 4 Push mode 11 9 Record playback keystrokes 11 12 Selecting 11 1 Session configuration 11 1 Setup 6 50 Specification D 3 Status line 11 5 SysReq key support 11 4 Text display options 11 9 Typing direction 11 9 Virtual key names A 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Bilingual keyboard support 12 8 Character sets Austrian B 35 Belgian B 39 Canadian bilingual B 31 Danish B 33 English UK B 32 English US B 31 Finnish B 38 French B 34 German B 35 Italian B 36 Netherlands B 31 Norwegian B 33 Spanish B 37 Swedish B 38 Swiss French B 39 Swiss German B 39 Close key 12 8 Display right to left 12 8 Display rule 6 57 Fax image support 12 11 Introduction 12 1 Keyboard mapping 12 6 National character settings 6 58 Push mode 12 8 Record playback keystrokes 12 9 Selecting 12 1 Session configuration 12 1 Setup 6 56 Specification D 4 Status line 12 5 Text display options 12 8 Typing direction 12 8 Virtual key names A 5 Word Processing mode 12 6 IBM 5250 Printer Options 2 15 IBM EBCDIC Codepages B 40 ICL 7561 Emulation Specification D 4 Initialization Commands Introduction 20 1 ISO Latin Multinational Set 6 77 K Key Mapping Changing 3
30. Select blue alphanumeric character set ESCD Select blue graphics character set ESC T Select cyan alphanumeric character set ESCF Select cyan graphics character set ESC V Select green alphanumeric character set ESCB Select green graphics character set ESCR Select magenta alphanumeric character set ESCE Select magenta graphics character set ESCU Select red alphanumeric character set ESCA Select red graphics character set ESCQ Select white alphanumeric character set ESCG Select white graphics character set ESC W Select yellow alphanumeric character set ESCC Select yellow graphics character set ESCS CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Block graphics ESC Y Border graphics ESCZ Flashing on ESCH Flashing off ESCI Single line height ESCL Double line height ESCM CURSOR Cursor display on DC1 Cursor display off DC2 Home cursor RS Move cursor down one line LF Move cursor left one column BS Move cursor right one column HT Move cursor up one line VT Move cursor to beginning of line CR DISPLAY Clear screen amp home cursor FF Conceal display ESC X Hold graphics character ESC Release graphics character ESC _ GENERAL OPERATION Enter 40 column viewdata mode ESC 6 Enter 80 column viewdata mode ESC 5 Send Answerback string ENQ C 78 Host Command Summary VT640 Emulation ALPHANUMARIC MODE Select G0 character set for alpha text ESCSI Select G1 character set for alpha text ESC SO CURSOR MOVEMENT Move cursor down 1 pixel ESC
31. This is similar to the Line Modify F1 function described previously the only difference being that the editing mode is not exited when Return or Enter is pressed F2 and its equivalent button acts as a toggle key switching the mode on or off The setting may be saved by selecting Save Session in the File menu The F2 Modify All key and button enables you to edit and retransmit an incorrectly entered command string when the emulation is in Character mode This saves you having to retype the entire string again Note This will not function when the emulation is in Block or Format mode When the host causes an error message to be displayed indicating that the string has been incorrectly entered press the F2 key An asterisk will appear on the button indicating that the function is selected Move the cursor to the line containing the error edit the line then press Return or Enter This will cause the edited string to be transmitted To exit Modify All mode press F2 or click the button again Note Even though this function is a special form of Block mode it is completely separate from it and you do not need to enable Block mode before using the Modify All function Block Mode F3 Data may be transmitted to the host a character at a time or as a block of characters The F3 key and equivalent button toggles the form of data transmission between Character mode and Block mode The setting may be saved by selecting Save Session in the File me
32. off Copy off Paste off SelectAll off ClearBuffer off 20 14 Initialization Commands Disable Settings Menu Registry Entry Command Line Default Setting MS on SettingsMenu off These commands will disable the Settings menu Individual items in the Settings menu can be disabled by using the following registry entries Disable Attributes item Disable Block Transmission item Disable BQ3107 item Disable Emulation item Disable Graphics item option Disable HP2392A item Disable IBM 3151 item Disable IBM 3270 item Disable IBM5250 item Disable Keyboard Macros item Disable Local Editing item Disable Mouse Buttons item Disable Serial item Disable Soft Buttons item Disable TA6526 item Disable Terminal item Disable Unisys T27 item Disable Wyse item Disable Tools Menu Registry Entry Command Line Default Setting MO on ToolsMenu off Attributes off BlockTransmission off BQ3107 off Emulation off Graphics off hp2392a off Ibm3151 off Ibm3270 off Ibm5250 off KeyboardMacros off LocalEditing off MouseButtons off Serial off SoftButtons off ta6526 off Terminal off UnisysT27 off Wyse off These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator They will disable the Tools menu Disable Scroll Bar ScrollBar off SB on Registry Entry Command Line
33. reset The reset option enables the host or the Unisys T27 emulation to resequence by sending an asterisk for example after a system failure to ensure synchronization 6 61 Setup Menus Group Select Character Factory default D This specifies a single character address so that the host can simultaneously transmit to all terminals with that address Address Factory default D This enables you to specify a two character group poll address that enables the host to simultaneously poll all terminals with that address Downstream Terminal Port Factory default None This specifies the port used to send transmissions to other terminals Beep on NAK Factory default Selected Specifies whether an audible warning is emitted when the Unisys T27 emulation sends a negative acknowledgement of a select received from the host Fast Select enabled Factory default Selected Selecting this option will cause the Unisys T27 emulation to accept fast select group select and broadcast select messages while not in receive ready mode Monitor mode enabled Factory default Unselected When enabled line activity is monitored and messages being transmitted to and from stations on the data communications line to which you are connected are displayed Pass through printing enabled Factory default Unselected Enables or disables pass throueh printing Return key in forms exits field Factory default Unselected This determ
34. 9600 This specifies the transmit and receive baud rates for the port selected for host commu nications Parity Factory default None This option specifies the parity mode for each transmitted character If the number of Data Bits is 8 set this option to None Selecting Odd will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number Selecting Even will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number Mark parity will set every eighth bit to 1 and Space parity every bit to 0 Flow Control Factory default Input This option specifies the type of flow control used by the line port to communicate readiness to transmit or receive data from the host None No flow control Input XON XOFF on received data Output XON XOFF on transmitted data In Out XON XOFF on transmitted amp received data Hardware DTR CTS hardware flow control 2 27 Getting Started Data Bits Factory default 8 This option specifies the number of data bits sent for each transmitted character Stop Bits Factory default 1 This specifies the number of stop bits sent for each transmitted character Transmit Rate Factory default Unlimited The setting of this option determines the maximum effective baud rate that the emulatortransmits
35. ANSI specified modes ESC h IRM insert mode 4 SRM send rec mode HFT 12 TSM tab stop mode HFT 18 LNM linefeed newline 20 XTERM private modes ESC 3 3 h 132 80 column mode 40 Scrollbar hide show 42 Save scroll text on off 43 Margin bell on off 44 Reverse wraparound on off 45 Screen buffer alternate normal 47 Status line reverse normal 48 Scroll mode page normal 49 Other private modes ESC h Normal application cursor VT100 1 80 132 columns 3 Reverse normal video 5 Origin normal 6 Autowrap on off 7 Autorept on off 8 CNM CR NL HFT 21 Reset mode ANSI specified modes ESC 3 3 Reset mode other private modes amp XTERM private modes ESC 1 Restore mode other private modes amp XTERM private modes ESC r Save mode other private modes amp XTERM private modes ESC 5 3 s Ignore everything between ESC P and ESC AIXTerm works as normal after ESC N ESC P ESC KEYBOARD amp MOUSE Select numeric keypad application mode VT100 ESC Select numeric keypad normal mode VT100 ESC gt Disable manual input HFT ESC Enable manual input HFT ESCb REPORTS Device status report is one of the following ESC n Response from VT100 ready 0 Command from host please report status 5 Command from host report active position 6 Keyboard status information ESC p C 28 Host Command Summary PF key report HFT Report cursor position Report terminal identity
36. Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of ESC is 27 so this would be entered as _027 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references 6 71 Setup Menus Serial Settings Serial Settings i x rBaud Rate Data Bits 9600 X 8 rParity Stop Bits None v 1 v rFlow Control Transmit Rate v v On Line input t Unlimited ipt x J kap LocalEcho When the terminal is not in WBT mode this dialog box is displayed by selecting Serial in the Settings menu or by clicking the Configure button in the New Connection dialog box when the connection type is set to Serial Note that the port for serial communications is selected via the New Connection dialog box which is displayed from the File menu Baud Rate Factory default 9600 This specifies the transmit and receive baud rates for the port selected for host communications Parity Factory default None This option specifies the parity mode for each transmitted character If the number of Data Bits is 8 set this option to None Selecting Odd will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number Selecting Even will cause an eighth bit to be added with a valu
37. Display message on 25th line ESC o Display next page Conversational mode ESCU Display previous page Conversational mode ESC V Display page ESC Scroll down one line Conversational mode ESC T Scroll up one line Conversational mode ESCS C 64 Host Command Summary Select page Block mode ESC Set current line to 40 double width columns ESC 8 Set current line to 80 single width columns ESC 9 Set max number of pages for display Block mode ESC p Set page size to 24 lines by 40 characters ESCt Start field Block mode GS Start field extended Block mode ESC display data case Start enhanced colour field Block mode ESC Define field using pre defined attributes Block mode FS Write message m on 25th line ESC o m EDITING Delete character Block mode ESC P Delete line Block mode ESCM Disable local line editing Block mode ESCN Erase to end of line field ESCK Erase to end of page memory ESCJ Insert character Block mode ESCO Insert line Block mode ESCL Reset modified data tags Block mode ESC gt GENERAL OPERATION Data compression Enhanced Block mode DC2 Data compression Limited Block mode DC4 Define data type table Block mode ESCr Define data type table extended Block mode ESC r Define update variable table Block mode ESC s Delay processing for one second ESC End of transmission Block mode EOT Enter protect submode Block mode ESC W Exit protect submode Block
38. ESC Display revision ESC Z Report potentially destructive action to host ESC ESC Reset to original state notification 0 Clear screen notification 2 Load keyboard table command failed 3 Load keyboard table command successful 4 Report terminal identity ESC c Report terminal identity ESC 0c Report terminal status ESC n Ready 0 Report status 5 Report cursor position 6 VISUAL ATTRIBUTES Change visual attributes of area ESC p Active position to end of area 0 Start of area to active position 1 Entire area 2 Change visual attributes of character ESC q Change visual attributes of display ESC r Active position to end of display 0 Start of display to active position 1 Entire display 2 C 53 Host Command Summary Change visual attributes of line ESC t Active position to end of line 0 Start of line to active position 1 Entire line 2 Select graphic rendition ESC m Normal video 0 Strike through gt 1 Dimmed 2 Invisible gt 2 Underline 4 Line drawing graphics gt 3 Flashing 5 Block drawing graphics gt 4 Inverse video 7 Visual attributes locked ESC gt 12h Visual attributes unlocked ESC gt 121 C 54 Host Command Summary ReGIS Emulation MODE SELECTION Exit to VT100 VT200 mode MOUSE BUTTON PROGRAMMING ESC Program a mouse button c clear b button p press code r release code SIXEL GRAPHICS ESC P c w b p r ESC Direct sixels to host
39. Initialization Commands Disable File Menu FileMenu off MF on Registry Entry Command Line Default Setting These commands will disable the File menu Individual items in the File menu can be disabled by using the following registry entries Disable Factory item Disable Reset item Disable New Connection item Disable OpenSession item Disable CloseSession item Disable Save Session item Disable Save Session As item Disable Startup Options item Disable File Transfer item Disable FTP item Disable Print Setup item Disable Print Screen item Disable Print Buffer item Disable Auto Print item Disable Cancel Print item Disable Eject Page item Disable Exit item Disable Edit Menu EditMenu off MD on Registry Entry Command Line Default Setting Factory off Reset off NewConnection off OpenSession off CloseSession off SaveSession off SaveSessionAs off StartupOptions off FileTransfer off FTP off PrintSetup off PrintScreen off Print Buffer off AutoPrint off CancelPrint off EjectPage off Exit off These commands will disable the Edit menu Individual items in the Edit menu can be disabled by using the following registry entries Disable Clipboard Text item Disable Clipboard Graphics item Disable Copy item Disable Paste item Disable Select All item Disable Clear Buffer item ClipboardText off ClipboardGraphics
40. It is also displayed when you 13 3 IBM 3151 Emulation try to insert a character or line in a screen already full when the Forcing Insert option is set to Off If two or more messages are sent to a particular field then the message with the highest priority will be displayed Messages in field 4 are displayed in the following order HOLD SCREEN SENDING PRINTING KEYS LOCKED INVALID KEY WRONG PLACE NUMERIC Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where IBM 3151 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box 13 4 IBM 3151 Emulation Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout eBesn y IPULION eBesn y IonuoS payiys are shay y u ym p leiu u B ale sy yoLsq u suonound sdeS y ay uo spu B y Aq peyeolpul se uonouni s y PeyJeWWUN y lt gt 313130 Nunlay T AVL I f dO3t3 N1 Ed J 1ndul sei3 NIYI S 131 V UBBIDS Ud YOSd abessay Ud 9SN Hd eur puss 3NI1S abessay pues OSNS sa H YW SSW Hd LASS a 430 Sd td INIT S DSW S HOS d 13 5 IBM 3151 Emulation Defining Function Keys
41. Move cursor down one line VT C 44 Host Command Summary Move cursor to start of next line ESCE Move cursor up one line ESCM Move cursor to start of new page FF Move cursor one column left BS Repeat last displayable character times default 1 ESC b KEYBOARD Key presses generate codes which are sent to host ESC 21 Key presses are ignored except Break ESC 2h Define function key ESC P k p n ESC Extended keypad mode reset ESC lt 151 Extended keypad mode set ESC lt 15h PAGE MANIPULATION Page layout definition where p page number in range 1 8 default 1 number of lines default 24 c number of columns default 80 or 132 s start of scroll area default 1 e end of scroll area default as 1 Display buffer amp video format definition ESC p l c s e Mw ESC p c f x where p number of pages default 8 80 col or 4 132 col c number of columns default 80 f format options 0 single active page 1 multiple active page Set scrolling area where s starting line number default 1 ESC s e v e ending line number default is page length 80 column display mode 132 column display mode Move active position to absolute page number Move forward by number of pages Move backward by number of pages Save page state mode reset Save page state mode set Save current active page state Restore last saved page state Page display a
42. The keys mapped as F1 through F12 can be redefined from the keyboard or by the host The function keys can store up to 128 characters between them and can include escape sequences and ASCII control characters in addition to character strings Here we describe how to define a function key from the keyboard 1 Display the function key menu by pressing the keys Shift Esc Field A Field B 2 Specify the function key to be defined by entering a two digit number in field A for example 01 for F1 12 for F12 then press Enter Field B will display the current definition of the function key aAA la u t n AE alasan 6 AID In field B enter the new definition for the function key This can include a character string escape sequence or control characters A control character is entered by typing the keyboard equivalent For example the CR carriage return character is entered by pressing Ctrl M Refer to the Character Sets appendix to find the keyboard equivalents of other control characters The following example shows the definition entry for the F1 key so that it displays New definition then performs a carriage return when pressed DEF F 01 Pericom Software n 1 11 11 ssia You can erase the character at the current cursor position by pressing the keys Ctrl 2 If you want to restore the default definition press the Clear key while the cursor is in field B Press the Send key to store the key definition The fun
43. You can also remove the contents of the Fn key before recording by pressing the Delete key 3 Enter the keystrokes to be recorded You may pause recording at any time to allow keystrokes to be entered manually when played back by pressing Pause Pause mode is indicated by R XA To continue recording press Pause again Note Youcan cancel the newly recorded keystrokes by pressing the Quit key This cancellation does not affect the previously recorded keystrokes 4 To finish and save the recording press the Record key Playback Keystrokes 1 Position the text cursor where the playback is to start 2 Press the Play key to enter Play mode The status line will display PLAY and a series of boxes representing the Fn keys A solid box indicates that the Fn key in that position is currently storing recorded keystrokes 3 Press the Fn key storing the recorded data to play back Playback will begin immediately as indicated by a P on the status line All the recorded keystrokes will be played back automatically When playback is com pleted the P will disappear If the recorded keystrokes included Pause then playback will halt at that point to allow you to enter keystrokes manually Press Play to resume playback from where you stopped typing If you want to cancel during the playback operation press the Quit key Error Codes The following error codes may appear on the status line if an error occurs during recording or playback
44. b Move cursor down 16 pixels ESC B Move cursor left 1 pixel ESC d Move cursor left 16 pixels ESC D Move cursor right 1 pixel ESC c Move cursor right 16 pixels ESC C Move cursor up pixel ESC a Move cursor up 16 pixels ESC A Move cursor to beginning of line ESC CR Move text cursor down LF Move text cursor left BS Move text cursor right HT Move text cursor up VT Move text cursor to start of line CR GENERAL OPERATION Clear screen amp enter Graphics Text mode ESC FF Copy screen data to parallel port ESC ETB Request status report ESC ENQ Select bypass mode ESC CAN Sound bell BEL Specify data for graphics memory loading ESC Specify screen address for g memory load ESC h va Specify writing mode 0 pix off 1 on 2 comp ESC d Transmit graphics memory h v coords s bit sets ESC h v s c GRAPHICS TEXT MODE Select character size 0 80x34 ESC 0 Select character size 1 40x17 ESC 1 Select character size 2 26x11 ESC 2 Select character size 3 20x8 ESC 3 Select Graphics Text font 1 74x35 ESC 8 Select Graphics Text font 2 81x38 ESC 9 Select Graphics Text font 3 121x58 ESC Select Graphics Text font 4 133x64 ESC Select text zoom factor 1 ESC e Select text zoom factor 2 ESC f Select text zoom factor 3 ESC g Select text zoom factor 4 ESC h C 79 Host Command Summary MODE SELECTION Select Alphanumeric mode ACK Select Alphanumeric mode CAN Select Alphanumeric mode ESC CAN Se
45. click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details DG 410 412 Emulation For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the DG 410 412 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box This emulation provides compatib
46. click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Set the Alpha Emulation option to IBM3270 then click OK The terminal will now be in Network Virtual Terminal mode 11 2 IBM 3
47. columns ESC C Move cursor down one line LF or VT or FF Move cursor down one line ESCD or IND Move cursor down lines ESC B Move cursor up one line ESCM or RI Move cursor up lines ESC A Move cursor to beginning of line CR Move cursor to column one of next line NEL Move cursor to column one of next line ESCE Move cursor to column one amp down lines ESC E Move cursor to column one amp up lines ESC F Move cursor to column on current line ESC G Move cursor to line and column c ESC 1 c H Move cursor tab stops ESC I Move cursor previous tab stops ESC Z Set clear tab stops ESC W Set horizontal tab ESCH or HTS C 66 Host Command Summary DISPLAY Insert spaces at cursor location Restore cursor position amp video attribute Save cursor position amp video attribute Set current line to single width 80 columns Set current line to double width 40 columns Scroll display down lines Scroll display up lines Set current video attributes Write to message field EDITING ESC ESC 8 ESC 7 ESC 5 ESC 6 ESC T ESC S ESC m ESC P ESC Delete blank lines at cursor position ESC M Delete characters at cursor position ESC P Erase characters amp attributes at cursor ESC X Erase field ESC N Erase line portion 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC K Erase screen portion 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC J Insert blank lines at cursor po
48. currently selected National or Multinational character set will be substituted with spaces Send Record Separators Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether or not a record separator RS code is appended to each field of data when a block is transmitted to the host Record separator codes are used as markers between each field when this option is selected Send Spaces Compressed Factory default Unselected This option determines how spaces and empty character fields within a block of data are sent to the host When unselected a space character will be sent for each empty character position When selected a record separator code RS will be sent in place of empty character positions The last field on a line will contain end of line characters as specified by the End of Line Characters option 6 86 Setup Menus Send Partial Page Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether a partial page or data in the scrolling region is sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed and the Line Transmission On option is unselected When selected this option will enable a partial page to be sent to the host The format of the partial page is determined by the setting of the Transmit Protocol option When unselected the contents of the scrolling region will be sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed PF Key Effect Factory default None This option determines how u
49. d Delete all macros 0 Delete current macro 1 e Encoding format for macro text Standard ASCII characters Hex pairs for each ASCII character oO Control data string D D Repeat sequence introducer Invoke macro n macro ID number ESC n z KEYBOARD Enable local functions ESC n c n c q n Function number c Control performed All local functions Local copy amp paste Local panning Local window resize Factory default 0 Enable local function 1 Disable local function 2 Q t oOo C 9 Host Command Summary Local function key control k Function key number ESC k f k f Function performed All local function keys 0 Factory default 0 F1 or Hold 1 Local function 1 F2 or Print 2 Send key sequence 2 F3 or Set Up 3 Disable key 3 F4 or Session 4 Select modifier key reporting ESC k e k c r k Key number c Control performed All keys 0 Factory default 0 Left Shift 1 Modifier function 1 Right Shift 2 Extended keyboard report 2 Lock key 3 Key disabled 3 Ctrl key 4 Left Alt Function 5 Right Alt Function 6 Left Compose Char 7 Right Compose Char 8 PAGE MEMORY Set lines per page ESC 1t Session Dual Single l 3 pages 6 pages 24 2 pages 5 pages 25 2 pages 4 pages 36 1 page 3 pages 48 1 page 2 pages 72 1 page 144 Set left amp right margins 1 left column r right ESC 1 rs Vertical split screen mode L amp R marg
50. 64 characters in length The second field displays the current operating status and will usually display at least one of the following status indicators ANSI The emulation is operating in ANSI mode BLOCK The emulation is operating in Block mode CNTRL Display controls mode activated In this mode received control codes will be displayed but not actioned CONV The emulation is operating in Conversational mode HOLD Hold screen is activated The emulation stops processing incoming data when the Ctrl keys are pressed in ANSI mode To release the hold state and continue normal processing press Ctrl Q INS Insert mode is activated In Block mode keyboard entered characters are inserted at the cursor position without overwriting already existing characters LOCKED The keyboard has been temporarily locked by the application NUM Num lock is activated Num lock is toggled on and off by pressing the keys Alt Num Lock PROT Block Protect mode enabled Refer to the Block Mode section for details When the emulation detects an error the status line will be temporarily replaced by an error line which will display one of the following messages INVALID LANGUAGE SET REQUESTED You tried to use an invalid national character set INVALID DATA You tried to enter an invalid character in the current field when in Block protect mode 17 3 TA6530 Emulation Operating Modes The Tandem 6530 emulation operates in one of
51. Administrator If they have been changed and you wish to restore the default settings click the Default button in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box The following table shows the default settings 6 52 Setup Menus Default Language Codepage amp Character Set Settings Codepage Cosi 7 697 37 English US SBCS 3 English UK SBCS 285 697 285 Belgian SBCS 500 697 500 Canadian French SBCS 37 697 37 Danish SBCS 277 697 277 Finnish SBCS 278 697 278 German SBCS 273 697 273 Dutch SBCS 37 697 37 Italian SBCS 280 697 280 Swiss French SBCS 500 697 500 Swiss German SBCS 500 697 500 Swedish SBCS 278 697 278 Norwegian SBCS 277 697 277 French SBCS 297 697 297 Spanish SBCS 284 697 284 Portuguese SBCS 37 697 37 Japanese Kanji Katakana SBCS 290 1172 290 DBCS 300 1001 930 Korean SBCS 833 1173 833 DBCS 834 934 933 Simplified Chinese SBCS 836 1174 836 DBCS 837 937 937 Traditional Chinese SBCS 37 1175 37 DBCS 835 935 935 Hebrew New Code SBCS 424 941 424 Hebrew Old Code SBCS 803 941 424 Thai SBCS 838 1176 838 Greek SBCS 875 925 875 Cyrillic SBCS 880 960 880 Turkish SBCS 1026 1152 1026 Russian SBCS 1025 1150 1025 Czech SBCS 870 959 870 Slovak SBCS 870 959 870 Polish SBCS 870 959 870 Icelandic SBCS 871 697 871 Arabic SBCS 420 697 285 6 53 Setup Menus Notice Board Setup Notice Board Set up OKE x
52. Alt F4 would be specified as lt ALT F4 gt To send the function of a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For example F2 then F3 then F4 would be specified as lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt F4 gt Specifying Characters There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character For example the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries _027 Decimal value underscore character followed by a 3 digit number 033 Octal value backslash character followed by a 3 digit number u001B Unicode value backslash and u characters then unicode value Aj Control key value A represents the control key on the keyboard x Additional value for ESC The following backslash values can be used u Unicode introducer r Carriage return n Line feed e Escape Note that as the and characters are used as value introducers to enter these as character values you need to precede them with a backslash character i e enter as and as The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value u20ac 6 107 Setup Menus Notes 6 108 DEC VT Emulations DEC VT Emulations This chapter describes features of the DEC VT terminal emulations
53. CAN Sound bell BEL GRAPHICS TEXT MODE Select character size 0 80x34 ESC 0 Select character size 1 40x17 ESC 1 Select character size 2 26x11 ESC 2 Select character size 3 20x8 ESC 3 Select Graphics Text font 1 74x35 ESC 8 Select Graphics Text font 2 81x38 ESC 9 Select Graphics Text font 3 121x58 ESC Select Graphics Text font 4 133x64 ESC Select text zoom factor 1 ESC e Select text zoom factor 2 ESC f Select text zoom factor 3 ESC g Select text zoom factor 4 ESC h MODE SELECTION Select Alphanumeric mode ACK Select Alphanumeric mode CAN Select Alphanumeric mode ESC CAN Select GIN mode ESC SUB C 68 Host Command Summary Select Graphics Text mode CR Select Graphics Text mode US Select Graphics Text mode ESCFF Select Incremental Point mode RS Select Point mode FS Select Vector mode GS Select Vector mode ESC GS VECTOR MODE Clear Vector mode screen ESC FF Deselect write through amp selective erase ESC SOH Disable block fill erase ESC ETX Disable dark vector BEL Disable dark vector ESC BEL Disable rectangle drawing ESC r Enable block fill erase ESC STX Enable circle plotting ASCII equiv of coords ESC O Enable dark vector GS Enable dark vector ESC GS Enable rectangle drawing c corner coords ESC R c c Enable selective erase ESC DLE Enable write through mode ESC NAK Select dot dash line style ESC b Select dot dash line style ESCj Select dotted line style ESC a Select dotted line sty
54. CR Partition 0 Factory default Message Row The display is divided into two partitions numbered 0 and 1 Partition 0 is a single line that can be used to display status reports and messages either at the bottom or top of the display as determined by the setting of the Message Row option Partition 1 is a page of 24 lines The setting of this option determines whether Partition 0 is Blank or used as a Message Row 6 69 Setup Menus Message Row Factory default At Row 25 The setting of this option determines whether the message row Partition 0 is at the top or bottom of the display Blink Displayed As Factory default Caret In VIP mode the start of a flashing field can be indicated by a caret or space character Blank Displayed As Factory default Tilde In VIP mode the start of a blank field can be indicated by a tilde or space character Fill Character Factory default Asterix When inserting or deleting characters the setting of this option determines whether a Space or Asterisk character is displayed At Page Overflow Factory default Stop The setting of this option determines what happens when the cursor reaches the bottom of the screen Selecting Stop will cause the cursor to stop at the last position Scroll will cause the display to shift up one line and move the cursor to the new last line while Wrap will move the cursor to the top of the screen Auto Tabbing Factory default Selected When an unpro
55. Configure p Seconds Close Delay 2 31 Getting Started CE Direct Print Data To The Print Manager The Current System Printer Driver box displays the name of the currently selected system printer when both the Use Network Printer LPR and Print Direct To Port options are not selected Clicking the Configure button will display a Print Manager dialog box which enables you to specify printer settings If you find a through print results in data being split into lines each treated as a separate print job specify a time in the Seconds Close Delay box e g 5 seconds This will enable the next line of data to be sent before the print job is assumed to have finished and therefore prevents the print job from being closed prematurely When set to 0 printing will not start until a print end of job command is received from the host Entering any other number will cause printing to start after the specified number of seconds have elapsed regardless of whether the print end of job command has been received from the host If you require the port to be kept open all the time to stop the printer resetting enter 1 minus one XPe Direct Print Data To The Print Manager The Printer list box lists the printers handled by the Print Manager You can select from this list when the Use Network Printer LPR option is not selected Clicking the Advanced button will display the standard Print Manager dialog box which ena
56. Copy key to start the Copy function Note that the status line will display the key functions available Use the cursor keys to move the text cursor to the diagonally opposite corner of the display area to be copied The currently selected area will be highlighted in green Note that you can toggle the position of the text cursor between the two diagonally opposite corners of the selected area by pressing the Return key Press F14 to copy the selected area Press the function key required to store the copied data Press Enter on the numeric keypad to store the copied data in the chosen function key 11 16 IBM 5250 Emulation 12 IBM 5250 Emulation This chapter describes features of the IBM 5250 terminal emulation Introduction The IBM 5250 emulator provides emulation of 5250 type alphanumeric terminals both monochrome green white plus attributes and colour Colours may be modified using the Attribute Settings dialog box This emulation can be used for connection to an IBM AS 400 System 36 or System 38 A typeahead capability is provided so that you can continue to enter data without waiting for a prompt from the host Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add butto
57. Cursor These soft buttons can be programmed so that they perform various functions when clicked TATEM Level 1 You can define up to four soft button levels Level 1 is displayed by default Each level consists of twelve programmable buttons providing a combined total of 48 programmable buttons Levels stored off screen can be scrolled into view by clicking the arrow buttons TeemTalk for Windows XPe A set of soft buttons can be displayed along the bottom of the window These can be programmed so that they perform various functions when clicked Level 1 There are four soft button levels Each level consists of twelve programmable buttons providing a combined total of 48 programmable buttons The Visible Levels setting determines the number of levels displayed All levels are accessible even if they are not displayed levels stored off screen can be scrolled into view by clicking the Level 6 100 Setup Menus button Each level can be assigned a title which will be displayed under the Level button by entering up to eight characters in the Title box The soft buttons can be removed from the display by setting the Visible Levels option to 0 You can display the soft buttons in a separate window by deselecting the Attached option If you close the Soft Buttons window you can display it again by setting the Visible Levels option to anything other than 0 then clicking OK The current position and size of the
58. Direct sixels to printer Transmit sixel data p pixel shape ESC 2i ESC 0i or ESC 1i ESC P p b h q ESC b backgrnd colour h horiz spacing sixel data COMMAND LEVEL INPUT SELECTION Select command level input COMMAND SET STORING INVOKING Clear all stored command sets Clear stored command set Invoke command set Store command set CURVE DRAWING character character character set definition Draw arc from specified start position Draw arc with specified centre position Draw circle with specified centre Draw circle specified circum point Draw closed interpolated curve inter secting current amp specified positions Draw closed interpolated curve intersecting current amp specified positions closed with a straight line Draw open interpolated curve Draw open interpolated curve inter secting current amp all specified positions Set temporary writing controls effective only for the command using W Writing Control cmd amp options FILLING SHAPES C A deg of drawing start posn C A deg of drawing C centre posn C C centre position C circumference point C B positions E C B positions E C S positions E C S positions E C options W sub opts opts Define curved boundary shape for filling using C Curve Drawing com amp options Define straight boundary shape for filling using V Draw Vector command amp op
59. ESC 7 Scroll display down lines HFT ESC T Scroll display up lines ESC S Scroll left columns HFT ESC SP Scroll right columns HFT ESC SPA Select screen direction HFT ESC 1 18 Left to right set to Latin keyboard 0 Right to left set to National keyboard 1 Screen alignment display ESC 8 Set top amp bottom margins ESC t br Erase status line ESC E Return from status line ESC F Hide status line ESC H Show status line ESC S Go to column of status line ESC T Set text parameters ESC t 007 Change window name amp title to t 0 Sets only the icon name 1 Sets only the title name 2 EDITING Delete characters from cursor position right ESC P Delete lines from cursor position down ESC M Erase characters from cursor right ESC X Erase area is one of the following ESC O Erase to end of area 0 Erase from area start 1 Erase entire area 2 Erase display is one of the following ESC J Erase to end of display 0 Erase from display start 1 Erase entire display 2 Erase field is one of the following ESC N Erase to end of field 0 Erase from field start 1 Erase entire field 2 Erase line is one of the following ESC K Erase to end of line 0 Erase from line start 1 Erase entire line 2 C 27 Host Command Summary Insert blank lines ESC L Insert space characters ESC GENERAL OPERATION Lock shift G2 ESCn Lock shift G3 ESCo Reset to initial state ESCc
60. Entry CommandBar off Command Line CB Default Setting on This will remove the Command bar menus tool buttons and soft buttons from the emulator window Note that the menus can still be displayed by pressing the Alt key in conjunction with the relevant keyboard accelerator For example pressing the keys Alt F will display the File menu Disable Tool Buttons On Command Bar Registry Entry CmdBarTools 1 Command Line TB Default Setting on This will disable the tool buttons on the command bar 20 12 Initialization Commands Disable Toolbar Registry Entry None Command Line L Default Setting on This command will remove the toolbar from the window Disable Menu Bar Pop Up Menus amp Toolbar Registry Entry None Command Line CB1 Default Setting on This will remove the menu bar and toolbar from the emulator window and prevent access to pop up menus using keyboard commands Disable Menu Bar Registry Entry None Command Line MB Default Setting on This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It will remove the menu bar from the emulator window Disable Menu Bar amp Pop Up Menus Registry Entry None Command Line MB1 Default Setting on This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It will remove the menu bar from the emulator window and prevent access to pop up menus using keyboard commands 20 13
61. Getting Started chapter Monochrome Factory default Depends on terminal type By default the setting of this option will match the normal display characteristic of the IBM 5250 Model selected as shown in the list above In the emulator all terminal types support both monochrome and colour display When monochrome is selected characters will be displayed in green and intense fields will be displayed in white When monochrome is not selected the settings specified in the Attributes dialog box will be used for the display Ignore Host Cursor Style Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause the emulator to ignore any commands from the host to change the cursor style Enhanced UI Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will enable support of the IBM 5250 Extended User Interface for generating windows on the screen Note that menus and scroll bars are not supported Hide WP Controls Factory default Unselected This enables you to toggle the display of word processing characters on and off Field Minus Justification Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether pressing the Field Minus key affects the last digit unselected or the space following the last digit selected Font This enables you to specify the font to be used for displaying characters The available settings depend on the fonts installed National Character Settings This enables you to select the
62. Horizontal Coupling Factory default Unselected The setting of this DEC VT mode option determines what happens when the cursor moves beyond the last column displayed in the window when there are more columns stored off screen When selected the display will automatically scroll horizontally to keep the cursor in view When unselected the display will remain static and the cursor will move off screen To scroll horizontally to view the hidden columns hold down the Ctrl key and press the Left or Right Cursor keys Page Coupling Factory default Selected The setting of this VT420 mode option determines the effect of a remote command to move the cursor to another page When selected the page to which the cursor is moved 6 78 Setup Menus is automatically displayed When unselected the display remains unchanged and the cursor moves off screen to the relevant page stored in memory Auto Wrap Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether characters wrap to the next line when the right margin is reached When unselected on reaching the right margin the last character position will be overwritten by every new character received Auto New Line Factory default Unselected When selected this will cause a carriage return command to be appended to every line feed command received Auto Line Feed Factory default Unselected When selected this will cause a line feed command to be appended to every c
63. Menus End of Line Characters Factory default M i e CR This text box is used to specify the characters that are to indicate the end of a line ina data block To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the default ASCII character CR can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as _013 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references End of Block Characters Factory default None This specifies the characters that are to indicate the end of a block of data To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the ASCII character CR can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an
64. Properties E Force local _Diaina Properties Setup Menus Making An SSL Or SSH Host Connection if supported The optional SSL Secure Sockets Layer protocol enables authenticated and encrypted communication between clients and servers Refer to the SSL Connection section in the Getting Started chapter for details The optional SSH Secure Shell client server protocol is used to encrypt and transmit data securely over a network with authentication proof of client identity provided by a password and or key To enable an SSH connection this option must be selected and the Telnet Port Number option set to the host s SSH port 22 is the default for SSH When a Telnet connection is initiated the SSH Connection dialog box will be displayed prompting the user for authentication Refer to the SSH Connection section in the Getting Started chapter for details Open Session Not available in WBT mode TeemTalk for Windows CE This enables you to select a connection template The following dialog box will be displayed Description M Save As Default Delete The Description list box displays the names of connection templates that were created using the Save Session As dialog box The name of the connection template currently in use is highlighted The factory default connection template is Untitled Selecting one of the descriptions then clicking the OK button will cause the dialog box to close and the
65. Psje Se DIOS te You can redefine all the buttons and add or remove buttons from the toolbar using the Button Tools dialog box Refer to the chapter entitled The Toolbar for a complete description of all the default buttons and how to redefine the toolbar The Soft Buttons Windows XPe A set of soft buttons can be displayed along the bottom of the TeemTalk for Windows XPe window These can be programmed so that they perform various functions when clicked Level 1 There are four soft button levels Each level consists of twelve programmable buttons providing a combined total of 48 programmable buttons You can display all four levels at the same time if required All levels are accessible even if not all are displayed levels stored off screen can be scrolled into view by clicking the Level button The soft buttons are programmed using the Soft Buttons dialog box which is displayed by selecting Settings in the menu bar then Soft Buttons The setting of the Visible Levels option determines how many soft button levels are displayed Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for information on programming the buttons 2 45 Getting Started The Status Bar Along the bottom of the display is a status bar which shows the status of various operations and enables you to switch between modes The information displayed in the status bar depends on the current terminal emulation The following description applies when runni
66. R O w 0 s 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OCTAL DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode B 22 Character Sets PT250 ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET R O w 0 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 DECIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL These characters can normally be displayed in PT250 mode by holding down the Alt E keys and pressing the equivalent standard ASCII character key The equivalent standard character key is generally found by subtracting 128 from the decimal value of the Additional character then looking up the character with the resulting decimal number in the ASCII character set Exceptions to this rule are the standard characters 6 lt and 6 should be swapped with and should be swapped with lt and and vice versa B 23 Character Sets COLUMN PT250 LINE DRAWING CHARACTER SET R O w 0 k 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 al OCTAL DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL This is a special PT250 character set which is used by some applications B 24 Character Sets COLUMN PT250 BLOCK GRAPHICS CHARACTER SET R O w 0
67. SSL Secure Sockets Layer protocol enables authenticated and encrypted communication between clients and servers Refer to the SSL Connec tion section later in this chapter for details The optional SSH Secure Shell client server protocol is used to encrypt and transmit data securely over a network with authentication proof of client identity provided by a password and or key To enable an SSH connection this option must be selected and the Telnet Port Number option set to the host s SSH port 22 is the default for SSH When a Telnet connection is initiated the SSH Connec tion dialog box will be displayed prompting the user for authentication Refer to the SSH Connection section later in this chapter for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box The Advanced Options dialog box provides access to additional settings which are described later in this chapter TE Client Connection Wizard Advanced Options Defines Parameters for the Automatic Login Feature Printers Defines settings For printer support GUI overrides Defines any required overrides from default GUI Aux port Defines settings For the Aux port lt Back Finish Cancel If you are running TeemTalk for Windows XPe and are logged on as system administrator there will be two Session stored options to enable a session to be created or modi
68. Status Line vM A P n UrNumLock Action Block v Unavailable v Ignore NumLock Set Tabs Preferred Fonts rPreferred Char Set n r Courier New v DEC MCS w This dialog box is displayed by selecting Terminal in the Settings menu Note The Tab Stops dialog box displayed by clicking the Set Tabs button is described in the next section Display Rows Factory default 24 This specifies the number of text rows that can be viewed in the workspace at any one time out of the total number stored in memory This can be set to a maximum of 64 Note that the number of rows stored in memory is specified by the Memory Rows option Display Columns Factory default 80 This option enables you to specify a width of 80 or 132 columns for the workspace When set to 132 the setting of the Use 80 Column Font option determines whether all 132 columns are displayed using a narrow font or only 80 columns at a time using the normal 80 column font with the ability to scroll horizontally to view the remaining columns Use 80 Column Font Factory default Unselected This option specifies which font to use when the Display Columns option is set to 132 When unselected a narrow font will be used so that all 132 columns are visible in the window When selected only 80 columns will be visible using the normal font with the remaining columns stored off screen You can scroll horizontally to view the hidden columns by hold
69. Telnet port number if required Setting this to 0 will cause the number to be allocated automatically Telnet Name This enables you to override the name that will be reported for the terminal type over Telnet Enable Keep Alives Selecting this option will prevent the session from being disconnected from the host by an inactivity timeout Getting Started Connection Timeout Secs This enables you to specify how many seconds the emulator has to attempt to make a host connection before it either attempts to connect to the next host if Host Rollover is specified in the Host Connection dialog box or it issues a Connection Failed mes sage The default 0 setting will cause the emulator to use the stack default timeout Suppress Echo When selected this will will prevent the emulator from generating the Telnet echo option on connection Suppress 3270 Regime When running the IBM 3270 emulation the setting of this option determines whether or not support for the Telnet 3270 regime option is suppressed Suppress TN3270E When running the IBM 3270 emulation the setting of this option determines whether or not support of TN3270E is suppressed When this option is not selected i e TN3270E is not suppressed additional options are available by clicking the 3270 Options button These are described in the TN3270 Options section Suppress TN5250E When running the IBM 5250 emulation the setting of this option determines w
70. Unselected This option applies to the W Y 50 W Y 60 and all the TVI emulations It determines what happens when the cursor reaches the top or bottom of the page When unselected the cursor either moves to the top of the same page or data scrolls up from the bottom as determined by the setting of the Auto Scroll option When selected a new page of memory will be displayed Note The other emulations will always display a new page of memory Auto Wrap Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether characters wrap to the next line when the right margin is reached When unselected on reaching the right margin the last character position will be overwritten by every new character received DEL DestBS Factory default Unselected This option applies to the WY 50 and WY 60 emulations and determines what effect an ASCII DEL character has on displayed characters The other emulations ignore the DEL character When unselected the DEL character is ignored When selected the DEL character is interpreted as a destructive backspace causing the character to the left of the cursor to be deleted and the cursor to move into that position Margin Bell Factory default Unselected This option applies to all emulations and specifies whether or not an audible warning sounds when the cursor reaches a specified column The default bell column number is 72 in 80 column mode and 124 in 132 column mode Enhance Factory
71. Wyse PC Term Default unit command not supported Program key with direction not supported Set print terminators not supported Define delimiters not supported Product Specification Notes D 8 Index Index Symbols 4010 4014 Emulation Screen mapping 6 90 Settings menu 6 89 A AIXTerm Emulation Host command summary C 25 Specification D 2 Answerback String 6 29 AT amp T 4410 Emulation Host command summary C 30 Programming function keys 2 48 Selecting 2 4 6 26 Virtual key names A 2 Automate Login Process 2 29 Aux Port Settings Connection Wizard 2 38 Baud Rate Selection 2 27 6 72 Block Mode Cursor positioning 4 2 Settings 6 85 BQ 3107 Emulation Host command summary C 31 Keyboard mapping 8 4 Session configuration 8 1 Setup 6 69 Specification D 2 Statusbar 8 3 Virtual key names A 2 Buffer Rows 6 76 Button Tools Predefined functions XPe 5 1 Redefining XPe only 5 3 Windows CE 2 42 Windows XPe 2 45 C Character Set Selection 6 77 Character Sets B 1 ANSI 1250 B 11 ANSI 437 B 8 ANSI 850 B 9 ANSI 858 B 10 ASCII B 2 Controlcharacters B 1 DEC Additional B 4 Line Drawing B 5 National characters B 3 DG 410 412 emulation B 12 IBM 3270 emulation B 31 IBM 5250 emulation B 31 ISO Latin 1 Additional B 6 ISO Latin 2 Additional B 7 Multinational B 4 PT250 emulation B 23 Siemens 97801 mode B 26 Wyseemulations B 14 Characters In Setup Entries 6 4 Index 1 Index
72. a ES 12 10 Error CodeS ienen a a kuy u a E E T EN 12 10 Fax Image SUPPOTE Q qua w o ea EAA 12 11 IBM 3151 Emulation 13 1 Int OMUCHON eresie nnen a a a uuu rus 13 1 Session CONPIQUTATION 0 cecccceseceesseeesseceesceeeneeceseeesaeceeaaeneaeeceeeeesas 13 1 WB IMO decernere enes ner E E ET AS 13 1 Non sWBT Mode 22 2 n na m E 13 2 The Status Bara aaa a a a ave aaah aga 13 3 Keyboard Mapping cc a a a aW SS 13 4 Defining Function KEYS erise GO GG Gu A ayaka 13 6 MDIS Prism Emulations 14 1 Session Configuration 14 1 WB IT MOG iis suu aos ms m Sua M SS a gu 14 1 Contents 6 Contents N n WBT M0d u ss aa anual distances 14 2 Keyboard Mapping rneer ran e io e E EE EE 14 3 PT250 Emulation 15 1 Session CONFI QUVATION sssrini orn u EERE EE E 15 1 WB MOG ec aaa a aqata qawa EE SE 15 1 Non WBE Mode Lau sa asnay Saa EROE EEEIEI 15 2 The Status Line san g a S a ticks tee Oa P a s sss 15 3 Keyboard Mapping a 15 5 Displaying Alternate Characters 15 7 Siemens 97801 Emulation 16 1 Session Configuration 16 1 WBT Mode xs cite aaa E E OE EE 16 1 Non WBE Mode c yuaya en A A es AR E 16 2 Keyboard MappInpa Q
73. address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection select Modem specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection If necessary enter the appropriate information to establish an IBM host session in the Network Virtual Terminal mode screen When an IBM host session has been established the screen will switch out of Network Virtual Terminal mode and display the IBM 5250 emulation screen Note You will be returned to the Network Virtual Terminal screen when the connection to the IBM host has been closed 12 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Network Virtual Terminal Mode Network Virtual Terminal NVT mode allows the operator to communicate with a network gateway in ASCID for routing logon etc before the full IBM terminal emulation protocol is established NVT mode is indicated by the absence of the l symbol in
74. amp Sequences a aaasssssssss 3 3 Specifying Characters sisarskog ii iinan 3 3 Compose Character Sequences ossee 3 4 Mouse Functions 4 1 Introduction ennet eN RAEE Naa EENE EEE AGAT 4 1 Redefining Mouse Functions 4 1 Selecting amp Copying Text 4 2 Moving The Cursor In Block Mode 4 2 Den KEV WOIG Q t Qn E Ea a OA E E E u uu ahua 4 3 Show amp Action Hotspots aa 4 3 Emulating Middle Mouse Button 4 3 The Toolbal 5 1 Using The Toolbar y L N u Du S E E ss 5 1 The Predefined Button Tools aa 5 1 Contents 2 Contents Redefining The Toolbar naa 5 3 Addine Buttons a aaa una i a ha ataqa 5 3 Adding A Space Between Buttons asa 5 4 Removing A Button Or Space eseeeeesecsseeseesseeaseneeeseenes 5 4 Saving The Button Tools 2 nu Sau shaq g S ayasa 5 4 Assigning User Defined Functions aaa 5 5 Setup Menus 6 1 Displaying amp Closing Menus
75. an invalid sequence key e g Play while performing the Record function Remedy Press the Reset key While performing the Play function you pressed an Fn key that does not have a keystroke assigned to it Remedy Press the Reset key In communication mode you pressed either the Quit or Pause key Remedy Press the Reset key 11 14 IBM 3270 Emulation 9019 In Record or Play mode While the Record play pause indicator was displayed on the status line you pressed an invalid key e g Play key in Record mode or Record key in Play mode Remedy Press the Reset key Notice Board Facility Introduction The Notice Board is an area of the display in which copied data can be stored and manipulated When the Notice Board is enabled see Notice Board Setup dialog box pressing the Zoom key will toggle the display between full screen i e the screen currently containing the cursor and split screen host screen and Notice Board mode The Zoom Settings options in the Notice Board Setup dialog box determine which screen is displayed above the other When viewing the display pointers at each end of the dividing line between the two screens indicate which is the host screen Key Functions The keys used by default for Notice Board functions are shown below together with the equivalent virtual key names which can be used to assign the functions to any key on the keyboard 101 102 Key Keyboard Virtual Key Names NB Se
76. and right margin settings so that the left margin is in column 1 and the right margin in column 80 Key Programming The keys F1 through F8 and their equivalent buttons can be programmed by the host or user to perform additional functions to those described in the previous section The keys may be assigned a string of alphanumeric characters and or control codes and you can define whether the key string is executed locally or transmitted to the host or both The buttons can also be programmed to display the new functions when in User Keys mode User Keys mode is entered by pressing the F10 key The f key buttons displayed on the screen will change to display the current User Key definitions If no definitions have been assigned either by you or the host the buttons will just display the legends of each f key as shown below To define the function of an f key or equivalent button locally press the keys Shift F10 to display the User Key Definition menu as shown overleaf The menu can be exited by pressing F9 Default Definitions While this menu is displayed the f keys and equivalent buttons have the functions shown by the buttons at the bottom of the window so pressing F4 or the Default Values button will cause the default key and button definitions to be asserted The default definitions will take effect once the User Key Definition menu is exited 10 13 HP 700 92 96 Emulation f f f f B f B f f
77. and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection select Modem specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details 14 2 MDIS Prism Emulations Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where MDIS Prism keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the MDIS Prism keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the MD virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard M
78. as a block or underline character depending on the setting of this option 6 64 Setup Menus Cursor is hidden Factory default Unselected The cursor can be displayed or hidden depending on the setting of this option Cursor is static Factory default Selected The cursor can be displayed as static or blinking depending on the setting of this option Cursor wrap around Factory default Selected When selected when the cursor reaches the last data position on the screen it will automatically move to the home position DC1 clears line Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether the line is cleared or the emulator stays in receive mode when a DC 1 character is received DC2 advances dcp Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether the DCP data comm pointer is advanced or forms are toggled when a DC2 character is received Display CR from host Factory default Unselected When this option is selected carriage return characters received from the host are displayed Display CR from keyboard Factory default Unselected When this option is selected carriage return characters entered using the keyboard are displayed Display ETX from host Factory default Unselected When this option is selected an ETX character received from the host will be stored at the DCP data comm pointer location when the emulation is in nonforms mode 6 65 Setup
79. be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the IB virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box 11 10 IBM 3270 Emulation Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout 419 uA p sn u ym p e18u B sue s eyoesg aueNnbs u suonound p lltus ae s y y u ym peyesoUEB ase s eyoesq punou u suonounj sdeS y y uo spu B y Aq p leSiIpui se uonouni s y PayJeWWUN y besn y IPULLION Besn y 1IV POM KON CHM N PIOM SNOIASd dH d ee INTIMAN lt Ke gt 3OvdSyOVg VN xa uoaa Hsnd aso19 3dAL asia 3SH3A3t JOSIND leui l v HOLIV 99S JOSIND 13SH9 Pr Josing Buiyse 4 49l seO OUOW ONON POSEM REE kau 403 sel3 403 43 zig bla Ola 64 94 s4 13S3H ynduj eseiy dNIH3 gz3 zza tes oz 644 NL1Y piom a20 GYMG v2 kaonv C3suo Avid auosy Bb 2b ONOW 1103 Na 13s an FA Lind 11 11 IBM 3270 Emulation Record amp Playback Keystrokes Facility The record playback keystrokes facility enables you to eliminate repetitive operations by using the Fn keys to store retrieve and display data The Fn keys can store a total of 1500 keystrokes A sequence of recorded keystrokes may be interrupted so that keystrokes can be entered manually befo
80. box and change the Port Number to the host s SSH port 22 is the default for SSH then click OK 3 Click the Advanced or Configure button to display the SSH Connection dialog box SSH Connection x peter Cancel C Kepfile Passphrase r Password 4 Enter your username and password ensuring that Password is selected Then click OK 5 Click the Connect button TeemTalk will attempt to make the connection If the username and or password are invalid TeemTalk will prompt you to re enter them Note that some servers will not allow you to change the username at this point To work round this if you see your username is incorrect click Cancel to abort the connection and then restart as step 1 If your password has expired TeemTalk will prompt you to enter a new one 2 21 Getting Started SSH Connection to an openSSH Server using a Key File 1 Selectthe SSH option in the Connection Wizard Host Information dialog box or from the New Connection dialog Type list box when running TeemTalk 2 Display the Telnet Options dialog box and change the Port Number to the host s SSH port 22 is the default for SSH then click OK 3 Click the Advanced or Configure button to display the SSH Connection dialog box SSH Connection x root Cancel Keyfile l w Generate Key Passphrase Password m 4 Ifyou have already created a keyfile go to step 19 5 To create a new key file click Genera
81. by the letter T after the session name Refer to the Session Management section in the Getting Started chapter for details You can delete any session configurations except templates by selecting the description then clicking the Delete button Note that if the session deleted was a copy of a template which will have the same name the template version will reappear in the Defined Sessions list as indicated by the letter T Close Session Not available in WBT mode This will close the current session Save Session Selecting this option will save the current session configuration TeemTalk for Windows XPe If you were using a session template and modified the settings a local copy of the template will be made with the same name but with the changed settings This copy will replace the template in the list of session configurations displayed in the Open Session dialog box Note that the T template indicator will no longer be displayed Setup Menus Save Session As Not available in WBT mode TeemTalk for Windows CE This will display a dialog box that enables you to save the current session configuration as a connection template Save Session As OR x Save As File Name Untitled Saved Items V Keyboard Macros V Soft Buttons V Attributes V Window Metrics M Text Rows V Buffer Rows V Connection V Terminal Settings You can create multiple connection templates any one of which can be selected for us
82. command is received Attributes Use Normal BG Factory default Unselected This option only applies to the IBM 3270 emulation If attribute indicators take up character positions on the screen you can force those positions to display the normal background colour instead of the attributes by selecting this option Use Italic with Intensity Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause any characters that have the intensity bold attribute to be italicized Use Bold Font Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause all characters to be displayed using a bold font Non Anti alias Font Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will prevent characters from overlapping when using a low display resolution in Microsoft Windows ClearType display mode 6 94 Setup Menus Customizing The Colour Selection You can change any of the 16 colours displayed in the Foreground and Background colour palettes To do this select the colour you wish to change in one of the palettes then click the Set Colour button to display the Colour dialog box Color 2 BORG E Basic colors eee ee ee E En T OF F En Eu ee mm r m I m m sm m m s s m mire rs r m Custorn colors Define gt gt This shows the basic and custom colours currently available for selection If you want to use one of these click on the colour required then tap OK If you want to define a different custom colour c
83. configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 16 1 Siemens 97801 Emulation Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the Siemens 97801 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for a
84. data Comm port none 0 1 8 bits 1 0 none Printer port 2 Tbits 2 y parity s stop bits No parity none 0 1 1 bit none 0 1 Even 2 2bits 2 Odd 3 Even 4 Odd unchecked 5 Mark 6 Space 7 Set transmit rate limit CSI k s u k keytype Allkeys none 0 1 Graphic key 2 Function key 3 C 23 Host Command Summary s characters per second 150 cps none 0 1 50 cps 2 30 cps 3 Transmit rate limiting mode set limited CSI 73h Transmit rate limiting mode reset unlimited CSI 731 Terminal Synchronization Disconnect delay time CSI q delay time None 1 60 ms 2 2 seconds none 0 3 Flow control CSI p d f t s p port type d direction Comm port none 0 1 Transmit 1 0 none Printer port 2 Receive 2 Tx amp Receive 3 f flow control type t flow control threshold XON XOFF or XPC 1 0 none Low 64 none 0 1 DTR 2 High 768 2 Both 3 None 4 note that the last is part of the command Null mode set ignore NUL Null mode reset accept NUL CSI 102h CSI 1021 C 24 Host Command Summary AlXTerm Emulation All commands are supported in both VT100 and HFT High Function Terminal modes unless indicated otherwise SINGLE BYTE CONTROLS Bell BEL Backspace BS Horizontal tab HT Linefeed LF Vertical tab VT Form feed FF Carriage return CR Shift out SO Shift in SI Device control 1 DC1 Device control 3 DC3 Cancel CAN Substitute SUB Escape ESC CHARACT
85. default Selected When this option is selected the emulator will recognize an additional set of Wyse codes which are not normally supported by specific non Wyse terminals Answerback Mode Factory default Unselected This option applies to all emulations and specifies whether or not an answerback message is automatically sent to the host in response to an ASCII ENQ character 6 46 Setup Menus Send ACK Factory default Selected This option applies to all emulations and specifies whether or not an ASCII ACK character is sent to the host port after certain commands have been executed Block Mode Factory default Unselected This option applies to all emulations In Block mode keyboard entered data is displayed and processed locally allowing you to edit it before a block of data is sent to the host When Block mode is disabled data is sent to the host as it is entered at the keyboard Colour Support Factory default Unselected When this option is selected an additional set of host commands will be recognized to determine the colours used for the display Wyse 350 colour commands will be recognized in all modes except Wyse 60 which will use Wyse 60 colour commands Application Key Mode Factory default Unselected When application key mode is selected the function keys and certain editing keys will send application codes when pressed regardless of whether or not the keys have been redefined When this option is not
86. default 1 ESC j Move cursor to absolute line number position ESC d Move cursor lines down default 1 ESC e Move cursor lines up default 1 ESC k Move cursor columns right default 1 ESC o Line addressing relative to top line of page ESC lt 61 Line addressing relative to scroll region ESC lt 6h Make cursor invisible ESC lt 41 Make cursor visible ESC lt 4h Set tab stop at current cursor position ESCH C 42 Host Command Summary Set tab stops at specified column numbers ESC c c cSPN Clear tab stops 0 at cursor position 2 amp 3 all on page ESC g Set tab stop at current cursor position ESC 0W Clear tab stops 2 at cursor position 4 amp 5 all on page ESC W Move cursor to next tab stop HT Move cursor to next tab stop ESC I Move cursor to previous tab stop ESC Z DISPLAY Status line off Hex E5 Status line on Hex E3 Assign attribute s to following characters default 0 ESC Attributes Flashing 1 Bold 8 Underline 2 Protected 32 Inverse video 4 Select graphic rendition ESC Pa Pam Attributes Clear all Normal intensity 22 0 Bold 1 Underline off 24 Underline 4 Flashing off 25 5 7 Flashing Inverse video off 27 Inverse video Assign line attributes to current line ESC Attributes Single width single height default 0 Double width 1 Double height amp width top half 2 Double height amp width bottom half 3 No attributes ETX SP Bold attr
87. height 20 18 Set Tek graphics width 20 18 Soft buttons displayed 20 16 Summary 20 2 Window maximized 20 9 Window minimized 20 9 Window subtitle 20 10 Window title 20 10 Workspace fills screen 20 9 Compose CharacterSequences 3 4 Connection Information Connection Wizard 2 1 Connection Template CE Creating 6 5 Selecting 6 6 Connection Template XPe Creating 6 6 Connection Wizard Automate Login Process 2 29 Aux Port Settings 2 38 Connection Information 2 1 GUI Overrides 2 36 Host Information 2 2 Printer Port Settings 2 31 Control Characters B 1 Displaying 6 79 Keyboard equivalents B 1 Conventions 1 3 Copy amp Paste Edit menu options 6 23 Using mouse 4 2 Cursor Positioning in block mode 4 2 Index 2 Index D DEC Multinational Set 6 77 DEC VT Emulations Horizontal scrolling 7 5 Keyboard mapping 7 5 Specification D 3 Status bar 7 4 Default Setup Settings 6 4 6 9 DG 410 412 Emulation Character sets Alphabet B 12 Line Drawing B 13 Math B 12 Word Processing B 12 Host command summary C 32 Keyboard mapping 9 3 Session configuration 9 1 Specification D 3 Virtual key names A 3 Display 80 column font 6 75 80 132 columns 6 75 Autoresize 6 81 Buffersize 6 76 Control codes 6 79 Copy right to left 6 80 Cursor moves right to left 6 80 Cursortype 6 76 DEC status line 6 76 Errorcodes 6 80 Jump smooth scroll 6 80 Languageselection 2 1 6 24 Preferredfont 6 52 6 58 6 77 Rows 6 75 Textattri
88. host to VT100 Report terminal identity host to VT100 Terminal response VT100 to host ESC q ESC 1 cR ESC c ESC 0c ESC 7 1 Ze C 29 Host Command Summary AT amp T 4410 Emulation CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Normal Dimmed Underline Flashing Reverse video Blanked CURSOR ESC Om ESC 2m ESC 4m ESC 5m ESC 7m ESC 8m Cursor down one line or lines Cursor left one column or columns Cursor right one column or columns Cursor up one line or lines ESC B or ESC B ESC D or ESC D ESC C or ESC C ESC A or ESC A Cursor to line 1 column 1 ESC H Origin mode ESC 6h Origin mode reset ESC 61 Move cursor to line 1 and column c ESC 1 cf Move cursor to line 1 and column c ESC 1 c H Save cursor location ESC7 Restore cursor location ESC 8 Reverse index ESCM DISPLAY 132 column display ESC 3h 80 column display ESC 31 Clear all ESC 2J Clear to cursor ESC 1J Clear to end of display ESC J Clear to end of line ESC K or ESC O0K Clear line to cursor ESC 1K Clear entire line ESC 2K Download label entry 1 1 8 2 no of chrs in def ESC 1 2 q label definition Reverse video screen ESC 5 h Reverse video screen reset Scrolling region EDITING ESC 5 1 ESC 1 2 Delete character or characters Delete line or lines Insert character or characters Insert line or lines GENERAL OPERATION ESC P or ESC P ESC M or E
89. if you want characters to be processed before the delay insert any other VK virtual key name immediately before lt VK_SLEEPnnn gt For example 123 lt VK_TAB gt lt VK_SLEEP100 gt 456 If you do not include the additional virtual key name the lt VK_SLEEPnnn gt delay will be executed before any preceding characters are processed A 11 Virtual Key Names Notes Character Sets Character Sets This appendix shows the supported character sets Introduction Each character set consists of a series of control characters and displayable charac ters Displayable characters are alphanumeric symbolic or graphic characters that can be displayed on the screen or printed by a hardcopy device Control characters enable the terminal emulation or the printer to perform specific tasks such as a line feed or carriage return These will be actioned when received from the host or when the emulator is in local mode and they are entered from the keyboard Note When the Display Controls option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is selected a representation of most control characters received will be displayed on the screen instead of actioned To enter a control character from the keyboard first find the displayable character equivalent by adding 64 to the decimal value of the control character in the relevant character set table For example the control character CR carriage return has a decimal value of 13 Add
90. in the Open Session dialog box Note that the T template indicator will no longer be displayed If the user deletes this session the original template will be listed instead The user cannot delete session templates Logged On As A User If you are logged on as a user without administrative privileges you can load a session template created by the system administrator modify the setup to suit your requirements then save a local copy of it When TeemTalk is started without a session i e not started by clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu the name of each available session template will be listed in the Open Session dialog box together with the letter T to indicate that they are templates 2 39 Getting Started When you load a template modify the settings then save the session a local copy of the template will be made with the same name but with the changed settings This copy will replace the template in the list of session configurations displayed in the Open Session dialog box Note that the T template indicator will no longer be displayed If you delete this session the original template will be listed instead Asa user you cannot delete session templates 2 40 Getting Started TeemTalk for Windows CE Display The TeemTalk for Windows CE command bar provides access to a series of menus and buttons that enable you to configure the terminal emulator and perform various f
91. incorporate all the characters contained in the ASCII 7 bit or lower half and PT250 Additional 8 bit or upper half character set tables shown in the Character Sets appendix When the emulation is in 7 bit mode only the lower half i e 7 bit part of the Standard and Alternate character sets can be used so the ASCII characters in the Alternate character set are replaced by the PT250 Additional characters which are then treated as 7 bit characters You can toggle between Standard and Alternate character set mode by pressing the keys Alt A This emulates the function of the Char Set key found on the PT250 keyboard enabling you to display characters from the Additional character set which are not available for the keyboard nationality you have selected in setup The following table lists the Standard ASCII characters in the left column with their equivalent Additional characters in the right column of each block Press the key bearing the ASCII character to generate the Additional character when you are in Alternate character set mode Alternate Equivalents Of Standard Characters SP 0 e e P 1 i 1 A Q a iq 2 B R b 4 r 3 2 c s c a s x 4 D A T d t 5 E U e ul 6 amp 6 F v fle v 6 8 7 G W x g w 8 H X h x 9 I Y i y cml J z
92. inhibited ESC amp s0G Hand shake inhibited ESC amp s 1G Hard reset ESCE Local echo disabled ESC amp k OL Local echo enabled ESC amp k1L Local mode disabled only for user f key ESC amp k1R Local mode enabled only for user f key ESC amp kOR Modem disconnect ESCf Self test ESCz Soft reset ESC g C 37 Host Command Summary KEYBOARD Auto keyboard lock off ESC amp k0K Auto keyboard lock on ESC amp k1K Auto line feed mode off ESC amp k0A Auto line feed mode on ESC amp k1A Caps lock off ESC amp k0C Caps lock on ESC amp k1C Caps mode off ESC amp k0P Caps mode on ESC amp k1P Function key codes local only ESC amp s0A Function key codes transmitted to host ESC amp s1A Lock keyboard ESC c Space overwrite latch disabled ESC amp s0B Space overwrite latch enabled ESC amp s1B SPOW latch off ESC amp kON SPOW latch on ESC amp k1N Unlock keyboard ESC b LOCAL EDITING MODE Data block for transmission is cursor line ESC amp s0D Data block for transmission is page ESC amp s1D Enter edit mode ESC amp k1B Enter interactive mode ESC amp k 0B Transmit block of text to host ESC d PRINTING Copy all to printer ESC amp pM or ESC amp p0 M Copy display memory to printer ESC 0 Copy line to printer ESC amp pB or ESC amp p0OB Copy page to printer ESC amp pF or ESC amp pOF Data transfer host to printer 1 256 ESC amp p W Disable logging ESC amp p13C Enable bottom logging ESC amp p11C Enable top log
93. lt This indicates the direction in which characters are displayed on the screen when typed The direction is toggled between left to right normal and right to left by pressing the keys Shift on the keypad Bilingual Keyboard Mode N or L Shift NUM This indicates whether the National N or Latin L character set is active when a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard is selected Pressing the keys Shift on the keypad will toggle between the two character sets This indicates that the numeric lock function is enabled and the current cursor is in a numeric field When the numeric lock function is on the current cursor is in an unprotected field and the keyboard is in lowercase shift you can only use the 0 to 9 decimal sign minus and Dup keys Mode Symbol A This symbol indicates that the keyboard is in Insert mode Al ready existing characters to the right of the cursor will move to make room for new characters that are entered Insert mode can be disabled by pressing the Reset or SysReq key or by per forming any action that sends data to the host such as pressing the Enter Clear PA or PF keys Display Direction gt or e This indicates the orientation of the screen display A right arrow indicates normal left to right display a left arrow indi cates a right to left mirror image display The display can be toggled between the two directions by pressing the keys Shift Backspace
94. of write protected characters on the display They can be displayed in reverse video dimmed or blinking The WY 50 and WY 60 emulations also support the underline and invisible attributes Multiple Page Factory default Unselected This option applies to the WY 50 WY 60 and all the TVI emulations It determines whether or not more than one page of display memory can be accessed When selected all pages will be accessible See also the Auto Page option Note that the TVI emulations support two pages of 24 lines each when this and the Auto Page options are selected regardless of the Lines and Page Size settings 80 132 Clears Factory default Unselected This option applies to the WY 50 and WY 60 emulations and determines whether or not data is cleared from the display when the number of columns is changed The screen is always cleared when the number of columns is changed in the other emulations Economy 80 Factory default Unselected This option applies to the WY 50 and WY 60 emulations and enables 80 column display with more lines of display memory Auto Scroll Factory default Selected This option applies to all emulations and determines what happens when the cursor is moved beyond the last line of the current page When selected the displayed data scrolls up and the cursor remains on the last line When unselected the cursor moves to the top of the same page 6 45 Setup Menus Auto Page Factory default
95. or in conjunction with modifier keys You can assign up to six functions to each button either entering your own definition in the same format as described for keyboard macros and soft buttons or selecting from a list of standard built in functions Clicking one of the arrow buttons will display a drop down list box which lists all the standard functions that can be assigned Unassigned Send CR Select Send Keyword Extend Selection Middle Button Edit Copy Select Rectangle Edit Paste Select Word Show Hotspots Select and Copy Action Hotspot Cursor Select Move Cursor Rectangular Select and Copy The setting of the Highlight When Actioned option determines whether or not a visual indication is given that a function has been actioned when a hotspot is clicked Selecting amp Copying Text You can use the mouse buttons to copy and paste text The region of the display that will be selected for copying depends on whether you use the Select Select and Copy Select Rectangle Rectangular Select and Copy or Select Word function The Select function will select all text from the start position to the finish position working left to right across the entire width of the display whereas the Select Rectan gle function will only select text contained within the rectangular area defined by the start position top left corner and the finish position bottom right corner The Select Word function will cause the word under the mouse cursor to be
96. or the Unisys T27 emulation transmitted a character to the host or the user pressed LOCAL Blink The host connection is active and the Unisys T27 emulation has an active address ENG ENQUIRY On The host is unable to send a message to the keyboard e EH Ei LOCAL RCV XMIT environment press RCV to enable the keyboard environment to receive data Off The DCP data comm pointer page went into receive mode or the user pressed LOCAL On The user pressed LOCAL or the user pressed a key when the cursor and the DCP data comm pointer were in the same page Off The Unisys T27 emulation is switched to transmit or receive mode On The keyboard environment is in receive mode ready to receive data or is receiving data from the host or FSL GSL BSL was received while the T27 was in transmit or local mode and the Fast Select enabled option is selected in the Unisys T27 Settings dialog box Off Data has been received successfully or the T27 went into transmit mode by use of XMIT or SPCFY or the cursor and DCP are in the same page upon data entry On The keyboard environment is transmitting data to the host or is ready to transmit data 18 3 Unisys T27 Emulation Off Transmission has been successfully completed or the T27 is switched to local mode Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where Unisys T27 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT ke
97. point and click this button or press the F1 key The start column will revert to that specified within setup when the emulation is reset or re entered Set Tab F2 This function enables tab stops to be defined To define a tab stop move the cursor to the column to contain the tab and click this button or press F2 Note Tab stops that do not lie within the left and right margins will be ignored when the Tab key is pressed All tab stops will be ignored when the emulation is in Format mode Clear Tab F3 This function enables an individual tab stop to be cleared To clear a tab stop move the cursor to the column containing it and click this button or press F3 Cir All Tabs F4 Clicking this button or pressing F4 will cause all defined tab stops to be cleared except the left margin which is an implicit tab stop Left Margin F5 This function enables you to define the left margin Margins determine the boundary for certain cursor movement commands such as carriage return and cursor home and insert character and delete character functions Data to the left of this margin will still be accessible The left margin is an implicit tab stop When data received from the host or entered through the keyboard reaches the right margin the cursor will move to the specified left margin on the next line down as long as InhEolWrp is not selected in the HP Settings dialog box and in the case of keyboard entered data auto line feed mode
98. section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box 2 Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed 3 Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box 4 Select the IBM 3270 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box IBM 3270 Emulation Select the IBM 3270 Model which determines the size of the display and whether or not extended attributes are supported One of four display sizes can be selected 3278 9 2 24 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 3 32 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 4 43 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 5 27 rows by 132 columns Settings with the E extension provide support for the following extended at tributes 3270 field attributes extended highlighting blink flash and underscore but not in combination foreground colour and query reply inbound structured fields These attributes are also supported by the 3279 Specify if you want the right or left Control keys to perform the same function as the keypad Enter or Reset keys respectively Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection
99. sessions none FB Reflection 4 colour support iR4Colours 1 R4 IB Graphics redraw on resize GraphicsRedraw mode G0 4 Mi Crosshaie cursor size CrosshairSize 0 1024 X0 1024 E Save 4014 graphics display SaveTekImage on P Mi Tek graphics area height GraphicsHeight integer GHinteger IB Tek graphics area width GraphicsWidth integer GWinteger Mi Disable backing store BackingStore off B IB Enable plane masking PlaneMasking on PM E Disable sixel graphics scaling ScaleSixels off Y Keyboard amp Mouse Command Function Registry Entry Command Line MDIS P9 emulation convert to MDCUK Yes none Disable all mouse edit functions MouseEdit off ME1 Enable all mouse edit functions MouseEdit on ME2 Enable mouse highlighting only MouseEdit disabled MEO Auxiliary Port Command Function Registry Entry Command Line Set auxiliary port as bidirectional none BA1 Auxiliary port opened at start up none BA2 Aux port opened amp bidirectional none BA3 20 4 Initialization Commands Host Connection Load Winsock On Start up Registry Entry None Command Line LW Default Setting Off This will initialize the Winsock stack immediately when the emulator is started enabling dialup over PPP or SLIP to gain a connection to a service provider Action On Host Connection Close Registry Entry ExitOnClose on emulator exits immediately ExitOnClose off emulator does not exit ExitOnClose con
100. set Assign G0 labelled set to 7 bit codes Assign G1 labelled set to 7 bit codes Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes Assign G3 labelled set to 7 bit codes Assign G1 labelled set to 8 bit codes Assign G2 labelled set to 8 bit codes Assign G3 labelled set to 8 bit codes Assign G1 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character Assign G3 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character Load redefinable character set COMMUNICATIONS ESC ESC ESC second is parameter ESC SI SO ESCn ESCo ESC ESC ESCI ESCR ESCN ESCO ESC P b c e q S1 Sn ESC Transmission on XON Transmission off XOFF Select 7 bit C1 code transmission ESC SP F Select 8 bit C1 code transmission ESC SP G CURSOR Cursor off Hex E4 Cursor on Hex E2 Move cursor lines up default 1 ESC A Move cursor lines down default 1 ESC B Move cursor columns right default 1 ESC C Move cursor columns left default 1 ESC D Move cursor lines down and to start of line default 1 ESC E Move cursor lines up and to start of line default 1 ESC F Move cursor to specified line and column c on page ESC l1 c H Move cursor to specified line and column c on page ESC 1 c f Move cursor to absolute column number position ESC G Move cursor to absolute column number position ESC Horizontal position relative ESC a Move cursor columns left
101. space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 39 Character Sets IBM EBCDIC CODEPAGES SUPPLIED ren 37 SBCS USA Canada Netherlands Portugal Brazil 273 SBCS Austria Germany 274 SBCS Belgium old 277 SBCS Denmark Norway 278 SBCS Finland Sweden 280 SBCS Italy 284 SBCS Spain Latin America Spanish 285 SBCS UK 290 SBCS Japanese Katakana 297 SBCS France 300 DBCS Japanese Kanji 420 SBCS Arabic 424 SBCS Hebrew New Code 500 SBCS Latin 1 Belgium Canada Switzerland 803 SBCS Hebrew Old Code 833 SBCS Korean 834 DBCS Korean 835 DBCS Traditional Chinese 836 SBCS Simplified Chinese 837 DBCS Simplified Chinese 838 SBCS Thai 870 SBCS Latin 2 Czech Slovak Polish 871 SBCS Icelandic 875 SBCS Greek 880 SBCS Cyrillic 905 SBCS Latin 3 Turkish old 1025 SBCS Russian Cyrillic 1026 SBCS Latin 5 Turkish 1027 SBCS Japanese Latin extended 1140 SBCS EURO USA Canada Netherlands Portugal Brazil 1141 SBCS EURO Austria Germany 1142 SBCS EURO Denmark Norway 1143 SBCS EURO Finland Sweden 1144 SBCS EURO Italy 1145 SBCS EURO Spain Latin America 1146 SBCS EURO UK 1147 SBCS EURO France 1148 SBCS EURO Belgium Canada Switzerland 1149 SBCS
102. style ESCu Select solid line style ESC v Select solid line style ESC w C 82 Host Command Summary Wyse Emulations ATTRIBUTES Assign character display attribute Assign line attribute Assign write protected character attribute Line attribute mode on Page attribute mode on Wyse 60 character attribute mode on Wyse 60 character attribute mode off CHARACTER SETS WY 60 only ESC G attribute ESC G line attribute ESC attribute ESCe3 ESCe2 ESCe 1 ESC e0 Define amp load soft character ESC c A b p c CTRL Y b bank 0 3 p position in character set 2 byte hex c character bit pattern 32 byte character string Automatic font loading enabled Automatic font loading disabled Load font bank with predefined character set Bank O Bank O 1 Bank 1 2 Bank 2 3 Bank 3 ESCeO ESCeN ESC c bank set Set Native mode Standard ANSI G Multinational A 44 line Native mode I Standard ASCII B 44 line Multinational a Graphics 1 C 44 line PC Equivalent b PC Equivalent D 44 line Standard ASCII c Graphics 2 E 44 line Standard ANSI d Graphics 3 F Clear font bank 0 3 ESC c Specify font bank for primary character set 0 3 ESC c B Specify font bank for secondary character set 0 3 ESC c C Select primary character set for display ESCcD Select secondary character set for display ESC cE CLEARING DATA Clear cursor column ESC V Clear entire rectan
103. terminal reports and data sent as a result of pasting data to the host Local Echo Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether keyboard entered characters are dis played on the screen as well as sent to the host When unselected characters are not displayed when they are transmitted unless the host echoes them back 2 28 Getting Started Automate Login Process The Automate Login Process dialog box enables you to automate part or all of the host login procedure Automate Login Process i x Parameters v H h We Text Keyboard Lock Keyboard Unlock Definitions Acton Send di The settings in this dialog box enable you to specify what is sent to the host in response to prompts displayed on the screen 1 If an initiation string is required by the host when you first make a connection select the Set Initiation String option enter the required characters in the Initiate with box the Respond With box in the illustration above then click the Add button The initiation string will be added to the Script window on the right The Wait For options enable you to specify the prompt or keyboard locked or unlocked command that the automatic login process is to wait for before proceed ing Some systems are case sensitive so make sure your Text entries follow the correct conventions for your system Note When running
104. the File Capture and File Replay options in the File menu which allow received host data to be logged in a file then replayed Enable Debug Log Send amp Receive Registry Entry None Command Line Debug2Way Default Setting Disabled This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It enables the File Capture and File Replay options in the File menu which allow received host data and data sent to the host to be logged in a file then replayed 20 8 Initialization Commands Display Window Minimized On Start Up Registry Entry WindowSize minimized Command Line MI Default Setting Not applicable These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator They will cause the window to be displayed as an icon when the emulator is loaded Window Maximized On Start Up Registry Entry WindowSize maximized Command Line MA Default Setting Not applicable These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator They will cause the window to be displayed at the maximum size possible when the emulator is loaded while retaining the default number of lines and columns and including all window elements if enabled title bar soft buttons etc Workspace Fills Screen On Start Up Registry Entry WindowSize FullScreen Command Line F Default Setting Not applicable These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded version
105. the IBM 3270 or IBM 5250 emulation Text entries are only applicable in NVT mode Enter the response required in the Respond With box In order for a text entry to be sent to the host it must be followed by a carriage return command This is specified by selecting C Return in the list of predefined commands in the list box below then clicking the Insert button A lt CR gt will appear in the Respond With box You can also enter a predefined key function in the Respond With box by selecting Key Definition in the list of predefined commands in the list box below selecting one of the virtual key names listed in the box below that then clicking the Insert button The Virtual Key Names appendix lists the predefined key functions available for each emulation 2 29 Getting Started The list of predefined commands that can be inserted include UserName indi cated by lt UN gt and Password indicated by lt PW gt Selecting either of these will cause a dialog box to pop up when logging on to the host prompting the user to enter a name or password respectively You can also delay the script response by 2 seconds by inserting Delay 2s indicated by lt D gt or 0 255 seconds by inserting Pause 0 255 indicated by lt P gt When you have finished specifying the response to a particular prompt click the Add button to add the definition to the Script window on the right The script will perform the actions in the order displayed i
106. the illustrations in the Keyboard Mapping section for the key functions available in each mode Item11 Indicates the status of the aux port as follows Ready indicates that the aux port is ready for bidirectional output In Use indicates that the aux port is currently busy Horizontal Scrolling It is possible to make the width of display memory larger than the width of the window by using the Memory Page Width option in the Terminal Settings dialog box When you want to view columns stored off screen you can scroll horizontally by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the Left or Right Cursor keys Keyboard Mapping The illustrations on the following pages show where DEC VT500 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the DEC VT keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the VT virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box The keyboard can be used in two modes Normal and DEC You can toggle between the two modes by pressing the keys Alt Num Lock together The 10th item on the status bar will display DEC when the keyboard is in DEC mode The field will be blank when in normal mode DEC VT Emulations Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout Normal Mode apow ped y uolnsol dde u p l e1 u B ae sjeyoeig asenbs u suonound loimuoo ullA uonounfuos u pesn u uA p 9 e18u 8B ale s eyoe1g punos
107. the status line along the bottom of the window NVT mode displays an unformatted screen for data entry allowing basic keyboard functionality as a simple ASCII terminal In addition to data keys other recognized keys are Clear clears the screen Enter sends a CR to the host Newline sends a CR to the host Backspace sends a BS to the host Tab sends an HT to the host Once the appropriate details have been entered to establish an IBM host session which may be automatic the screen is cleared and switched into full IBM 5250 terminal emulation mode as indicated by the l symbol in the status line The Status Line The last line in the window is used to display status information in the form of symbols and alphanumeric characters A coloured line separates status information from the rest of the display Information is displayed in any of six regions within the status line as listed below Region Symbol Colour Column Meaning 1 T Blue 1 Telnet session running 2 E Blue 18 On line IBM 5250 mode 3 M Blue 28 Message waiting 4 Ai Blue 48 Insert mode on 5 x Red 57 Input inhibited 6 rr cc or rr ccc White 75 80 Row column cursor position The meaning of the symbols is as follows T Indicates that a Telnet session is running g Indicates that the current screen is an IBM 5250 screen This screen will be displayed when you have initiated a Telnet session with the host M Indicates that the system has one or more messages waiting
108. toolbar Button Tools Current Tool New Connection e Delete Current Commands New Connection Insert at Current Open Session Paste Ctrl V Add Custom Bitmap Print Buffer Print Screen Printer Setup PT 250 Replay File RJ Reset Terminal Cac Save Session Save Session As Buttons Delete Custom Bitmap The Current Tool box displays the toolbar button and its function that is currently selected for editing or located where a new button is to be inserted to its left in the toolbar Clicking the down arrow button to the right will display all the current toolbar buttons in order in a box below This enables you to select a new button position for display in the Current Tool box Click the down arrow button again to return to the Button and Command selection display The Visible option enables you to specify whether or not the toolbar is displayed Adding Buttons 1 Click the down arrow button to the right of the Current Tool box to display the buttons currently in the toolbar Click on the button which will be to the right of the new button to be added so that it is displayed in the Current Tool box Click the down arrow button again to display the Command options Select a button bitmap from the Buttons list You can add your own bitmaps to the standard bitmap list by clicking the Add Custom Bitmap button and selecting the bitmap files to load Butto
109. u suonound sdeS y y uo spu B au Aq pe eoipul se uonounj s y p yueuuun y 6esn y IeuuON aBesn y Ionuoo av avLiove 39VdSyOV8 HY YLM u9915S WO4 JU ZLOM LOMA 01914 6934 G N1X3 1901 9s3 ayq 8 5 BQ 3107 Emulation Notes 8 6 DG 410 412 Emulation DG 410 412 Emulation This chapter describes the Data General D410 412 terminal emulation Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the DG 410 412 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box This emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Data General D410 412 terminal Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection
110. various operating modes to be selected The buttons will show the Mode Selection configu ration Mode Selection 1 1j Terninal Test Line Modify Display Functns Nenory Lock Modify Block Renotex All Node Node futo LF The Mode Selection functions are displayed when the HP 700 92 96 emulation is first entered If the functions are changed while using the emulation you can redisplay the Modes menu by pressing the F9 key the equivalent of the HP 700 92 96 User System key then F4 Line Modify F1 This function enables you to edit and retransmit an incorrectly entered command string when the emulation is in Remote mode and Character mode and you are com municating interactively with the host This saves you having to retype the entire string again Note This will not function when the emulation is in Block or Format mode When the host causes an error message to be displayed indicating that the string has been incorrectly entered press the F1 key or click the equivalent button An asterisk will appear on the button indicating that the function is selected Move the cursor to the line containing the error edit the line then press Return or Enter This will cause the edited string to be transmitted and Line Modify mode to be exited If after activating Line Modify mode you wish to cancel it just press F1 or click the button again 10 5 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Modify All F2
111. window is used to display a status line consisting of eleven fields which show the status of various operations The following illustration shows the information that is displayed by default ONLINE 1 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 Field 6 CHAR 1 PG G SYSTEM RDY A 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Will display either ONLINE or LOCAL depending on whether the emulation is online to the host or in local mode Indicates whether the input line from the main port is connected DSR will be displayed when the Data Set Ready DSR connection is active Pressing the Stop key to stop the host from transmitting data will cause this field to display XOFF When this field is blank the connection is inactive Indicates the mode of data transmission as follows CHAR indicates that the emulation is in Character mode in which each character is sent to the host when it is typed at the keyboard CNTRL indicates that the emulation is in Control Representation mode in which all received data and commands from the host or keyboard are displayed but not acted upon LINE or PAGE indicates that the emulation transmits data a line or a page at a time when the Enter key is pressed in Block mode Indicates how many pages are in the display memory 1 or 2 Indicates when in Block mode the type of data that is to be transmitted as determined by the application ALL indicates that all fields are transmitted to the host MODI
112. 0 Flashing off Line 1 25 1 24 25 24 line mode 1 Flashing on line 25 2 Flashing off line 25 3 Auto roll mode enabled ESC 9u Page mode enabled ESC 8u Set attribute s for the following character ESC a am a Normal 0 Inverse 7 Screen 2 Hidden 8 Underline 4 Store attributes 50 Blink 5 Set delete character to blank ESC 3u Set delete character to nil ESC 2u Dim screen ESC 8p Undim screen ESC 9p Set background dark white characters on black screen ESC 20u Set background highlight black characters on white screen ESC 21 u Set off cursor position ESC 10p Video timeout enabled ESC 5u Video timeout disabled ESC 4u Reset screen to initial state ESCc KEYBOARD Lock keyboard ESC Unlock keyboard ESC b Keyboard repeat rate off ESC 0s Keyboard repeat rate on ESC 1s C 62 Host Command Summary Sound bell BEL Key click disabled ESC 2s Key click enabled ESC 3s Report keyswitch status ESC Ow Map scan codes corresponding to German keyboard values ESC 7u Map scan codes corresponding to all other keyboard values ESC 6u Load more national keyboards ESCRA ESC Multiuser systems 1024 Byte PC X PC X10 10280 Byte Read actual keyboard layout ESCE y SERVICE Display all ESCape sequences except ESC on screen ESC 3 v Switch to standard mode ESC 2v Display all ESCape sequences system must be switched off to return to standard mode ESC 4v Start system test and poll result ESC 3 y Poll firmware E
113. 082 IBM4212 IBM4216 IBM4226 IBM4230 IBM4232 2 15 Getting Started IBM47121 IBM5152 IBM6404 IBM6412EP HPIIID HP500 CPQPM15 EPAP5500 EPFX1170 EPLQ870 EPSQ1170 NECP2200XE OKI184IBM OKI393IBM OKI810 PAN11241EP PAN1654EP PAN2624EP PAN4451HP MSGQ Name IBM47122 IBM5201 IBM6404EP HPII HPIIIP HP520 CPQPM20 EPDFX5000 EPLX810 EPLQ1070 EPEPL7000 NECP5200 OKI320IBM OKIS90IBM OKI820 PAN1180EP PAN1695EP PAN4410HP 1BM47221 IBM5202 IBM6408 HPIID HPIIISI HP550C EPAP2250 EPDFX8000 EPLQ510 EPLQ1170 EPEPL8000 NECP5300 OKI321IBM OKI591IBM OKI3410 PANI180IEP PAN2123EP PAN4420HP 1BM47222 TBM5204 IBM6408EP HPIIP HP4 HP560C EPAP3250 EPFX850 EPLQ570 EPLQ2550 NECP2 NECP6200 OKI390IBM OKI400 PAN1123EP PANI191EP PAN2124EP PAN4430HP IBM4770 IBM5216 IBM6412 HPIII HP310 HPPAINT EPAP5000 EPFX870 EPLQ860 EPSQ870 NECP2200 NECP6300 OKI391IBM OKI800 PANI124EP PAN1624EP PAN2180EP PAN4450IHP Specifies the name of the message queue to which operational messages for the printer are to be sent MSGQ Library Specifies the message queue library Font Specifies the font identifier and point size used by the single byte printer e g 11 Formfeed This is always set to Don t Report The Paper Source 1 option is used to specify the paper format to be used Paper Source 1 amp 2 Th
114. 1 Initialization Commands Notes 20 22 Virtual Key Names Virtual Key Names This appendix lists all the supported virtual key names which enable you to include a specific key function in a user definition Standard Virtual Key Names Key Function 0 9 A Z Alt right Apps Apostrophe Backspace Break Clear Comma Compose Character Control left Control right Copy Cursor Down Cursor Left Cursor Right Cursor Up Data Talk Delete End Equal Escape Euro Sign Execute Exit Emulator F1 F12 Help Hold Screen Home Hyphen Insert Virtual Key Name VK 0 VK 9 VK A VK Z VK RALT VK_APPS VK_APOSTROPHE VK_BACK VK_BREAK VK_CLEAR VK_COMMA VK_COMPOSE VK_CONTROL VK_RCONTROL VK_COPY VK_DOWN VK_LEFT VK_RIGHT VK_UP VK_DATATALK VK_DELETE VK_END VK_EQUAL VK_ESCAPE VK_EUROSIGN VK_EXECUTE VK_EXIT VK Fl VK_F12 VK_HELP VK_HOLDSCREEN VK_HOME VK_HYPHEN VK_INSERT Key Function Keypad 0 9 Keypad Add Keypad Divide Keypad Decimal Keypad Multiply Keypad Subtract Num Lock Off C 102 key kbd Page Down Page Up Paste Pause Period Print Print Screen Quote back Return Scroll Lock Select Semicolon Separator Setup Shift right Slash backward Slash forward Spacebar Square Bracket left Square Bracket right Tab Windows left Windows right Virtual Key Name VK_NUMPADO 9 VK_ADD VK_DIVIDE VK_DECIMAL
115. 1 6 97 Displaying 3 1 6 97 Key Programming HP 700 92 96 emulation 10 13 IBM 3151 emulation 13 6 Macros menu 6 97 Keyboard Changing key functions 3 1 Composing characters 3 4 Cursor key mode 6 79 Defining keys 3 1 6 97 Enhanced AT mapping BQ 3107 functions 8 5 DEC VT500 functions 7 6 7 7 DG 410 412 functions 9 4 HP 700 92 96 functions 10 4 IBM 3151 functions 13 5 IBM 3270 functions 11 11 IBM 5250 functions 12 7 Index 5 Index MDIS Prism functions 14 4 PT250 functions 15 6 Siemens 97801 functions 16 4 TA6530 functions 17 6 Unisys T27 functions 18 5 Wyse functions 19 6 Entering control characters B 1 Keypad mode 6 79 Macros 3 1 6 97 Mapping 3 1 Mapping changing 6 97 Mapping showing 6 97 Send position codes 6 81 Send scan codes 6 81 Type 6 77 Viewdata functionkeys 2 49 Virtualkeynames A 1 Keywords 4 3 L Language Selection 2 1 6 24 Line Styles Colour selection 6 92 Local Echo 2 28 6 73 Local Editing Settings 6 83 Local On Line Setting 6 73 Macros 3 1 6 97 MDIS Prism Emulations Session configuration 14 1 Virtual key names A 6 MDIS Prism 12 Emulation Host command summary C 47 MDIS Prism 8 Emulation Host command summary C 42 MDIS Prism 9 Emulation Host command summary C 42 Menu Bar XPe 2 44 Middle Button 4 3 Modem Settings 2 26 Mouse Button tools 6 105 GIN Button definitions 6 91 Middle button emulating 4 3 Mouse Functions 6 103 Action hotspots 4 3 De
116. 1 u u S u A E E ie 16 3 TA6530 Emulation 17 1 Session Configuration 17 1 WET MOd6 sis u T E aie esd ceed 17 1 Non WBT Mode visas seis aap ama i upaqas a 17 2 TheStat s EAN cs a an ee iar Ea ee aaa ua E 17 3 Operating Modes cs as atau n u S a as 17 4 The R le CUISOF cece a wawa a a Be AE eas 17 5 Keyboard Mapping 17 5 UNISYS T27 Emulation 18 1 Session Configuration 18 1 WBT MOd6 ipia een a E E A E 18 1 Non WBT M6d u an aaa ia A EE R OE 18 2 Thestat s Barista ays apna am EENAA a Codes 18 3 Keyboard Mapping 18 4 Wyse Emulations 19 1 Session Configuration 19 1 WBE Mod h qa a aha Oa anc aasan 19 1 Contents 7 Contents Non WBT Mode sinnn pataka un hi aa AES 19 2 Display Format Aeneae aR R ERE a EE Adee spas 19 4 Status Line Messa bes oare n at E EE E EEEN 19 4 Keyboard Mapping ayaqa alpa ha RRA R N 19 5 Initialization Commands 20 1 ING OMUCTION s as o AeA OS 20 1 Command Summary 20 2 Host CONN CHON veccc s a n E uma Gam m anu a s 20 5 Session Configuration
117. 1BOA becomes ASCII 27 10 ESC LF 6 51 Setup Menus Selecting End on Non Hex enables you to specify the number of characters that make up the end sequence in the End Length box The bypass will then terminate as soon as a non hexadecimal character is received any character except in the range 0 through 9 and A through F followed by the end sequence Characters can be entered in several ways For example to specify the ASCII escape character you can enter either _027 u001B Ve 033 or even Font This enables you to specify the font to be used for displaying characters The available settings depend on the fonts installed Telnet Options Clicking the Telnet Options button will display a dialog box with additional options These are described in the Getting Started chapter National Character Settings amp APL2 This enables you to select the character set to be used The IDs of the code page character set and CCSID used for the currently selected language are displayed under the User Specified button Clicking User Specified will display a dialog box that enables you to change these settings User Specified Character Settings Ti Eg SBCS CodePage 285 CharSet 697 CCSID 285 DBCS Tl Allow There are separate Code Page Character Set and CCSID entries for the Single Byte Character Set SBCS and if supported Double Byte Character Set DBCS These should only be changed by the System
118. 220 emulation is based on the VT500 terminal series and includes the HP function keys F1 F8 not user programmable The terminal ID is set to VT220 The VT100 emulation is an enhanced version of the VT 100 emulation that provides additional functionality such as colours It is the same as the VT UTF8 emulation except that it only supports ASCII characters 0 127 decimal The VT UTF8 emulation is an enhanced version of the VT100 emulation that supports non English and drawing characters It supports localization of the single byte and double byte character sets and all other languages supported by Windows Additional functionality such as colours is also provided The WY50 WY50 and WY60 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the Wyse WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 terminals respectively Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for information on these emulations The WYSE PCTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed for the PC Term personality supported by Wyse Keyboard scan codes are sent on key press release instead of ASCII codes by default Graphics Mode The Graphics Mode option is only available if your version of TeemTalk supports graphics emulations and the Emulation option is set to one of the DEC VT Ansi BBS AIXTerm AT 386 or Sco Console emulations The setting determines the graphics mode that will be entered when the host sends graphics commands The ReGIS emulation enables you to ru
119. 270 AixTerm Limitations No Vertical tab stops No Select Alternate presentation variant No Select reversed string No Select font in graphic rendition No Virtual terminal commands No Set curses fix No Page scroll No Alternate screen buffer No Xwindows capabilities Bull BQ3107 7107 Specification Reference manual Bull Questar 310 Terminal BQ 3107 82 A2 78ST REVO February 1990 Limitations Remote and Line printing are not supported Product Specification Data General D200 D410 Specification Dasher D410 Display Terminals User s Manual 014 000761 02 December 1983 Digital VT Emulation Specification Digital VT 420 Programmer s Manual EK VT420 RM 001 Limitations The DEC Multisession and SSU protocols are not implemented HP 700 92 Emulation Specification HP 2392A Reference Guide 02394 90001 April 1984 IBM 3270 Emulation Specification 3270 Information Display System Data Stream Programmer s Reference GA23 0059 07 Limitations No Double byte printing Product Specification IBM 5250 Emulation Specification 5494 Remote Control Unit Functions Reference Release 2 0 SC30 3533 02 Limitations No text assist in Right to Left writing mode No double byte printing The 3812 1 Non Host Print Transform Non HPT print protocol is not supported No Calculator Hex key No Password encryption No Au
120. 270 Emulation Display the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box if you wish to change the setting of the IBM 3270 Model option which determines the size of the display and whether or not extended attributes are supported One of four display sizes can be selected 3278 9 2 24 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 3 32 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 4 43 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 5 27 rows by 132 columns Settings with the E extension provide support for the following extended at tributes 3270 field attributes extended highlighting blink flash and underscore but not in combination foreground colour and query reply inbound structured fields These attributes are also supported by the 3279 Click OK to close the dialog box Select Save Session in the File menu Select New Connection in the File menu to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection select Modem specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To b
121. 2A 2622A 70094 and 70096 terminals Specify the required HP Model setting 70092 default 2392A 2622A 70094 or 70096 This identifies the particular terminal model being emulated in response to a terminal identification request from the host Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 10 1 HP 700 92 96 Emulation For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration whe
122. 437 B 15 Character Sets WY 60 MULTINATIONAL CODE PAGE 850 CHARACTER SET R O W 0 a a a sl a A y IL O F dL 9 T L x f KEY 5 DECIMAL A5 HEXADECIMAL This Wyse character set is only available in W Y 60 mode and is the secondary character set when the Code Page option in the Wyse Settings dialog box is set to 850 B 16 Character Sets WY 60 PC EQUIVALENT CHARACTER SET I O Tm mo ol wo gt loo ON o o o m GA a ALO w cno no n Jo o o 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt Noo C gt N lt x Z lt ca oD oT yt jo O Ff o o Fp lt q G lt gt tir L een 33 OCTAL KEY 27 pzcIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode B 17 Character Sets WY 60 STANDARD ASCII CHARACTER SET COLUMN R O w 0 s am xm I lt em a 8B o 7m oo m gt 2 3 4 5 6 A 7 8 9 DO at 4 lt ar ot om gt N lt x S lt c HO DO v O Z Zr xc V ol 33 OCTAL KEY F 27 DECIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL
123. 5 Televideo 955 D 6 Telnet D 2 Unisys T27 D 6 Wyse 60 Native D 6 Wyseemulations D 7 SSH Connection Settings 2 21 SSL Connection Settings 2 18 Startup Options 6 15 Status Bar 2 46 Index 8 Index DEC VT emulations 7 4 Unisys T27 emulation 18 3 Status Line DEC host writable 6 76 IBM 3151 emulation 13 3 IBM 3270 emulation 11 5 IBM 5250 emulation 12 5 PT250 emulation 15 3 TA6530 emulation 17 3 Wyseemulations 19 4 Stratus V102 Emulation Specification D 5 Support Level D 1 T TA6530 Emulation Host command summary C 64 Keyboard mapping 17 5 Operating modes 17 4 Rulecursor 17 5 Session configuration 17 1 Setup settings 6 48 Specification D 5 Status line 17 3 Virtual key names A 7 Tab Stops 6 82 TCP IP Connection Settings 2 9 Tek 4010 4014 Emulation Host command summary C 68 Tek 4014 Emulation Screen mapping 6 90 Settings menu 6 89 Telnet Specification D 2 Terminal Emulation Level of support D 1 Selecting 6 26 Terminal ID DEC VT 6 29 HP 6 34 IBM 3151 6 42 TerminalReset 6 9 Terminal Settings 6 75 Terms amp Conventions 1 3 TN3270 Options 2 11 TN5250 Options 2 13 Toolbar Predefined button tools XPe 5 1 Redefining XPe only 5 3 Windows XPe version 5 1 Toolbar XPe 2 45 TVI 955 Emulation Host command summary C 70 Specification D 6 Virtual key names A 8 Typing Direction Hebrew language DEC suite 6 77 6 78 7 8 U Unicode Entering values in Setup entries 6 4 Unis
124. ASEEOL Print Form BQ_PRTFORM Erase End Of Page BQ_ERASEEOP Print Form Screen BQ PRTFORMSCREEN Escape BQ_ESCAPE Print Partition BQ_PRTPART Extend BQ_EXTEND Print Screen BQ_PRTSCREEN FKC1 FKC12 BQ_FKC1 BQ_FKC12 Reset BQ_RESET Shift FKC1 FKC12 BQ_S_FKC1 FKC12 Reset Partition BQ_PARTRESET Home BQ_HOME Return BQ_RETURN Host Message BQ_HOSTMSG Set Tab BQ_SETTAB Initialize Partition BQ_INITPART System BQ_SYSTEM Init Both Partitions BQ _INITRIS2 Tab BQ_TAB Insert Character BQ_INSERTCHAR Transmit BQ_TRANSMIT Virtual Key Names DEC VT500 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Back Tab VT_CSIZ Insert VT_INSERT Break VT_BREAK Keypad 0 9 VT_PADO 9 Backspace VT_BACKSPACE Keypad Comma VT_COMMA Compose Character WT_COMPOSE Keypad Decimal VT_PADDECIMAL Cursor Down VT_DOWN Keypad Minus VT_MINUS Cursor Left VT_LEFT Next Page VT_NEXT Cursor Right VT_RIGHT PF1 PF4 VT_PF1 VT_PF4 Cursor Up VT_UP Previous Page VT_PREV Datatalk VT_DATATALK Print VT_PRINT Delete VT_DELETE Remove VT_REMOVE Do F16 VT_DO Return VT_RETURN Enter VT_ENTER Scroll Down VT_PANDOWN Escape VT_ESCAPE Scroll Left VT_PANLEFT F6 F14 VT_F6 VT_F14 Scroll Right VT_PANRIGHT F17 F20 VT_F17 VT_F20 Scroll Up VT_PANUP Find VT_FIND Select VT_SELECT Help F15 VT_HELP Setup VT_SETUP Hold Screen VT_HOLD Tab VT_TAB DG 410 412 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name C1 C4 DG_C1
125. BM 5250 type alphanumeric terminals This emulation can be used for connection to an IBM AS 400 System 36 or System 38 Note that the initial display will be an ASCII text screen known as Network Virtual Terminal mode NV T mode for short Refer to the IBM 5250 Emulation chapter for details The MDI P12 P8 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the McDonnell Douglas Prism 12 and Prism 8 terminals Refer to the MDIS Prism Emulations chapter for details The MDI Prism 9 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the McDonnell Douglas Prism 9 terminal Refer to the MDIS Prism Emulations chapter for details The PT250 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Prime PT250 terminal Refer to the PT250 Emulation chapter for details Sco Console is an emulation of the SCO UNIX box The Siemens 97801 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Siemens 97801 terminal Refer to the Siemens 97801 Emulation chapter for details The Stratus V102 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Stratus V102 terminal The TA6530 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Tandem 6530 terminal This emulation is described in the TA6530 Emulation chapter The TVI 910 TVI 920 and TVI 925 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the TeleVideo 910 920 and 925 terminals respectively as e
126. Backspace Clear Close Delete Space Copy Cursor Down Cursor Left Cursor Right Cursor Select Cursor Up Cursor Flash On Off Cursor Line Block Delay 1 Second Delete Character Delete Word Duplicate Enter Erase End Of Field Erase Input F1 F24 Virtual Key Name IB_ALTCP IB_ATTN IB_BACKTAB IB_BACKSPACE IB_CLEAR IB_REV_CL IB_COPY IB_DOWN IB_LEFT IB_RIGHT IB_CURSORSEL IB_UP IB_FLCR IB_ALTCR IB_DELAY IB_DELCHAR IB_DELWORD IB_DUP IB_ENTER IB_ERASEEOF IB_ERASEINPUT IB_F1 IB_F24 Key Function Local National Map M Slot Reader Start M Slot Reader Send Mono Case New Line Next Word Notice Board Copy Notice Board Jump Notice Board Setup Notice Board Zoom Num Lock PAI PA3 Pause Play Keystrokes Previous Word Print Screen Push Mode On Off Quit Record Keystrokes Reset Return Rev Input Direction Virtual Key Name IB_LCLMAP IB_MSRATTRIB IB_OPIDRDR IB_MONO IB_NEWLINE IB_NEXTWORD IB_NB_COPY IB_NB_JUMP IB_NB_SETUP IB_NB_ZOOM IB_NUMLOCK IB_PAI IB_PA3 IB_PAUSE IB_PLAY IB_PREVWORD IB_PRINT IB_PUSH IB_QUIT IB_RECORD IB_RESET IB_RETURN IB_REV_IP A 4 Virtual Key Names Field Mark IB_FIELDMARK Reverse Screen IB_REV_SC Fn Edit IB_FEDIT Rule Display IB_RULE Go To End Of Line JIB_GO_EOL Selectable Field Tab IB _FIELDTAB Home IB_HOME System Request IB_SYSREQ Insert Mode IB_INSERT Tab IB_TAB IBM 5250 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Func
127. Break Local editing key mode enabled ESCk Duplex editing key mode enabled ESC1 Load the margin bell column ETB Margin bell on ESC 4h Margin bell off ESC 41 Sound bell BEL LOADING amp SENDING MESSAGES Send terminal s identification ESCM Program the answerback message ESC lt text gt EM Send the answerback message ENQ Display user message on bottom screen line ESC g Display status line on bottom screen line ESCh Select contents of top information line ESC 4 v Select contents of bottom information line ESC 5 v 0 Blank 2 User message 1 1 Status line 3 User message 2 Load text into user message 1 ESC f lt text gt CR Load text into a user message ESC _ m e lt text gt CR C 73 Host Command Summary User Message Effect m 0 Status line message field e 0 Clears message before loading 1 User message 1 1 Writes over existing message 2 User message 2 Send contents of information line ESC Z 0 User message 1 1 Status line 2 User message 2 PRINTING Buffered copy print mode on ESC Buffered copy print mode off ESCA Buffered transparent print mode on ESC Buffered transparent print mode off ESCa Buffered bidirectional print mode on DC2 Buffered bidirectional print mode off DC4 Print unprotected formatted page ESC P Print all unformatted page ESCL Page print ESC 0 i 0 Formatted all 4 Unformatted all 1 Formatted unprotected 5 Unformatted unprotected Define page print terminator ESC p
128. C 251 Move cursor to specified column integer ESC or ESC G Move cursor up lines ESC A Move cursor down lines Move cursor right columns Move cursor left columns Move cursor to specified line integer Move cursor to line 1 column c Move cursor to line 1 column c Move cursor down 1 line amp to column 1 Move cursor to start of line Move cursor down 1 line in current column Move cursor up lines amp to first column Move cursor down lines amp to first column Move cursor one column left Move cursor to next tab stop Tab cursor backward tabs Enable cursor autowrap Disable cursor autowrap ESC B or ESC e ESC C or ESC a ESC D ESC d ESC l c H ESC 1 cf NAK CR LF ESC F ESC E BS HT ESC Z ESC 7h ESC 71 C 59 Host Command Summary EDITING Erase from cursor to end of display ESC 0 J Erase from start of display to cursor ESC 1J Erase entire display ESC 2 J Erase from cursor to end of line ESC O K Erase from start of line to cursor ESC 1 K Erase entire line ESC 2 K Erase characters from cursor right ESC X Insert blank characters ESC Insert blank lines ESC L Delete lines from cursor position down ESC M Delete characters ESC P Set tab at cursor position ESCH PRINTING Send page ESC 2i Send line ESC 3i Print page ESC 0i Print all pages ESC 11i Print cursor line ESC 1i Transparent p
129. C1 XON DC3 XOFF ESC 8 ESC 9 ESC P ESC ESC p or ESC L ESC d SP ESC d ENQ ESCM ESCs ESC 6 ESC7 ESCS ESC 4 ESC 5 DLE ESC d or CAN DC2 DC4 C 88 Host Command Summary Wyse PC Term Emulation MONITOR MODE Monitor mode on Monitor mode otf SELECTING PERSONALITIES ESC U ESCu or ESC X Enhance mode off ESC v SPACE Enhance mode on ESC v Select WYSE 50 personality ESC v Select WYSE 50 personality ESC v Select WYSE ASCII personality ESC v4 Select TeleVideo 905 personality ESC vb Select TeleVideo 910 personality ESC v Select TeleVideo 925 personality ESC v Select TeleVideo 950 personality ESC v Select ADDS A2 personality ESC v Select PC Term personality ESC v5 Select HZ 1500 personality ESC v amp Select VT52 personality ESC v6 Select VT100 personality ESC v Select VT220 7 bit personality ESC v lt Select VT220 8 bit personality ESC v Select UNIX Console personality ESC v HOST COMMUNICATIONS Enable transmission CTRLQ Stop transmission CTRLS Send ACK CTRLE Full duplex mode on ESC CESC Half duplex mode on ESC C ESC Block mode on ESC BESC Half duplex block mode on ESC B ESC Send terminal ID ESCM Assign COMM 1 port as host port enhanced ESC e8 Assign COMM 2 port as host port enhanced ESC e9 Send time of day ESC SPACE 2 Enable DTR COMM 1 port handshaking CTRLN Enable XON XOFF XPC COMM port handshaking CTRLO TERMINAL amp KEYBOARD CONTROL Local edi
130. DG_C4 Home DG_HOME Cursor Type DG_CURSOR Keypad Comma DG_COMMA Cursor Down DG_DOWN Keypad Enter DG_ENTER Cursor Left DG_LEFT Keypad Minus DG_MINUS Cursor Right DG_RIGHT Local Print DG_LOCALPRINT Cursor Up DG_UP New Line DG_NEWLINE Erase Line DG_ERASELINE Normal Compressed DG_SPACING Erase Page DG_ERASEPAGE Print DG_PRINT Fl F15 DG_F1 DG_F15 Scroll Rate DG_SCROLLRATE Hold DG_HOLD A 3 Virtual Key Names HP 700 92 96 Virtual Key Names Key Function Backspace Clear Display Clear Line Cursor Down Cursor Left Cursor Right Cursor Up Delete Delete Character Delete Line Delete Wrap Enter Escape F1 F8 Home Cursor Home Cursor Shift Insert Character Insert Line Virtual Key Name HP_BACKSPACE HP_CLEARMEM HP_CLEARLINE HP_DOWN HP_LEFT HP_RIGHT HP_UP HP_DELETE HP_DELETECHAR HP_DELETELINE HP_DELETEWRAP HP_SEND HP_ESCAPE HP_F1 HP_F8 HP_HOMEUP HP_HOMEDOWN HP_INSERTMODE HP_INSERTLINE Key Function Insert Wrap Menu Next Page Previous Page Print Return Scroll Down Scroll Up Select Tab Tab Shifted User System Mode Sel Keys User Keys Mode User Key Def Menu Soft Reset Hard Reset IBM 3270 Virtual Key Names Virtual Key Name HP_INSERTWRAP HP_MENU HP_NEXTPAGE HP_PREVPAGE HP_PRINT HP_RETURN HP_ROLLDOWN HP_ROLLUP HP_SELECT HP_TAB HP_BACKTAB HP_SYSTEM HP_MODES HP_USER HP_FKEYDEFS HP_SOFTRESET HP_HARDRESET Key Function Alternate Code Page Attention Back Tab
131. Default Setting These commands will remove the scroll bar from the window 20 15 Initialization Commands Soft Buttons Displayed Registry Entry ButtonLevels 0 4 Command Line BLO 4 Default Setting 1 These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator A set of soft buttons is displayed at the bottom of the emulatoor window by default There are four soft button levels Level 1 is displayed by default Each level consists of twelve programmable buttons providing a combined total of 48 buttons You can display all four levels 48 buttons at the same time if required All levels are accessible even if not all are displayed levels stored off screen can be scrolled into view by clicking the Level button You can specify how many soft button levels are actually displayed by using this registry entry or command line option All four levels can be displayed by specifying 4 Specifying 0 will cause no soft buttons to be displayed Disable Status Bar amp DEC Status Line Registry Entry StatusLine off Command Line V Default Setting on These commands will remove the status bar and DEC VT Status line at the bottom of the window Disable Colour Palette Registry Entry UsePalette off Command Line SP Default Setting on The colour palette used by the emulator can be disabled if it interferes with colours used by other applications running at the same time 20 16 I
132. Destination port only first is parameter 0 None 1 LPT 1 2 2 COM 1 3 COM 2 etc ESC u REPORTS Request colour table report ESC 2 u Request control function settings ESCP q Request cursor information report ESC 1 w Request emulation state report ESC 1 u Request locator device port status ESC 55n Request locator device type ESC 56n Request mode settings ESC p Request tab stop report ESC 2 w Request user preferred Additional set ESC amp u Restore colour table ESCP2 p Restore cursor information ESCP1 t Restore emulation state ESCP1 p Restore tab stops ESCP2 t C 8 Host Command Summary ANSI VT420 Emulation When running the VT420 emulation the following commands will be executed in addition those listed for ANSI VT100 and VT500 CURSOR MOVEMENT amp PANNING Back index ESC 6 Forward index ESC 9 Pan down number of lines ESC 1S Pan up number of lines ESC 1 T Vertical cursor coupled mode ESC 61h Vertical cursor uncoupled mode ESC 611 Page cursor coupled mode ESC 64h Page cursor uncoupled mode ESC 641 EDITING Delete column s c number of columns to delete ESC c Insert column s c number of columns to insert ESC c GENERAL OPERATION Secure reset n any number in range 0 16383 ESC n p Secure reset confirmation n number in range 0 16383 ESC n q MACROS Define macro ESC P n d e z D D ESC n Macro ID number 0 63
133. E Erase text to end of line ESC K Erase text to end of screen ESC J GENERAL Cancel current ESC sequence amp display error CAN Sound audible tone BEL MODE SELECTION Select numeric keypad application mode ESC Select numeric keypad normal mode ESC gt Select VT100 mode ESC lt PRINTING Auto print off ESC _ Auto print on ESC Print controller off ESC X Print controller on ESC W REPORTS Request mode identification report ESCZ Send terminal emulation mode report ESC 0 ANSI VT100 Emulation CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Assign attribute s to following characters ESC m Default attributes 0 Blue foreground 34 White background 50 Bold on 1 Magenta foreground 35 Red background 51 Dim White 2 Cyan foreground 36 Red backeround 52 Underline on 4 White foreground 37 Yellow background 53 Flashing on 5 Normal foreground 39 Blue background 54 Inverse video on 7 White background 40 Magenta background 55 Half intensity off 22 Red background 41 Cyan backeround 56 Underline off 24 Red backeround 42 White background 57 Flashing off 25 Yellow background 43 Normal background 59 Inverse video off 27 Blue background 44 Black foreground 30 Magenta background 45 Red foreground 31 Cyan background 46 Green foreground 32 White background 47 Yellow foreground 33 Normal background 49 C 2 Host Command Summary Deselect underline character mode ESC lt 1h Double width amp height top half characters ESC 3 Double
134. E E umlaut E o E I grave I l acute I circumflex IA I umlaut I or I N tilde N O grave o O acute o O circumflex OA Otilde O O umlaut O o O O E diphthong OE DEC Multinat i order O slash O U grave U U acute U U circumflex U U umlaut U o U DEC Muttinat Y oP B caman small ss a grave a a acute a a circumflex a a tilde am l a umlaut a or a Ey a ring oe a EI a e diphthong nordan c cedilla Came e grave e e acute e e circumflex e e umlaut e o e bar i grave i i acute i li i circumflex i li i umlaut i or i ntilde ns o grave o Keyboard Configuration Ea E KA Ea Ea EA Ea Ea EA EA E Ea COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES continued o acute o o circumflex o o tilde o o umlaut o or o o e diphthong oe DEC Multinat in order o slash o u grave u u acute u u circumflex uA u umlaut u or u y umlaut y o y no break space Latin 1 space space broken vertical A bar Latin 1 ll or logical not _ Latin 1 in order P w e B a a EA Bi soft syllable hyphen Latin 1 registered trade mark Latin 1 RO macron Latin 1 aA or A three quarters Latin 1 34
135. E SELECTION Select Alpha mode amp erase alpha memory ESCEOT Select Alphanumeric mode ACK Select Alphanumeric mode CAN Select Alphanumeric mode ESC 2 Select Alphanumeric mode ESC CAN Select GIN mode ESC SUB Select Graphics Text mode CR Select Graphics Text mode US Select Graphics Text mode ESC 1 Select Graphics Text mode ESC FF Select Incremental Point mode RS Select Point mode FS Select Vector mode GS VECTOR MODE Clear Vector mode screen ESC FF Disable block fill erase ESC ETX Disable dark vector BEL Disable dark vector ESC BEL Disable rectangle drawing ESC r Enable block fill erase ESC STX Enable circle plotting ASCII equiv of coords ESC O Enable dark vector GS Enable dark vector ESC GS Enable rectangle drawing c corner coords ESC R c c Select dot dash line style ESC b Select dot dash line style ESCj Select dot dash line style ESCr Select dotted line style ESCa Select dotted line style ESCi Select dotted line style ESC q Select long dash line style ESC d Select long dash line style ESCI Select long dash line style ESCt Select short dash line style ESCc Select short dash line style ESC k Select short dash line style ESCs Select solid line style ESC Select solid line style ESCe Select solid line style ESC f Select solid line style ESC g Select solid line style ESCh Select solid line style ESC m Select solid line style ESCn Select solid line style ESCo Select solid line style ESCp Select solid line
136. E virtual key name again before completing a compose character sequence will cause it to be abandoned and a second sequence to be started An invalid compose character sequence will cause the bell to sound Keyboard Configuration The following tables use several conventions The keys bearing the characters used to compose a special character may be pressed in any order unless in order is specified DEC Multinat indicates that the character can only be composed if the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to DEC MCS Latin 1 indicates that the character can only be composed if the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multina tional and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to ISO Latin 1 If a nationality is specified with the character description for example Dutch then the character can only be composed when the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to National and the system is configured for the relevant language Keyboard Configuration al Es B Ei EA E EN E Ea JE a COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES feminine ordinal e indicator a o A_ double open lt lt angle brackets quotation mark space number sign apostrophe space commercial at a
137. EEN Printer Ready 1 2 3 4 Field 1 rrr ccc indicates the current row and column position of the cursor Field 2 INSERT indicates that Insert mode is active when the Insert key is pressed or when the Insert Character command is received Note that the message will not be displayed if the Insert Character option is not set to Mode Insert mode is exited by pressing the Insert or Reset key Field 3 Indicates the current operating mode In BLOCK mode keyboard entered data is displayed and processed locally allowing you to edit it before a block of data is sent to the host In CHAR mode keyboard entered data is sent simultaneously to the host and the display In ECHO mode keyboard entered data is sent only to the host The host is then responsible for returning the data to the display Field 4 HOLD SCREEN indicates that the Hold Screen key has been pressed to suspend screen update Press Hold Screen again to enable screen up date INVALID KEY appears when you press an invalid key KEYS LOCKED appears when the keyboard is locked The keys will be unlocked when the Keyboard Unlock command is received or when the Cancel key is pressed NUMERIC indicates the cursor is located in an unprotected numeric field PRINTING indicates that data is being sent to the printer SENDING indicates that data is being sent to the host WRONG PLACE appears when you press an invalid key in a protected field or field attribute character position
138. ER ATTRIBUTES Assign attribute s to following characters ESC m Normal 0 Bold 1 Underscore 4 Blink appears bold 5 Reverse 7 Invisible HFT Foreground colours HFT 30 37 Background colours HFT 40 47 Foreground colours HFT 90 97 Background colours HFT 100 107 o0 CHARACTER SET SELECTION United Kingdom character set GO VT100 ESC A United Kingdom character set G1 VT100 ESC A United Kingdom character set G2 VT100 ESC A United Kingdom character set G3 VT100 ESC A ASCII USASCID character set GO VT100 ESC B ASCII USASCII character set G1 VT100 ESC B ASCII USASCII character set G2 VT100 ESC B ASCII USASCII character set G3 VT100 ESC B Special graphics character set GO VT100 ESC 0 Special graphics character set G1 VT100 ESC 0 Special graphics character set G2 VT 100 ESC 0 Special graphics character set G3 VT 100 ESC 0 Single shift G2 VT100 ESCN C 25 Host Command Summary Single shift G3 VT100 Set G0 character set HFT Set G1 character set HFT Lock shift G2 VT100 Lock shift G3 VT100 COLOUR ESCO ESC lt ESC lt ESCn ESC o Set foreground amp background colour fg and bg are integers as listed below g ADUNBWNKr CO Colour Bold Black 8 Blue 9 Green 10 Cyan 11 Red 12 Magenta 13 Yellow 14 White 15 Set inverse amp foreground amp background colour as above ESC 2 fg bg m ESC 7 fg bg m
139. ESC b Page up ESC a Previous page 1 page one 2 page two ESC V Repeat previous character times ESC b Screen wrap mode enabled ESC gt 8h Screen wrap mode disabled ESC gt 81 Scroll automatically ESC W Scroll manually only ESC X Scroll unlocked lines down lines ESC T Scroll unlocked lines up lines ESC S Smooth scroll enabled ESC gt 5h Unlock lines 1 screen line to begin n of lines ESC 1 ny EDITING Delete characters from cursor position right ESC P Delete lines from cursor position down ESC M Editing extent mode ESC Q Entire display 0 Line only 1 Area only 2 Enable all characters to be erased ESC 6h Enable erasure of unprotected characters only ESC 61 Enter character mode ESC gt 21 Enter edit block mode ESC gt 2h Erase characters amp substitute with pad characters ESC X Erase in area amp substitute with pad characters ESC O Erase to end of area line or display 0 Erase from start of area line or display 1 Erase entire area line or display 2 Erase in display amp substitute with pad characters ESC J Erase to end of display 0 Erase from start of display 1 Erase entire display 2 Erase in line amp substitute with pad characters ESC K Erase to end of line 0 Erase from start of line 1 Erase entire line 2 Insert blank lines ESC L Insert space or null characters ESC Insert mode disabled replace mode selected ESC 41 Insert mode e
140. Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the IBM 3151 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection select Modem specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 13 2 IBM 3151 Emulation 5 When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details The Status Bar The status bar along the bottom of the display shows the status of various operations Pause IBM 3151 1 1 001 001 ECHO HOLD SCR
141. FIED indicates that only fields that have changed are transmitted to the host SELECTED indicates that only fields specified by the program are transmitted to the host UNPROTCT indicates that only unprotected fields are transmitted to the host Indicates the currently selected character set or graphics mode as follows 8B indicates the 8 bit ASCII character set G0 indicates the 7 bit ASCH character set default G1 indicates a second 7 bit ASCH character set 15 3 PT250 Emulation Field 7 Field 8 GR indicates the Block Graphics character set LD indicates the Line Drawing character set Indicates the current transmission status as follows AUX SEND is displayed when data is being sent to an auxiliary device KEYBD LOCK is displayed when the keyboard is locked to prevent data entry usually set by the application MAIN SEND is displayed when a block of data is sent to the host SOFT LOCK is displayed when errors are detected Pressing the Clear key will correct this condition SYSTEM RDY is the default message that is displayed indicating that everything is functioning correctly and that no block of data is being sent to the host Displays terminal operation status messages These are generally error messages which can be cleared by pressing the Clear key for each message displayed ALL GRAPHICS indicates that you have attempted to enter data in a field reserved for graphics characters when in Block mode A
142. IBM ProPrinter 2 DEC IBM 3 Select ProPrinter character set CSI c p c PC Greek 210 PC Portuguese 860 PC Spanish 220 PC Hebrew 862 PC International 437 PC French Canada 863 PC Multilingual 850 PC Danish Norway 865 PC Slavic Latin2 852 PC Cyrillic 866 PC Turkish 857 Terminal Management Select Setup language CSI p English none 0 1 French 2 German 3 Spanish 4 Italian 5 Load time of day h hour 00 23 m minutes 00 59 CSI h m p CRT saver timing CSI q Never 0 5 min 5 15 min 15 30 min 30 60 min 60 Energy saver timing CSI r Never 0 5 min 5 15 min 15 30 min 30 Report terminal ID 4 hexadecimal pairs DCS ST Set terminal unit ID 4 hexadecimal pairs DCS ST C 21 Host Command Summary Enter exit VT PC Term mode select ASCII or scancodes CSI m er m VT mode or SCO ASCII Scancodes as follows VT Emulation Mode SCO Console Mode VT Mode ASCII characters none 0 VT PCTerm Mode Scancodes 1 c character set as follows VT Emulation Mode SCO Console Mode 210 PC Greek none 0 No change 220 PC Spanish 1 PC Multilingual 437 PC International 2 PC International 850 PC Multilingual 3 PC Danish Norwegian 852 PC Slavic Latin 2 4 PC Spanish 857 PC Turkish 5 PC Portuguese 860 PC Portuguese 6 DEC Supplemental 862 PC Hebrew 7 ISO Latin 1 863 PC French Canadian 865 PC Danish 866 PC Cyrillic Select conformance operating level CSI 1 b p le
143. II 7 bit is common to all three sets and provides standard alphabetic numeric and symbolic characters and control codes The second 8 bit table differs between the three sets and provides various special and multinational characters and additional control codes as shown in the Character Sets appendix The Ansi setting will use the PC ANSI character set specified by the Ansi Code Page option The ANSI BBS emulation will use this character set by default When ISO Hebrew is selected the following key functions will be enabled Ctrl Alt F1 Select Multinational 8 bit mode and left to right typing Ctrl Alt F2 Select National 7 bit mode lowercase English characters will be displayed as Hebrew and right to left typing Ctrl Alt F3 Toggle between left to right and right to left typing Ansi Code Page Factory default 437 This option specifies the character set used for display when the Preferred Char Set option is set to Ansi Note that selecting the ANSI BBS emulation will automatically set the preferred font to Ansi The character set mappings code pages supported are 437 for normal usage default and 850 858 or 1250 for multinational usage Each set consists of two tables of characters The first table is the standard ASCII character set The second table contains special characters which differ between the sets Refer to the Character Sets appendix for details 6 77 Setup Menus When PC Hebrew 862 is selected
144. LPHA ONLY indicates that you have attempted to enter non alphabetic data in a field reserved for alphabetic characters when in Block mode ALPHANUMERIC indicates that you have attempted to enter non alphanumeric data in a field reserved for alphanumeric characters when in Block mode FILL WHOLE indicates that every position in the field must be filled with data before you can continue when in Block mode HOST RX OVFW indicates that at least one character of data has been lost during a transmission from the host This occurs when the host sends data faster than the emulation can process it INVALID CMD indicates that an invalid control character or escape sequence was received or an invalid key was pressed KYBD OVFW indicates that at least one character of data has been lost during a transmission from the keyboard to the host This occurs when the keyboard sends data faster than the host can process it MUST ENTER indicates that you must enter data in a specific field before you can continue when in Block mode NUMERIC ONLY indicates that you have attempted to enter non numeric data in a field reserved for numeric characters when in Block mode RX ERROR indicates that the emulation received incorrect data as a result of a parity or framing error SCREEN FULL indicates that the emulation cannot display any more characters that it may receive when in Block mode 15 4 PT250 Emulation Field9 Displays messages defined by the progra
145. Menu j Program This dialog box is displayed by clicking the 5250 Options button in the TCP IP Telnet Configuration dialog box when TN5250 is not suppressed and the IBM 5250 Model is not set to 3812 1 or 5553 B01 printers Refer to the next section for 5250 Printer Options Device Name This enables you to enter the name of the device which the server will be requested to assign to this Telnet session You can return the local host name by entering s after the device name To return the user name enter u after the device name You can specify how many characters of the name is returned in each case For example 3s will return the first three characters of the local host name and 3s will return the last three characters To automatically assign a new device name for each successive connection either enter dN after the name where N is a decimal value or xN where N is a hexadecimal value Each time the host requests the device name a counter will be incremented modulus N and substituted into the device name For example TEST d4 will give TEST1 on first connect TEST2 on second TESTS3 on third TESTO on fourth TEST1 on fifth and so on TEST d100 will give TEST1 on first connect TEST2 on second TEST99 on 99th TESTO on 100th TEST1 on 101st and so on These values are preserved over power off so the first connection of any given power on may not be TEST1 Assume that the start point is rand
146. Menus Display HT when tabbing from host Factory default Unselected When this option is selected an HT character is displayed when a tab character is received in a message from the host Display HT when tabbing from keyboard Factory default Unselected When this option is selected an HT character is displayed when the Tab key is pressed ETX advance Factory default Unselected This determines the response of the Unisys T27 emulation when an ETX character is received FF clears tabs Factory default Unselected This determines whether the tabs are cleared when a form feed character is received Form delimiters visible Factory default Selected This determines whether form delimiter characters are displayed as a graphic default or as a blank Form xmit to cursor Factory default Selected This determines how the XMIT key works in forms mode Insert key inserts space Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether the Insert key inserts a space when pressed Line at a time xmit Factory default Unselected This determines how much data can be transmitted to the host at a time When this option is not selected a message as large as one full page of data can be transmitted When selected only the line containing the text cursor can be transmitted 6 66 Setup Menus Lines are double height Factory default Unselected This determines whether each line is single height norm
147. Messages The status line is divided into two sections The left section displays messages relating to the emulation and the right section is used to display messages from the host The type of status line displayed is determined by the setting of the Status Line option in the Wyse Settings dialog box The Extended status line provides similar information to the Standard status line but with additional fields for displaying information on local editing mode The emulation status messages are displayed in one of six or eight fields along the first section of the status line depending on whether the Standard or Extended status line is displayed The messages and their meanings are listed below FDX 001 001 1234 5 6 7 8 Host Messages Standard amp Extended Status Line Field1 Indicates the current keyboard mode CAPS indicates that Caps Lock is on Press the Caps Lock key to toggle the mode on and off LOCK indicates that the keyboard is locked This takes precedence over the CAPS and NUM messages NUM indicates that Num Lock is on Press the Num Lock key to toggle the mode on and off 19 4 Wyse Emulations Field2 Indicates the number of the page that is currently displayed No message is displayed when the current page is 0 Field 3 indicates that Monitor mode is on In this mode received codes are not actioned but displayed as symbolic representations Field4 Indicates the current operating mode FDX i
148. OR Backspace BS Carriage return CR Cursor left columns CSI D Cursor right columns CSI C Cursor down lines CSI B Cursor up lines CSI A Cursor position line column CSI 1 c f Cursor position line column CSI 1 cH Form feed FF Index ESCD Insert space characters CSI Insert lines CSI L New line LF Next line ESCE EDITING Delete character s from cursor CSI P Delete lines from amp including cursor line CSI M End protected area ESC w Erase line portion 0 from cursor 1 to 2 all CSI K Erase window portion 0 from cursor to 2 all CSI J GENERAL Bell BEL Device status report CSI6n PRINTING Media copy CSIi C 34 Host Command Summary HP 700 92 96 Emulation CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Assign attribute s to following characters ESC amp d Assign invisible amp attribute s to following chars ESC amp ds Dim H Dim Flash amp Underline M Flashing A Dim Under amp Inverse N Inverse video B Dim Flash Und amp Inv O Invisible S Flash amp Inverse C Underline D Flash amp Underline E Dim amp Flash I Flash Inverse amp Under G Dim amp Inverse J Inverse amp Underline F Dim amp Underline L Attributes off Dim Flash amp Inverse K CHARACTER SETS Select ROMAN 8 normal character set SI Select Line Drawing character set SO CURSOR Clear all tab stops ESC 3 Clear tab stop at current cursor position ESC 2 Cursor relative address
149. Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 10 2 HP 700 92 96 Emulation 6 When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details Display Configuration When you run the HP 700 92 96 emulation the following buttons will appear along the bottom of the display Line Hodifu Block Renote 1 lllerninal Henoru Display uto Hodifu All Node Node Test Lock Functns LF These buttons indicate the current function of keys F1 through F8 on the keyboard and are described later in this chapter The two numbers in the middle button indicate the current line and column position of the cursor The display area is 80 columns wide by 24 lines deep by default and 168 lines are stored off screen You can toggle between 80 and 132 column display by pressing the function key F12 and you can divide the display memory into 2 4 6 or 8 pages from the HP Settings dialog box as described in the Setup Menus chapter Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where HP 700 92 96 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the HP 700 92 96 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the HP virt
150. SC M ESC or ESC ESC L or ESC L Reset terminal Report status Test passed ESCc ESC 5n ESC 0n C 30 Host Command Summary BQ 3107 Emulation CHARACTER DISPLAY Blank area rendition Blink area rendition Select graphic rendition Select GO national or ASCII character set Select G1 graphic symbols character set Select G2 accented characters and special symbols set CURSOR ESC m SI SO ESCE Cursor addressing 1 to 80 SP to g DC3 line column Cursor position is end of next transmitted text ESCU Cursor position is start of next transmitted text ESCT Cursor On 0 or Off 1 ESC r Move cursor to left margin of current line CR Move cursor one column left BS Move cursor one column right DC2 Move cursor to begining of partition or field DC4 Move cursor down one line LF Move cursor up one line DC1 Move cursor to next tab stop HT Set tab stop ESC 1 Cancel tab stop ESC 2 ERASE Active partition erasure FF Erase in field 0 from cursor 1 to cursor 2 all ESC N Erase in line 0 from cursor 1 to cursor 2 all ESC K Erase in partition 0 from cursor to cursor 2 all ESC J FIELDS Start of a fixed field FS Start of a variable field GS Repeat fields RS X GENERAL Buffer character repetition to DEL US Define area qualification ESC o Format mode ESCM Normal mode ESC N Message waiting ESCR Set mode SDP mod
151. SC 4y Poll keyboard firmware ESC 5y Fill the screen moving area with the following character ESC 8v Display complete character generator ESC 9v Reset the previous two commands ESC 7v C 63 Host Command Summary TA6530 Emulation Conversational amp Block Mode ATTRIBUTES Set display attribute ESC 6 Normal video SP Inverse invisible y Dimmed Underline dim 1 Inverse video Underline italics 2 Italics n Underline inverse 4 Invisible Underline inverse dim 5 Underline 0 Underline inverse italics 6 Inverse dim Underline invisible 8 Inverse italics amp Underline inverse invisible Set video prior condition register attribute as above ESC 7 Set reset colour map table ESC q Read colour configuration Block mode ESC u Set colour configuration Block mode ESC t Read colour mapping table Block mode ESC v Set colour mapping table Block mode ESC x CURSOR Back tab Block mode ESCi Clear all tabs ESC 3 Clear tab at current position ESC 2 Move cursor down one line LF Move cursor home ESCH Move cursor home down ESCF Move cursor left one column BS Move cursor right one column ESCC Move cursor to beginning of current line CR Move cursor to next tab stop HT Move cursor up one line ESCA Report cursor address ESC a Set cursor address DC3 Set cursor address extended Block mode ESC D Set tab at current position ESC 1 DISPLAY Clear memory to spaces ESCI Clear memory to spaces extended ESC I
152. SET COLUMN R O w IIO Tm uo o m gt m OOO IN O Q G N O 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 C o b N lt x Z lt c Amo os gt O Zz Z r x c lt 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 2 pzEciuAL 1B HEXADECIMAL B 28 Character Sets SIEMENS 97801 EURO CHARACTER SET o o D D gr o ON o OOO a GA a ALO ww ro nje o o o 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt S Dlo o o oo ax a o m ee ml C O gt U m eO a Q 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 bEcmaL 1B HEXADECIMAL B 29 Character Sets SIEMENS 97801 BRACKETS CHARACTER SET COLUMN OO oo ol o o oo m anja o o o V4 o o o 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 t Fe ER oO he a t 1 F ee L rh 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 2 pzEcivAL 1B HEXADECIMAL B 30 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 ENGLISH U S CANADIAN BILINGUAL amp NETHERLANDS CHARACTER SET P gt gt gt O gt gt D O G O Z Z r X c lt N lt x Z lt C gt O OOO O Q A W N za N L
153. SP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 35 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 ITALIAN CHARACTER SET gt gt gt gt xr ego T m O O m gt A A yov O Z Z r x lt N lt x Z lt C X O Ce OI O oO GQ N za Oo N Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 36 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 SPANISH CHARACTER SET J K L M N o P Q R N lt x Z lt cao OJOO ns O QU T WwW N N Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 37 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 SWEDISH amp FINNISH CHARACTER SET gt P gt gt xr gol T m O O D gt Dovoz Z r x c lt N lt x Z lt C O ola N ola R vN za o 2 lt N Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 38 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 BELGIAN amp SWISS FRENCH GERMAN CHARACTER SET gt P gt gt gt O gt gt Dio lu O Z Z r Xx c lt N lt ww Z lt C O Oo oO O Q P GO N a N font c c c c Legend RSP required
154. Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details 7 3 DEC VT Emulations The Status Bar The status bar along the bottom of the display enables you to switch between modes and show the status of various operations Q Local Pause VT500 7 Bit 1 1 001 001 Overstrike Mode Printer Ready Aux Ready 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Item 1 This displays two LEDs The first LED indicates whether or not you are connected to the host It will show red when not connected and green when you are connected The second LED indicates whether or not data is being sent to or from the host It will show dull green when there is no activity red when data is being sent to the host and bright green when data is being received from the host Item 2 This button enables you to switch between Local and Online mode The label indicates the mode you will switch to if the button is clicked Item 3 This button enables you to Pause or Resume scrolling data in the window The label indicates the action that will be taken if the button is clicked Item 4 Indicates the current terminal emulation Item 5 This displays the active session always 1 the current page number always 1 and the line column location of the text cursor Item 6 This indicates whether Overstrike Mode or Insert Mode is currently selected In Overstrike Mode default new characters will replace already existing characters at the cursor position
155. SaveSession off SaveSessionAs off StartupOptions off FileTransfer off FTP off PrintSetup off PrintScreen off Print Buffer off AutoPrint off CancelPrint off EjectPage off Exit off EditMenu off ClipboardText off ClipboardGraphics off Copy off Paste off SelectAll off ClearBuffer off SettingsMenu off Attributes off Disable Block Transmission item BlockTransmission off Disable BQ3107 item Disable Emulation item E Disable Graphics item Disable HP2392A item Disable IBM 3151 item Disable IBM 3270 item Disable IBM5250 item Disable Keyboard Macros item Disable Local Editing item Disable Mouse Buttons item Disable Serial item Disable Soft Buttons item Disable TA6526 item Disable Terminal item BQ3107 off Emulation off Graphics off hp2392a off Ibm3151 off Ibm3270 off Tbm5250 off KeyboardMacros off LocalEditing off MouseButtons off Serial off SoftButtons off ta6526 off Terminal off 20 3 Initialization Commands Disable Unisys T27 item UnisysT27 off none Disable Wyse item Wyse off none Disable Tools menu ToolsMenu off MO Disable scroll bar ScrollBar off SB Soft button levels displayed ButtonLevels 0 4 BLO 4 Disable status bar amp DEC status StatusLine off V Disable colour palette UsePalette off SP Flashing characters in all
156. Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the DEC VT terminal emulation required in the Emulation list box The VT52 and VT100 emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT52 and VT100 terminals respectively The VT500 7 Bit and VT500 8 Bit emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT320 terminal the difference is in their treatment of 8 bit control codes When VT500 7 Bit is selected all 8 bit codes are converted to their 7 bit equivalents whereas VT500 8 Bit leaves 8 bit codes unchanged If you are using VT200 applications select VT500 7 Bit Specify the required VT Terminal ID setting Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for DEC VT Emulations additional Telne
157. Set normal foreground colour integer as above ESC F Set normal backeround colour integer as above ESC G Set reverse foreground colour integer as above ESC H Set reverse background colour integer as above ESC I Set graphic foreground colour integer as above ESC J Set graphic background colour integer as above ESC K Request current colour attribute integer as above ESC M CURSOR Clear tab stop ESC g Clear horizontal tab stop at active position 0 Vertical tab at cursor line HFT 1 Horizontal tabs on line HFT 2 All horizontal tabs 3 All vertical tabs HFT 4 Vertical tab stop HFT ESCI Cursor backward tabs ESC Z Cursor horizontal absolute ESC G Cursor forward tabs HFT ESC I Cursor tab stop control HFT ESC W Cursor down lines HFT ESC E Cursor up lines ESC F Horizontal tab stop ESCH Index cursor move down one line ESCD Reverse index cursor move up one line ESCM Move cursor to beginning of next line ESCE Move cursor left columns ESC D Move cursor down lines ESC B Move cursor right columns ESC C Move cursor to line column c ESC 1 cf C 26 Host Command Summary Move cursor to line column c ESC 1 c H Move cursor up lines ESC A Move cursor up tabs HFT ESC Y Restore cursor position ESC u Save cursor position ESC s DISPLAY Restore cursor amp attributes ESC 8 Save cursor amp attributes
158. Soft Buttons window can be saved so that it is displayed the same way the next time TeemTalk is loaded To do this select the Save Session As option in the File menu make sure the Soft Buttons option is checked then click OK Programming A Soft Button 1 Select the Level number 2 Select the Button number 3 Check the Local check box to make the button definition action locally or uncheck it to transmit the definition to the host when the button is pressed 4 Enter a Name to be displayed on the button up to ten characters long 5 Enter the button definition in the Command box or make a selection from the list of Predefined Macros then click Apply 6 Click the Add button to accept the definition The new definition will be added to the Current Definitions list 7 To save the definitions click OK to exit then select Save Session As in the File menu make sure the Soft Buttons box is checked then click OK Key Combinations amp Sequences You can program a soft button to perform the function of a combination or sequence of keys For example you can cause a button to perform the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the lt and gt characters in the key definition text box You may omit the VK_ and VT_ etc parts of the virtual key
159. Subtitle to display in title bar none ST subtitle Disable title bar none TB Disable Min Max amp Close buttons none SY Disable Minimize button MinimizeBox off MN Disable Maximize button MaximizeBox off MX Disable Close button MenuCloseltem off MT Disable System menu SystemMenu off none Disable System amp Min Max SystemMenu none none Disable Command bar CommandBar off CB Disable Command bar CmdBarTools 0 MA Disable tool buttons on cmd bar CmdBarTools 1 TB 20 2 Initialization Commands Disable toolbar Disable menu bar pop ups toolbar Disable menu bar Disable menu bar amp pop ups Disable File menu Disable Factory item Disable Reset item Disable New Connection item Disable OpenSession item Disable CloseSession item Disable Save Session item Disable Save Session As item Disable Start up Options item Disable File Transfer item Disable FTP item Disable Print Setup item Disable Print Screen item Disable Print Buffer item Disable Auto Print item Disable Cancel Print item Disable Eject Page item Disable Exit item Disable Edit menu Disable Clipboard Text item Disable Clipboard Graphics item Disable Copy item Disable Paste item Disable Select All item Disable Clear Buffer item Disable Settings menu Disable Attributes item none none none none FileMenu off Factory off Reset off NewConnection off OpenSession off CloseSession off
160. T amp V Teemlalk TeemTalk 5 0 for Windows CE amp XPe User s Guide neoware USA Neoware Inc 3200 Horizon Drive King of Prussia PA 19406 Tel 1 610 277 8300 Fax 1 610 771 4200 Email info neoware com UK Neoware UK Ltd The Stables Cosgrove Milton Keynes MK19 7JJ Tel 44 0 1908 267111 Fax 44 0 1908 267112 Email teem info neoware com TeemTalk Software Support Telephone 1 610 277 8300 Web http www neoware com support Software Version 5 0 1 October 2004 Neoware UK Ltd The Stables Cosgrove Milton Keynes MK19 7JJ Tel 44 0 1908 267111 Fax 44 0 1908 267112 TeemTalk 1988 2004 Neoware UK Ltd All Rights Reserved This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The material in this manual is for information purposes only and is subject to change without notice Neoware UK Ltd accepts no responsibility for any errors contained herein Trademarks TeemTalk is a registered trademark of Neoware UK Ltd ADDS Viewpoint A2 is a trademark of Applied Digital Data Systems Inc AIX is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation D100 D200 and D410 are trademarks of Data General Dataspeed is a registered trademark of AT amp T DEC VT52 VT100 VT131 VT220 V
161. T mode This is displayed by selecting Open Session in the File menu Open Session ORR x Description V Save As Default Delete The Description list box displays the names of connection templates that were created using the Save Session As dialog box The descriptive name of the connection template currently in use is highlighted The factory default connection template is Untitled Clicking one of the descriptions then the OK button will cause the dialog box to close and the connection template associated with the chosen description will be actioned You can specify a particular connection template to use by default by clicking the required description checking the Save As Default check box then clicking the OK button To delete a connection template select the description then click the Delete button Saving The Session Configuration XPe When running TeemTalk for Windows XPe you can either save the session configuration using the current session name or you can save it under a new session name if TeemTalk was started without a session i e not started by clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu Save Using Current Session Name To save the session configuration using the current session name select Save Session in the File menu If you were using a session template and modified the settings a local copy of the template will be made with the same name but with the changed setting
162. T300 VT320 and VT340 are registered trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation Hazeltine is a trademark of Esprit Systems Inc HP700 92 HP700 94 HP700 96 HP2392A and HP2622A are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Microsoft and MS DOS are registered trademarks and Windows and Excel are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Prime is a registered trademark and PT250 is a trademark of Prime Computer Inc Retrographics and VT640 are registered trademarks of Digital Engineering Inc Sun PC NFS and NFS are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc Tandem NonStop and LXN are trademarks of Tandem Computers Inc Tektronix is a registered trademark of Tektronix Inc TeleVideo is a registered trademark and Tele Video 910 910 925 950 and 955 are trademarks of TeleVideo Systems Inc Westward is a registered trademark of Telemetrix Inc WYSE is a registered trademark and WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 are trademarks of Wyse Technology Inc All other product names are trademarks of their respective manufacturers 1988 2004 Neoware UK Ltd All Rights Reserved Before reproduction of this material in part or in whole obtain written consent from Neoware UK Ltd Contents Contents Introduction 1 1 About This User s Guide a 1 1
163. T_LEFT PFI PF12 PT_PF1 PT_PF12 Cursor Right PT_RIGHT Previous PT_PREV Cursor Up PT_UP Print Screen PT_PRTSCN Delete PT_DELETE Return PT_RETURN End Begin PT_ENDBEGIN Scroll Down PT_SCROLLDOWN Enter PT_ENTER Scroll Left PT_SCROLLLEFT Erase PT_ERASE Scroll Lock PT_SCROLLLOCK Escape PT_ESC Scroll Right PT_SCROLLRIGHT F1 F10 PT_F1 PT_F10 Scroll Up PT_SCROLLUP Help PT_HELP Stop PT_STOP Home PT_HOME Tab PT_TAB Insert PT_INSERT Unlabelled Large PT_UNLLARGE Keypad 00 PT_PADOO Unlabelled Small PT_UNLSMALL A 6 Virtual Key Names SCO Console Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Backspace SC_BACKSPACE F1 F12 SC_F1 SC_F21 Cursor Down SC_DOWN F1 F12 Shift SC_S_F1 SC_S_F12 Cursor Left SC_LEFT F1 F12 Ctrl SC_C_F1 SC_C_F12 Cursor Right SC_RIGHT F1 F12 Ctrl Shift SC_CS_F1 SC_CS_F12 Cursor Up SC_UP Home SC_HOME Delete SC_DELETE Insert SC_INSERT Delete Shift SC_S_ DELETE Page Down SC_PAGEDOWN Delete Ctrl Shift SC_CS_DELETE Page Down Shift SC_S_PAGEDOWN End SC_END Page Up SC_PAGEUP End Shift SC_S_END Return SC_RETURN Enter SC_ENTER Tab SC_TAB Escape SC_ESCAPE Tab Shift SC_S_TAB TA6530 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Backspace TA_BACKSPACE Keypad Comma TA_PADCOMMA Back Tab TA_BACKTAB Keypad Decimal TA_PADDECIMAL Break TA_BREAK Keypad Enter TA_ENTER Character Delete TA_CHARDEL Keypad Minus TA_PADMINUS Charac
164. Terms amp C nv ehntftI ns a te N Rp S am a aa 1 3 Getting Started 2 1 WBT Session Configuration 2 1 Using The Connection Wizard a aasssssssssssasss 2 1 Terminal Emulation Configuration aaaaaasssssssa 2 4 Emulation Options u uuu asia anus 2 4 Graphics Mo0gde uu q u n e Sag u i KERR 2 6 DEC Suite Options y s ise Mitta MA a ss 2 6 BO 3107 Option u n antawata e erat e saa a ee 2 7 HP 700 92 96 Option n tein Sa iya l ua 2 7 IBM 3151 OPON S ui 82 unusapa pa kuyaq 2 7 IBM 3270 Options picanha aa a naq aa 2 7 IBM 5250 OptI S a us S p l u asalan s 2 8 TCP IP Connection Settings a aasssssssssssssssssa 2 9 TN3270 OptiOns seis SS ua des ate dhe eee sees 2 11 TINS 250 Options eninge aed ethane ans 2 13 5250 Printer Opti nS u eia n mA u asua sh yetesves dageveneds 2 15 SSL Connection Settings 2 18 Notes About Certificates ivinenn tenien 2 19 SSH Connection Settings a ssssssssssssssa 2 21 SSH Key File Permissions aa 2 25 Modem Connection Settings a a aassssssssssssss 2 26 Serial Connection Setting Sisinnio iis 2 27 Automate Login Process z n n n mga u a eir 2 29 Printer Port Set gs ay ei a e Nev a
165. VK_MULTIPLY VK_SUBTRACT VK_NUMLOCK VK_OFF VK_NEXT VK_PRIOR VK_PASTE VK_PAUSE VK_PERIOD VK_PRINT VK_SNAPSHOT VK_BACKQUOTE VK_RETURN VK_SCROLL VK_SELECT VK_SEMICOLON VK_SEPARATOR VK_SETUP VK_RSHIFT VK_BACKSLASH VK_SLASH VK_SPACE VK_LBRACKET VK_RBRACKET VK_TAB VK_LWIN VK_RWIN A 1 Virtual Key Names AT amp T 4410 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Backspace AT_BACKSPACE F1 F8 AT_F1 AT_F8 Break AT_BREAK Home Down AT_HOMEDOWN Clear AT_CLEAR Home Up AT_HOMEUP Cursor Down AT_DOWN Line Feed AT_LINEFEED Cursor Left AT_LEFT Num Lock AT_NUMLOCK Cursor Right AT_RIGHT Return AT_RETURN Cursor Up AT_UP Setup AT_SETUP Delete AT_DELETE Tab AT_TAB Escape AT_ESCAPE BQ 3107 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Backspace BQ_BACKSPACE Insert Line BQ_INSERTLINE Back Tab BQ_BACKTAB Keypad 0 9 BQ_PADO PAD9 Blank BQ_BLANK Keypad Comma BQ_PADCOMMA Blink BQ_BLINK Keypad Decimal BQ_PADDECIMAL Clear BQ_CLEAR Keypad Divide BQ_PADDIVIDE Cursor Down BQ_DOWN Keypad Minus BQ_PADMINUS Cursor Left BQ_LEFT Keypad Multiply BQ_PADMULTIPLY Cursor Right BQ_RIGHT Keypad Plus BQ_PADPLUS Cursor Up BQ_UP Local BQ_LOCAL Delete Character BQ_DELETECHAR Local Message BQ_LOCALMSG Delete Line BQ_DELETELINE Menu BQ_MENU Delete Message BQ_DELMSG Next Line BQ_NEXTLINE Delete Tab BQ_DELTAB Num Lock BQ_NUMLOCK Erase BQ_ERASE Online BQ_ONLINE Erase End Of Line BQ_ER
166. When Insert Mode is selected new characters will be inserted at the cursor position without deleting existing characters which will move to the right Item 7 This will display Lock when the keyboard is locked or Edit when the terminal emulation is in Edit mode Item 8 This will display the time in 24 hour format when in DEC VT500 mode if the VT525 set time command has been received from the host Item 9 Indicates the status of the printer as follows None signifies that the printer is not turned on or not connected or not installed in Microsoft Windows Not Ready signifies that the printer is not ready to receive data for printing Ready signifies that the printer is ready to receive data for printing DEC VT Emulations Auto signifies that the emulation is in Auto Print mode in which the current cursor line is sent to the printer when a command for the cursor to move to the next line is issued Controller signifies that the emulation is in Printer Controller mode in which the host has direct control over the printer Print screen commands issued from the keyboard or mouse will be ignored ErrGen indicates that an error has occurred and a message box will be displayed indicating the error Item 10 This indicates the keyboard mode It will be blank when the keyboard is in normal mode and will display DEC when in DEC mode You can toggle between normal and DEC mode by pressing the keys Alt Num Lock together Refer to
167. X Telnet Options m National Char Settings r APL2 Multilingual Latin2 F Allow User Specified CodePage 31 Codepage Charset CCSID 363 870 959 870 Default CharSet Lh CCSID This dialog box is displayed by selecting IBM 3270 in the Settings menu IBM 3270 Model Factory default 3278 2 E This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported TN3287 printing is supported by selecting 3287 1 One of four display sizes can be selected 3278 9 2 24 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 3 32 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 4 43 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 5 27 rows by 132 columns 3278 settings with the E extension provide support for the following extended attributes these are supported by the 3279 as standard 3270 Field Attributes Extended Highlighting Foreground Colour Query Reply Inbound Structured Fields 6 50 Setup Menus Numeral Swap Factory default Unselected When using a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard this will cause all numbers to be displayed using the National character set when in Latin mode Symbol Swap Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause symbols such as brackets to be displayed the correct way round when typing in right to left mode Rule Line Factory default Cross A rule can be displayed across the emulation wor
168. Y Insert shifted WY_REPLACE End WY_END Print shifted WY_SEND Enter WY_ENTER Alt A WY_CHARSET Escape WY_ESC Fl F16 WY_F1 WY_F16 Function WY_FUNCT Home WY_HOME Notes Insert WY_INSERT To obtain the virtual key names for shifted Keypad 5 WY_KP5 functions of the keys listed at left substitute Page Down WY_PAGEDOWN WY_ with WY_S_ Page Up WY_PAGEUP The virtual key names listed above are Print WY_PRINT alternative names that can be used Return WY_RETURN Tab WY_TAB A 9 Virtual Key Names TeemTalk Virtual Key Name Functions TeemTalk provides additional virtual key name functions for special tasks such as sending text to a file or the serial port and reading text from a file to place in the keyboard buffer as if typed Key Function Virtual Key Name Start Send Text sequence VK_FILE_O Start Read Text sequence VK_FILE_I End Send Read Text sequence VK_FEND Delay nnn tenths of a second WK_SLEEPnnn The following sections describe how to use these virtual key names Sending Text To A File lt VK_FILE_O gt lt filename gt data string lt VK_FEND gt will write the data string to filename If the file already exists it is replaced For example lt VK_FILE_O gt lt c file txt gt text to enter to file_013_010next line of file lt VK_FEND gt will create a file called file txt containing the following two lines of text text to enter to file next line of file Sending Text To The Serial Port The follow
169. _BEG_LINE AS_WP_END_LINE Insert Carrier Return Insert Stop Code Find Stop Code Required Page End Required Space Required Tab Symbols Command AS_WP_RETURN AS_WP_STOP_CODE AS_WP_FIND_STOP AS_WP_REQD_PAGE AS_WP_REQD_SPACE AS_WP_REQD_TAB AS_WP_SYMBOLS A 5 Virtual Key Names MDIS Prism Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Back Tab MD_BACKTAB Keypad Comma MD_PADCOMMA Backspace MD_BACKSPACE Keypad Decimal MD_PADDECIMAL Break MD_BREAK Keypad Minus MD_PADMINUS Clear MD_CLEAR Line Feed MD_LINEFEED Cursor Down MD_DOWN Print Screen MD_PRINT Cursor Left MD_LEFT Return MD_RETURN Cursor Right MD_RIGHT Screen Down MD_SCREENDOWN Cursor Up MD_UP Screen Left MD_SCREENLEFT Delete MD_DELETE Screen Right MD_SCREENRIGHT Enter MD_ENTER Screen Up MD_SCREENUP Escape MD_ESCAPE Scroll Down MD_SCROLLDOWN F1 F18 MD FI MD_F18 Scroll Left MD_SCROLLLEFT Hold Screen MD_HOLD Scroll Right MD_SCROLLRIGHT Home MD_HOME Scroll Up MD_SCROLLUP Keypad 0 9 MD_PAD0 9 Tab MD_TAB PT250 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Back Tab PT_BACKTAB Keypad 0 9 PT_PAD0 9 Backspace PT_BACKSPACE Keypad Decimal PT_PADDECIMAL Break PT_BREAK Keypad Minus PT_PADMINUS Cancel PT_CANCEL Keypad Plus PT_PADPLUS Change Mode PT_CHNGMODE Menu PT_MENU Character Set PT_CHARSET Next PT_NEXT Clear PT_CLEAR Num Lock PT_NUMLOCK Cursor Down PT_DOWN PAI PA4 PT_PA1 PT_PA4 Cursor Left P
170. able forms the second half of the ANSI 437 character set the first half being the ASCII character set The ANSI 437 character set is used when the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to Ansi and the Ansi Code Page option is set to 437 B 8 Character Sets ANSI 850 CHARACTER SET R O w 0 O O O o oO We IL 0 O IF malu l l lt lt C C c oOo E O JL mlm ax m e cC O lt c K 245 OCTAL KEY N 165 DECIMAL A5 HEXADECIMAL This table forms the second half of the ANSI 850 character set the first half being the ASCII character set The ANSI 850 character set is used when the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to Ansi and the Ansi Code Page option is set to 850 B 9 Character Sets ANSI 858 CHARACTER SET R O w 0 i o O o D IL CO OO N O Q OQ N gt l wo X m eo C O lt amp a F 245 OCTAL KEY N 165 DECIMAL A5 HEXADECIMAL This table forms the second half of the ANSI 858 character set the first half being the ASCII character set
171. aching the right margin the last character position will be overwritten with every new character received until a carriage return or other cursor movement command is issued LineTx D Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether data is sent a line or a page at a time when in Edit mode When this option is selected data will be transmitted a line at a time When unselected data will be transmitted a page at a time Page data will either be from the beginning of display memory or from the current cursor position InhHndShk G InhDC2 H Factory default Unselected The combined setting of these two options determine the type of handshaking used when blocks of data are transmitted to the host One of three types of handshake may be used 1 No handshake Blocks of data are sent immediately when the relevant transmit key is pressed 2 DC1 handshake Data is only sent to the host when the host sends an ASCII DC1 control code to request it 3 DC1 DC2 DC1 handshake The host sends an ASCH DC1 control code to which the emulator replies by sending a DC2 code if ready to transmit The host sends the DC1 code again to cause the data block to be transmitted 6 31 Setup Menus The type of handshake used for block transfers is determined by the type of block transfer to be performed the mode that the HP70092 emulation currently operating in character block line block page or modify mode an
172. acros dialog box 14 3 MDIS Prism Emulations Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout p ljlus ae s y y u uA paub 1e S eyoeJGg u suonounj sdeS y y uo spu B y Aq peyeolpul se uonounj s y peyJeWUN V 65esn y IPLLION Besn y 1IV avi avLiova NMOG dn 1180S H Td9S OHOS 1049S Nos u neos dOvdS HOWE NYS 94 Sd td d Zd ld aHa MOH jina f EHA HA Obd 6d 93 44 faafaa ss Tos Tia tan 9983 14 4 PT250 Emulation 15 PT250 Emulation This chapter describes the Prime PT250 terminal emulation Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box 2 Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed 3 Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box 4 Select the PT250 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box 5 Click Next to display the Host Inf
173. actory default 24 This option applies to the WY 50 and WY 60 emulations and specifies the number of data lines displayed on the screen below the status line Note that the other emulations only support 24 lines and a label line 24 24 data lines and a label line at the bottom 25 25 data lines but no label line 42 42 data lines and a label line at the bottom 43 43 data lines but no label line 6 43 Setup Menus Page Size Factory default 1 x Lines This option applies to the WY 50 and WY 60 emulations and specifies the size of a page in display memory in multiples of the Lines setting Note that the other emulations only support 1 x Lines The 1 Rest setting will divide the display memory into two pages the first containing the number of lines specified by the Lines option the second containing all the remaining lines Note that changing the page format will cause the entire display memory to be cleared the cursor will move to the home position and the scroll margin will be reset Status Line Factory default Standard This option applies to all emulations and enables you to specify the type of status line displayed at the top of the screen or remove it from the display Both the Standard and Extended status lines display messages about the state of the emulation or application The Extended status line displays additional editing status messages Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details Block End Fact
174. al or double heieht Lower case lockout Factory default Unselected When selected this will cause the LOCK key to be on so that only UPPERCASE characters can be generated SOH clears screen Factory default Unselected When selected this will cause the Unisys T27 emulation to automatically clear the screen whenever it receives an SOH character SOH exits forms Factory default Selected When selected this will cause the Unisys T27 emulation to automatically exit forms mode whenever it receives an SOH character SO SI XTN SO SI XLT Factory default Unselected The setting of these options determine the effect of the ESC SO and ESC SI sequences when receiving or transmitting data When receiving from the host the setting of the SO SI XTN option determines whether the sequences are used to switch between standard and extended character sets selected or reverse highlight and underline unselected When transmitting to the host the setting of both options determine the sequences used for switching between standard and extended character sets and reverse highlight and underline as follows XTN XLT SO SI Extended Characters Reverse Video Underline Sent as Sent as Begin End OFF OFF SO SI ESC SO ESC SI ON OFF ESC ESC SO SI OFF ON ESC ESC ESC SO ESC SI ON ON ESC ESC SO SI The SO shift out and SI shift in sequences allow switching between two sets of characters the standard character set and the exten
175. als respectively as 6 27 Setup Menus emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details The TVI 950 and TVI 955 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the Tele Video 950 and 955 terminals respectively The Unisys T27 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Unisys T27 terminal Refer to the Unisys T27 Emulation chapter for details The Viewdata 40 Viewdata 80 and Viewdata Split modes enable access to a viewdata service using one of three display formats as described in the Viewdata Mode section in the Getting Started chapter The VT PCTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed for the PC Term mode supported by DEC This is the same as the VT510 emulation except that keyboard scan codes are sent on key press release instead of ASCII codes by default The VT52 and VT100 emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT52 and VT100 terminals respectively Refer to the DEC VT Emulations chapter for details The VT500 7 Bit and VT500 8 Bit emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT320 terminal the difference is in their treatment of 8 bit control codes When VT500 7 Bit is selected all 8 bit codes are converted to their 7 bit equivalents whereas VT500 8 Bit leaves 8 bit codes unchanged If you are using VT200 applications select VT500 7 Bit Refer to the DEC VT Emulations cha
176. alue backslash character followed by a 3 digit number u001B Unicode value backslash and u characters then unicode value Aj Control key value A represents the control key on the keyboard x Additional value for ESC The following backslash values can be used u Unicode introducer r Carriage return n Line feed e Escape Note that as the and characters are used as value introducers to enter these as character values you need to precede them with a backslash character i e enter Vas and as The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value u20ac The Toolbar Notes 5 6 Setup Menus Setup Menus This chapter describes the options available in the setup menus and dialog boxes Displaying amp Closing Menus The following menus can be displayed from the command bar e Ezra Factory Default v Clipboard Text v English Reset Terminal Clipboard Graphics French German New Connection Open Session Emulation 7 Save Session Save Session As Startup Options Printer Setup Clear Buffer Print Screen PrintBuffer fg 318 Auto Print Serial Eject Page Auxport es Terminal Exit Local Editing Block Transmission Attributes Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Mouse Button Action Note The options available in the menus depend on whether or not you are in WBT mode To displ
177. ao AA Multinational aao AA o aA OA Multinational National opening bracket back slash Ilo I lt closing bracket cieunfex A space grave accent 3 space opening brace vertical line 5 closing brace tilde Space inverted cent sign c I ee C I pound sign xY ree yen sign Y ah Me 2 Q oso S0 National amp Multinational National includes S O or SO currency sign X 0 a xO copyright sign cO S cO degree sign o space National plus or minus sign superscript 2 2 superscript 3 3 I lu or U micro sign in order paragraph sign p oP centred period A superscript 1 1 masculine ordinal indicator O_ or O_ double closed angle brackets gt fraction 14 one quarter in order fraction 12 one half in order fraction three 34 quarters Dutch in order fl Florin Dutch in order m ij ij sign Dutch in order inverted 2 A grave A A acute A A circumflex AA Atilde A 3 6 Keyboard Configuration Ra Pi P BE fa P a EJ a 0 EA E s EA 6 COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES continued A umlaut A o A A ring A o A degree sign A E diphthong A E in order C cedilla lu or JU in order E grave E E acute E E circumflex
178. apter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button All the Wyse associated emulations are configured via the Wyse Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter Note that some settings may not apply to the particular emulation currently running Selecting a setting that is not applicable to the current emulation will cause the emulator to use the default setting for that emulation when the dialog box is exited Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the Wyse terminal emulation required in the Alpha Emulation list box The WY50 WY50 and WY60 emulations provide compatibilit
179. apter for details 6 54 Setup Menus Copy Only User Fields to F Key Factory default Selected This will enable only data contained in user entry fields in the selected area to be copied to a function key Refer to the Copying Screen Data To A Function Key section in the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details Copy All Data to F Key Factory default Unselected This will enable all screen data protected and unprotected in the selected area to be copied Refer to the Copying Screen Data To A Function Key section in the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details Copy Function Enabled Factory default Unselected This determines whether the copy functions are available for copying selected data to another area of the display or to a function key Single Step Macros Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will enable an Fn key macro to be played one keystroke at a time by pressing the spacebar for each keystroke after issuing a play Fn key command The status line will display the contents of the macro and the cursor position in the status line indicates the point that has been reached in the macro play back Refer to the Play Back Keystrokes section in the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details 6 55 Setup Menus IBM 5250 Settings IBM 5250 Settings OKE x IBM 5250 Model r Font E 79 2 24x80 Colour M Courier New F Keyboard r National Char Settings Type UKB Unlock Delay fo r R
180. aracter values of r1 r2 and r3 are listed below When creating two viewports r r2 must be 24 or 25 When creating three viewports r r2 r3 must be 24 or 25 Rows ASCH Rows ASCII Rows ASCII Rows ASCII 1 8 14 n 20 4 2 j 9 15 21 5 3 10 16 0 22 6 4 11 17 1 23 7 5 12 18 2 24 8 6 amp 13 19 3 25 9 7 Select active partition command response not model 11 ESC q Select host partition command response not model 11 ESC SP q A Viewport 1 B Viewport 2 C Viewport 3 Jump partition command response not model 11 ESC A Enable partition separator line not model 11 ESC Disable partition separator line not model 11 ESC EDITING Delete character ESCQ Delete line ESCO Erase to end of field line ESCI Erase to end of page ESCJ Erase input ESCK Insert character ESC P character Insert line ESCN GENERAL OPERATION Bell BEL Cancel ESC S or CAN Disable write Null ESC Enable write Null ESC Line turnaround character if selected ETX CR EOT or DC3 C 40 Host Command Summary Read status Enter transparent mode control characters displayed Exit transparent mode Mandatory disconnect Begin pass through data stream End pass through data stream Restart transmission pacing Stop transmission pacing Begin outbound trace End outbound trace Reset to initial state Reset keyboard lock amp keep MDT bit Read control 1 Read control 2 Read control 3 Read cont
181. aring that character For example pressing X while the File menu is displayed will cause the emulator to shut down Method 2 Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the option required then hit Return Setup Menus Dialog Boxes Selecting an option which is followed by an ellipsis will cause a dialog box to be displayed The example shown below is displayed by selecting the Block Transmission option in the Settings menu Block Transmission OK x Send Unprotected Only V Send Font Information Send Only Selected Areas V Send Record Separators V Send All Selected Areas Send Spaces Compressed Line Transmission On Send Partial Page PF Key Effect None Breakthrough O As TX Prefix O As Tx Suffix Send Key Effect Transmit Protocol Immediate O Deferred ansi C y7 131 End of Line Characters M End of Block Characters There are four basic methods for changing settings within the dialog boxes Options preceded by a check box such as Send Unprotected Only in the example above are true or selected when the box contains a W and false or unselected when the box is empty Click the pointer in the box to toggle the setting on or off or press the spacebar on the keyboard When a group of options preceded by round buttons are enclosed in a box such as the PF Key Effect options in the example above only one of these options is selected or true at any one time The currently selected option is i
182. arriage return command received Application Keypad Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing keys in the keypad on the right side of the keyboard When unselected the keypad is in numeric mode and keys will generate the characters shown on the key caps When selected the keypad is in application mode and keys will generate control functions when pressed The top row of four keys act as the equivalent DEC function keys PF1 through PF4 Application Cursor Keys Factory default Unselected When this option is selected the cursor keys will generate application program codes when pressed Unselected the keys will generate normal cursor movement commands Display Controls Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether received control codes are actioned or displayed When selected a representation of most control codes will be displayed on the screen 6 79 Setup Menus Display Error Codes Factory default Selected This option determines whether or not a chequerboard symbol is displayed when the delete code isreceived Jump Scroll Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether data is scrolled one or several lines at a time when the window becomes full Data will scroll up several lines at a time when this is selected 80 132 Clears Screen Factory default Selected This option determines whether or not data is c
183. ata from the host has been detected possibly due to incompatible application soft ware Press the Reset or SysReq key to remove this indicator and unlock the keyboard KEG Indicates that you must wait while the requested function is performed XANUM Indicates that you tried to enter an invalid character into a nu meric field when the numeric lock feature was active The keyboard numeric lock feature can be overridden by using a Shift key The keyboard can be unlocked and the indicator removed by pressing the Reset key XK Indicates that you tried to enter data in the wrong location This will occur when you attempt to do any of the following Enter insert erase or delete a character when the cursor is ina protected field or at a field attribute location Perform a cursor select operation when the cursor is not in a valid cursor select field The keyboard can be unlocked and the indicator removed by pressing the Reset key X SYSTEM Indicates that you cannot enter any data because the application program has disabled the keyboard following an entry Ki gt Indicates that you attempted to insert characters into an unpro tected field when the cursor was at the end of the field or you attempted to word wrap to the next line when there were not enough spaces to enable a word wrap The keyboard can be unlocked and the indicator removed by pressing the Reset key 11 7 IBM 3270 Emulation Typing Direction gt or
184. ate that is no higher than the rate supported by the printer Log Top remains activated until either this button or F4 is pressed again Log Bottom is activated a reset is performed or the emulation is exited Note This function does not take effect when Memory Lock is activated Margins Tabs amp Start Column sells llfery exe allen ee This set of function buttons is displayed by pressing the F9 key which is equivalent to the HP 700 92 96 User System key then F2 These functions enable you to redefine the start column set tabs and specify the left and right margins Start Column F1 This function is used to temporarily redefine the start column for transmitted data when no logical start of text pointer is present and the Return or Enter keys are pressed in Modify Line or Modify All mode Note The default start column is specified in the HP Settings dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details Usually a start of text pointer is automatically generated to designate the leftmost character in the current line if it is the last line of data in display memory The pointer will remain in display memory until the line is deleted If the line has no start of text pointer data transmission will begin at the start column specified by this option The column range that can be specified is from 1 to 80 inclusive 10 11 HP 700 92 96 Emulation To change the current start column move the cursor to the new starting
185. authenticate the other two types The client will need to store these locally Storage of Certificates TeemTalk stores its certificates in the Registry as binary values The following keys are used HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Neoware Security SSL CA Certificates HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Neoware Security SSL Client Certificates CA root Certificates are stored unencrypted The value name in the registry is in the form HHHHHHHH UU where HHHHHHHH is the hash of the certificate s internal name and UU is a unique number The UU section is to allow different certificates which happen to have the same hash value co exist This follows the convention used by openSSL file based system TeemTalk will automatically discard any duplicate certificates Client Certificates are stored encrypted The value name may be any valid string of characters Acquiring New Certificates There are two ways a client may acquire new certificates They may be added directly to the registry keys detailed above or they may be installed on the file system and imported manually by TeemTalk Adding to the Registry New CA root Certificates should be added to the CA Certificates key with a value name in the form NEWXXXXXXXX where XXXXXXXxX is a unique number Whenever it uses its certificate s TeemTalk first scans the registry for any value name NEW If it finds one it checks that it is not a duplicate and then renames it with the correct hash unique name New Cl
186. ay a menu Mouse Click on the title of the menu required Keyboard Hold down the Alt key and press the key bearing the underlined character in the menu title For example pressing Alt F will display the File menu 6 1 Setup Menus To close a menu Mouse Click anywhere outside the menu Keyboard Press the Alt key Using The Menus The menu options follow several conventions Options that are displayed dimmed are not applicable to the current mode of operation and cannot be selected An example of this is the IBM 5250 option in the Settings menu This can only be selected when the IBM 5250 emulation is running Options that include an underlined character may be actioned by pressing the key bearing that character For example pressing the X key while the File menu is displayed will cause the emulator to shut down Options that are not followed by an ellipsis perform a particular function when selected For example selecting Reset Terminal in the File menu will perform a terminal reset Options that are followed by an ellipsis indicate that a dialog box will be displayed with all the selections applicable to that option For example selecting Emulation in the Settings menu will display a dialog box in which you can specify various emulation settings To select a menu option Mouse Click the menu option Keyboard Method 1 If the option includes an underlined character press the key be
187. ay specific page ESC w page Divide memory into pages ESC w length Economy 80 column mode on ESCeG Economy 80 column mode off ESCeF Horizontal split higher ESCxR Horizontal split lower ESC x P Program label line ESCf Protect mode on ESC amp Protect mode off ESC Redefine screen as one window ESC x Redefine screen as one window amp clear pages ESC x 0 C 85 Host Command Summary Restore normal display Reverse display Roll window up in page Roll window down in page Split screen Split screen two pages only Split screen amp clear pages Split screen amp clear pages 2 pages only Status line format a extended b standard Status line message Status line not displayed ESC 0 ESC 1 ESCwE ESC w F ESC x C line ESC x A line ESC x 3 line ESC x 1 line ESC ESC F message CR ESC c Turn display off ESC 8 Turn display on ESC 9 EDITING Begin send at top of page ESC d Begin send at top of screen ESC d amp Delete cursor character ESC W Delete cursor column ESC cj Delete cursor line ESCR Insert column of nulls ESC cM Insert line of spaces ESCE Insert mode on replace mode off ESC q Insert mode off replace mode on ESCr Insert space character ESCQ Page edit mode on Wyse 60 mode ESC e Page edit mode off Wyse 60 mode ESCe Write protect mode off ESC Write protect mode on ESC GENERAL OPERATION Answerback mode off ESC e SP Answerback mode on ESCe Graphics mode on ESCHCTRLB G
188. ays in which you can specify a particular character For example the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries _027 Decimal value underscore character followed by a 3 digit number 033 Octal value backslash character followed by a 3 digit number u001B Unicode value backslash and u characters then unicode value AT Control key value represents the control key on the keyboard e Additional value for ESC The following backslash values can be used u Unicode introducer r Carriage return n Line feed e Escape Note that as the and characters are used as value introducers to enter these as character values you need to precede them with a backslash character i e enter Vas and as The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value u20ac 6 99 Setup Menus Soft Buttons Soft Buttons ma Button Definitions vr F K r Current Definitions Level u oO 2 Button 1 O3 O4 Local Add gt Name Command lt Remove Predefined Macros Apply vk_CONTROL v visible Levels fi ve bey Le Name Command Remove All This dialog box is displayed by selecting Soft Buttons in the Settings menu TeemTalk for Windows CE A set of soft buttons can be displayed in the command bar either by clicking one of the two arrow buttons or by pressing the keys Ctrl Alt Left Cursor or Ctrl Alt Right
189. being the code RS Hex 1E Key Shift Ctrl Ctrl Shift Key Key Key F1 113 97 49 33 F2 114 98 50 34 F3 115 99 51 35 F4 116 100 52 36 F5 117 101 53 37 F6 118 102 54 38 F7 119 103 55 39 F8 120 104 56 40 F9 121 105 57 41 F10 122 106 58 42 F11 123 107 59 43 F12 124 108 60 44 F13 125 109 61 45 F14 126 110 62 46 F15 112 96 48 32 C1 92 88 C2 93 89 C3 94 90 C4 95 91 UP 23 DOWN 26 LEFT 25 RIGHT 24 HOME 8 PRINT 17 1 DG 410 412 Emulation Notes 9 6 HP 700 92 96 Emulation 10 HP 700 92 96 Emulation This chapter describes features of the Hewlett Packard 700 92 96 terminal emulation Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the HP 700 92 96 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box This emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hewlett Packard 700 92 239
190. bles you to specify printer settings The Microsoft Windows Print Manager normally controls all print formatting translates host characters to supported printer characters and also provides a spooling facility A disadvantage of using the Print Manager is that any print formatting escape sequences received from the host are stripped If you want to use the Print Manager but disable its print formatting process so that the original escape sequences from the host are retained select the PassThru option Note that the PassThru option will be unselectable if the printer driver currently selected does not support this facility If you find a through print results in data being split into lines each treated as a separate print job specify a time in the Seconds Close Delay box e g 5 seconds This will enable the next line of data to be sent before the print job is assumed to have finished and therefore prevents the print job from being closed prematurely When set to 0 TeemTalk will not start printing until it receives a print end of job command from the host Entering any other number will cause TeemTalk to print after the specified number of seconds have elapsed regardless of whether the print end of job command has been received from the host If you require the port to be kept open all the time to stop the printer resetting enter 1 minus one 2 32 Getting Started Direct Print Data To A Specific Port To direct pri
191. bsolute Display page number Move forward by number of pages Move backward by number of pages Scroll up lines forward Scroll down lines backward Active page display mode reset Active page display mode set Screen scroll keys action mode reset Screen scroll keys action mode set PRINTING ESC 141 ESC 14h ESC SPP ESC SPQ ESC SPR ESC lt 111 ESC lt 11h ESC y ESC z ESC p5p ESC p ESC U ESC V ESC S ESC T ESC lt 71 ESC lt 7h ESC lt 131 ESC lt 13h Printer output control ESC lt o s ei C 45 Host Command Summary where o output type as listed below default 0 0 print page print partial page 2 hardcopy off 3 hardcopy on 4 direct print off 5 direct print on s starting line number default start of scrolled region e ending line number default end of scrolled region Media copy ESC oi where o 0 print page 4 direct print off 5 direct print on REPORTS Report on device configuration 0 by default ESC lt c Give terminal configuration report 0 Give screen configuration report 1 Give printer configuration report 2 Give keyboard configuration report 3 Device attributes device type 0 ESC c Terminal configuration report ESC lt 10 m f h vc where m model number 9 for 12090 f features 1 down loadable charcter set 2 programmable function keys 4 software down load capability 16
192. butes 6 92 Display Elements Button tools CE 2 42 Button tools XPe 2 45 Command bar CE 2 41 Hotspots 2 47 4 3 Menu bar XPe 2 44 Soft Buttons CE 2 43 Soft Buttons XPe 2 45 Status bar 2 46 Status line DEC VT emulations 7 4 IBM 3151 emulation 13 3 IBM 3270 emulation 11 5 IBM 5250 emulation 12 5 Wyseemulations 19 4 E Edit Menu 6 23 Edit Mode Indicator 2 46 7 4 Editing Text 6 23 Emulation Settings 6 26 Emulation Support Level D 1 Enhanced AT Keyboard Mapping BQ 3107 functions 8 5 DEC VT500 functions DEC mode 7 7 Normal mode 7 6 DG 410 412 functions 9 4 HP 700 92 96 functions 10 4 IBM 3151 functions 13 5 IBM 3270 functions 11 11 IBM 5250 functions 12 7 MDIS Prism functions 14 4 PT250 functions 15 6 Siemens 97801 functions 16 4 TA6530 functions 17 6 Unisys T27 functions 18 5 Wyse functions 19 6 Entering Codes In Setup Entries 6 4 Error Messages TA6530 emulation 17 3 EuroCharacter 6 5 F Factory Default Setup 6 4 File Menu 6 9 Flow Control 2 27 6 72 Font Selection 6 52 6 58 6 77 Index 3 Index G GUI Overrides Connection Wizard 2 36 H Hebrew Language Typing direction DEC suite 6 77 6 78 7 8 Host Command Summary AlIXTermemulation C 25 ANSI VT100 emulation C 2 AT amp T 4410 emulation C 30 BQ 3107 emulation C 31 DG 410 412 emulation C 32 HP 700 92 96 emulation C 35 IBM 3151 emulation C 39 MDIS Prism 12 emulation C 47 MDIS Prism 8 emulation C 42 MDIS Prism 9 em
193. can be changed by tapping on the required colour block in the palette of Foreground and or Background colours The two palettes enable you to specify a different colour for text foreground and text cell background 6 92 Setup Menus Screen Element This list box enables you to select the screen element for definition The Ansi Palette option allows you to specify which set of eight Foreground and Background colour indices are used when ANSI colour escape sequences are received Either the upper or lower eight colours in the Foreground and Background palettes can be selected The current eight colours are enclosed within a box To change the current set of eight just tap on any colour in the set required The list box also enables you to select various display options depending on the current terminal emulation mode Normal UL BD FL BD UL Screen FL BD IV UL BD Bold BD FL UL IV FL BD Underline UL IV FL IV FL UL Flashing FL IV BD IV FL BD UL Inverse IV IV UL When running the IBM 5250 emulation the list of character attributes is extended to include the column separator CS attribute When running the IBM 3270 emulation the list box will allow selection of the following items Unprotected Normal Unprotected Bold Protected Normal Protected Bold Status BG Attribute The list of attribute options allow you to enable or disable the actual display of attributes associated with the selected screen element N
194. ced Printer Configuration r Sequences To Send At Initialisation At Termination Add Banner Debug Information Cancel 6 20 Setup Menus Print Screen This enables you to produce a hardcopy of data displayed on the screen The Print Screen dialog box will be displayed when a printer handled by the Print Manager is selected in the Printer Setup dialog box Print Screen oki x Method Text O Graphics r 1 Auto wrap Doce Scaling Yo E gt The Text option is selected by default and the printer resolution and scaling options are not accessible Clicking the OK button with Text selected will cause a fast print of the screen using Unicode Selecting Graphics will print all the data in the emulation workspace both graphics and text when the OK button is clicked The hardcopy output will be an almost exact representation of the emulation workspace Note that a graphics print will take a lot longer than a text print The Use Printer Resolution option is available when Graphics print is selected This will force a dot for dot print of the screen on the printer and generally produces a small print depending on the printer resolution When this option is not selected unchecked the emulator will try and print as large an image as possible on the printer s paper Both methods can print in landscape or portrait format depending on the current setup of the printer Selecting t
195. character set to be used The IDs of the code page and character set used for the currently selected language are displayed under the User Specified button Clicking User Specified will display a dialog box that enables you to change these settings 6 58 Setup Menus There are separate entries for the Single Byte Character Set SBCS and if supported Double Byte Character Set DBCS These should only be changed by the System Administrator If they have been changed and you wish to restore the default settings click the Default button in the IBM 5250 Settings dialog box The following table shows the default settings User Specified Character Settings Ti E SBCS CodePage 285 CharSet jeg DBCS Allow CodePage 5 J If double byte character sets e g Japanese are supported and you wish to use them then set the IBM 5250 Model to either 5555_B01 monochrome or 5555_C01 colour for display or 5553 B01 for printing 6 59 Setup Menus Default Language Character Set amp Codepage Settings SBCS DBCS Language KBDTYPE CHARSET CODEPAGE CODEPAGE USB 697 37 English US English UK UKB 697 285 Belgian BLI 697 500 Canadian French CAI 697 500 Danish DMB 697 277 Finnish FNB 697 278 German AGB 697 273 Dutch NEB 697 37 Italian ITB 697 280 Swiss French SFI 697 500 Swiss Germa
196. character string that is to be displayed executed and or transmitted to the host when the key or button is pressed The string may contain alphanumeric characters control characters and explicit escape sequence characters entered when Display Functions mode is enabled by pressing F7 or the Display Functns button The default f key string begins with the characters EC which represent the escape code that is used to begin each escape sequence The EC characters are displayed in the key definition line by pressing the Esc key or the keys Ctrl together when Display Functions mode is enabled Note that you must enter the entire escape sequence before disabling Display Functions mode by pressing F7 again When Display Functions is enabled the Return key may be used to insert carriage return codes CR in the string If Auto LF mode is selected in the Mode Selection function menu Return will generate a line feed LF code as well as carriage return To change an f key button string definition use the Tab or Shift Tab keys to move the cursor onto the second line the line following LABEL definition for that key button and type in the new definition which can consist of a maximum of 80 characters When you have finished defining f key button strings press the F9 key to exit the menu To enable the new definitions and display the relevant functions on the buttons press the F10 key Note The host may reset the f key definitions to their
197. column C ESC line column ESC w page line column ESC win pg line column ESC _ ESC ESC d ESC d ESC 0 ESC 2 or ESC 3 LF BS C 84 Host Command Summary Cursor right FF Cursor up no scroll VT Cursor to start of current line CR Cursor to start of next line US Home cursor ESC or RS Line lock mode on ESC H Line lock mode off ESC I Move cursor up scroll ESCj Read 80 column window page amp cursor address ESC Read 80 column page number amp cursor address ESC w Read cursor address in current 80 column page ESC Read cursor address in current 80 132 column page ESCb Redefine screen as one window amp clear pages ESC x0 Set cursor display features ESC cursor Set tab stop ESC 1 Tabulate cursor ESCi Tab cursor HT Tab cursor backward ESCI Tabs are not initialized ESCe Tabs are initialized ESCe DISPLAY 80 column display ESC 132 column display ESC 80 132 change clears screen on ESC e 80 132 change clears screen off ESCe Activate lower window ESC Activate other window display previous page ESCJ Activate other window display next page ESCK Activate upper window ESC Autopage mode off ESC d Autopage on ESC d Autoscrolling mode on ESC 0 Autoscrolling mode off ESCN Display 24 data lines ESC e Display 25 data lines ESCe Display 42 data lines ESC e Display 43 data lines ESC e Display graphics character ESC H key Display next page ESC wC Display previous page ESC wB Displ
198. connection template associated with the chosen description to be actioned You can specify a particular connection template to use by default by clicking the required description checking the Save As Default check box then clicking the OK button To delete a connection template select the description then click the Delete button TeemTalk for Windows XPe This option is only available if TeemTalk for Windows XPe was started without a session i e not started by clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu It enables you to select a session configuration for TeemTalk to load The following dialog box will be displayed 6 12 Setup Menus Open Session Defined Sessions D Session T D Untitled T Save As Default Delete The Defined Sessions list box displays one line descriptions of session configurations that were created using the TeemTalk Connection Wizard or the Save Session As dialog box when running TeemTalk The session configuration currently loaded is highlighted Clicking on a defined session then the OK button will cause TeemTalk to load that session configuration The session configuration that TeemTalk will load by default on startup is indicated by a letter D next to its name You can change the default selection by selecting the required session description then clicking the Save As Default button Session templates created by the system administrator are indicated
199. ct Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the PT250 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection select Modem specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note Youcan save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details The PT250 emulation is configured using the PT250 Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter 15 2 PT250 Emulation The Status Line The last line in the
200. ction key menu will be cleared to allow you to enter the next key definition If you do not wish to save the definition press Ctrl Shift Esc instead of Enter Note that the function keys can store a maximum of 128 characters between them When this number is reached or exceeded field A will start blinking and any characters following the 128th character will be discarded Repeat steps 2 to 4 until you have finished defining function keys To exit from the function key menu press Ctrl Shift Esc 13 6 MDIS Prism Emulations 14 MDIS Prism Emulations This chapter describes the MDIS Prism terminal emulations Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box 2 Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed 3 Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box 4 Select the MDI P12 P8 or MDI Prism 9 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box 5 Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the
201. ction on Host Close d Shutdown Disable Status Bar O Stay Alive Reconnect m Disable Scroll Bar _ Disable Clipboard Accelerators No connection warning on close Eg Enable PC Style Windowing Mouse Cursor Style keem tsi Clicking the Disable Elements button will display another dialog box enabling you to disable any of the command bar elements Personalise CommandBar Appearance m x 1 Disable All _ Disable Soft Buttons Disable all Menus _ Disable Tool Buttons Disable File Menu _ Disable Close Button Disable Edit Menu 1 Disable Settings Menu The Disable Status Bar and Disable Scroll Bar options allow you to disable the status bar and scroll bar respectively The Disable Clipboard Accelerators option will disable the Ctrl C copy and Ctrl V paste keyboard commands The Action on Host Close options enable you to specify how the emulator responds when the host closes the connection Selecting Display Options will cause a dialog box to be displayed with the following three options Selecting Shutdown will cause the emulator to shutdown Selecting Stay Alive will keep the emulator running 2 36 Getting Started Selecting Reconnect will cause the emulator to attempt to reconnect to the host By default a warning message will be displayed if you attempt to exit the emulator while a host connection is still active You can disable this message by selecting the No connec
202. ctory default Return This option enables you to specify whether the Enter key performs the same function as the Return key or the Send key Return Key Factory default Field This option specifies whether or not the cursor can enter a line within a protected field when the Return key is pressed When set to Field the result of pressing the Return key is determined by the setting of the Auto New Line option and the cursor will move to the next unprotected line When set to New Line the result of pressing the Return key is determined by the setting of the Auto New Line option Send Operation Factory default Page The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing the Send and Send Line keys When set to Page the contents of the current page will be sent to the host when Send is pressed or the current line if Send Line is pressed When set to Line the contents of the current line will be sent to the host when Send is pressed or the current page if Send Line is pressed Auto Wrap Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines what happens to the cursor and data sent to the display when the end of the current line is reached When selected the cursor will automatically move to the beginning of the next line Note that this will always be the case in block mode or in a formatted page regardless of the setting of this option When unselected the cursor will remain at the end of the current line an
203. currently busy Hotspots A hotspot facility is provided which enables you to invoke a function by clicking on a keyword displayed on the screen For example an application may display information relating to keys you can press to perform a particular function Instead of pressing the key on the keyboard you could invoke the function by holding down the Control key and clicking the mouse pointer on the key name on the display assuming default mouse configuration Hotspots are supported in ALL terminal emulation modes A set of default keywords is provided for each mode These keywords relate to key functions specific to the emulation For example in VT500 mode you can tap on the word Help displayed on the screen and the emulator will execute the function associated with the Help key You can identify hotspots that are currently present in display memory by assigning the Show Hotspots function to a key mouse button combination using the Mouse Button Actions dialog box refer to the Mouse Functions chapter for details Holding down the relevant key and left mouse button will cause all colour attributes to be temporarily removed from the display and the hotspots will be highlighted with a red background Releasing the key and left mouse button will return the display to its original state 2 47 Getting Started AT amp T 4410 Emulation When running the AT amp T 4410 emulation the display size is 80 or 132 columns by 25 li
204. d ESC mf attr Clear unprotected page to display attribute ESC attr Assign line attribute ESC G attr PROTECTING DATA Write protect mode off ESC Write protect mode on ESC Clear cursor column to write protected spaces ESC V Protect mode off ESC Protect mode on ESC amp GRAPHICS CHARACTERS Line drawing graphics mode on ESC Line drawing graphics mode off ESC C 90 Host Command Summary CURSOR CONTROL Cursor left backspace Cursor right Cursor up no scroll Cursor up scroll Cursor down no scroll Cursor down scroll Cursor to start of line Cursor to start of next line Move cursor to home position on current page Move cursor to specific line End of line wrap mode off End of line wrap mode on Received CR mode CR Received CR mode CRLF Autopage mode off Autopage mode on Address cursor in 80 column current page Address cursor in specific 80 column page Address cursor in specific 80 column window CTRLH CTRLL CTRLK ESCj CTRL V CTRLJ CTRLM CTRL _ ESC or CTRL A ESC line ESC 0 ESC ESC 9 ESC 8 ESC w ESC v ESC line col ESC page line col ESC wind page line col Read cursor address in 80 column current page ESC Read 80 column window page number amp cursor address ESC EDITING Clear all tab stops ESC 3 Set tab stop ESC 1 Clear tab stop ESC 2 Tabulate cursor ESCi or CTRLI Backtab ESCI Insert mode on replace mode off ESC Z Inse
205. d as a new line character causing the cursor to move to the start of the next line scrolling the display if necessary Once the appropriate details have been entered to establish an IBM host session which may be automatic the screen is cleared and switched into full IBM 3270 terminal emulation mode as indicated by the J symbol in the status line IBM 3287 1 Printer Support TN3287 printing is supported by setting the IBM 3270 Model option in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box to 3287 1 When a new Telnet connection is made the display will change to show a message box which will indicate the current printer status When printing commences a Print Abort box will be displayed enabling you to cancel the print job Note that this will stop print data being sent but will not disconnect you from the host SysReq Key Support When the SysReq option in the Telnet Options dialog box is selected the key mapped with the SysReq function enables you to toggle the display and keyboard entries between the host operating system and the application This enables you to switch to the operating system and issue a LOGOFF command When communicating with the operating system the status line will display the E symbol Note Not all TN3270E servers provide full support of the SysReq key IBM 3270 Emulation The Status Line The last line in the window is used to display status information in the form of symbols and alphanumeric charac
206. d each new character sent to the display will overwrite the character already occupying the cursor position 6 41 Setup Menus Auto LF Factory default Unselected The setting of this option in conjunction with that of the Auto New Line option determines the destination of the cursor when the Return key is pressed or the CR characterisreceived When both this and the Auto New Line options are unselected the cursor will move to the first position of the current line when the Return key is pressed or the CR characterisreceived When this is unselected and Auto New Line is selected the cursor will move to the first position of the next line when the Return key is pressed When this is selected and Auto New Line is unselected the cursor will move to the first position of the next line when the Return key is pressed or the CR character is received When both this and the Auto New Line options are selected the cursor will move to the first position of the line after the next line when the Return key is pressed Auto New Line Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing the Return key When unselected the Return key will generate a CR carriage return character When selected the Return key will generate a CR and an LE line feed character Terminal ID Factory default Unspecified This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification reque
207. d enter the LPD Hostname Clicking the Configure button will display a dialog box which enables you to specify various print settings Network Printer LPR Options LPD Device sd Printer Name Cancel Job Name Advanced User Name Number of Copies fi Retries Retry Delay fo Secs You must specify the Printer Name The Job Name and User Name entries are optional the User Name will default to root if none is specified You can specify how many times the LPR protocol will attempt to execute the print job before cancelling by setting the number of Retries and the number of seconds delay between each attempt Clicking the Advanced button will display a dialog box that enables you to send printer specific commands to specify for example font size colour or page header and footer When Add Banner is selected information about this print job will be printed with it You can display a message box which will indicate the progress of the print job by selecting Debug Information Advanced Printer Configuration Sequences To Send At Initialisation t Temini Add Banner Debug Information Cancel 2 35 Getting Started GUI Overrides The GUI Overrides dialog box enables you to disable various GUI items and also enables you to specify how the emulator responds when the host closes the connection GUI Overrides m x Command Bar Disable Elements A
208. d for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 18 1 Unisys T27 Emulation Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button The Unisys T27 emulation is configured using the Unisys T27 Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the Unisys T27 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box Display the Fi
209. d the setting of these two options The setting of these two options will have the following general effect InhHndShk only selected The DC1 DC2 DC1 handshake or no handshake will be used InhDC2 only selected The DC1 handshake or no handshake will be used InhHndShk and InhDCz2 selected No handshake will be used Enq Ack Pacing Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether the Hewlett Packard ENQ ACK handshake is used or not When selected the host can send an ASCII ENQ enquiry control code at the end of transmission asking if the data has been processed to which the emulator will reply by sending an ACK acknowledge code when it has Note that this form of handshaking has the lowest priority after hardware and XON XOFF handshaking EscXfer Factory default Unselected This option determines whether escape sequences relating to the display are sent when the display memory is transferred to the printer When unselected escape sequences relating to the display are not sent to the printer When selected each line transferred to the printer will begin with an escape sequence to select the primary character set and stop any character enhancements When escape sequences relating to the display are encountered within the data for example to change the character set they will be sent to the printer Destructive Backspace Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether o
210. dditional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection select Modem specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details 16 2 Siemens 97801 Emulation Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where Siemens 97801 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the Siemens 97801 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the SI virtual key names listed in the Define Key board Macros dialog box 16 3 Siemens 97801 Emulation Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout HIUS ID UM p sn u uA pau ase sjeyorsg esenbs u suonounj sdeS y y uo spu B y Aq papu se uonounj SXey peyseWUN y yb e6esn Ay jouyuog vs_ aBesn Aoy je
211. ded character set Each set consists of 128 characters When an ESC SO sequence is received from the host the emulation 6 67 Setup Menus displays all subsequent characters from the extended character set until an ESC SI sequence is received to switch back to the normal character set The Unisys T27 emulation transmits an ESC SO sequence when it encounters extended characters in its display buffer and an ESC SI when standard characters are to be sent There is no automatic shift in ESC SI at the end of a data transmission block SPCFY key sends hex values Factory default Unselected This determines whether the SPCFY key transmits in hexadecimal or ASCII default SPCFY key sends page number Factory default Unselected This determines whether the SPCFY key transmits the page number in addition to the column and row information it usually sends VT page advance Factory default Unselected If the emulation is configured for 32 lines per page vertical tabs are set on lines 1 9 17 and 25 when this option is selected Xmit printer status Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether the Unisys T27 emulation informs the host of the current printer status Tab Settings This enables you to set tab stops for each environment Tab stops are set every eight columns by default when the Type option is set to Fixed as indicated by the T character above the relevant column numbers Individual
212. default values if required by the application 10 15 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Character Display Attributes The HP 700 92 96 emulation incorporates various display attributes which can be enabled by host commands or from the keyboard by the user These attributes are listed in the table below When an attribute or set of attributes are enabled they affect all subsequently displayed characters until an end attribute command or another attribute command is received or the end of the line is reached Attributes remain at the display location where they were enabled and will not move when characters are inserted or deleted You can configure the f keys and buttons so that they will enable these attributes when pressed To do this display the User Key Definition menu by pressing the keys Shift F10 together Use the Tab or Shift Tab keys to position the cursor in the first field next to the number of the f key to be defined and press F2 until the letter L for Local is displayed Press Tab and type in the text that will appear in the display label for the key for example Under in the first field and Line in the second for Under Line Press Tab to move down to the next line Press F7 to enable Display Functions mode then press Ctrl together or the Esc key followed by the charac ters amp d and the attribute character which for underline is D The key definition should look like this if the F1 key was defined to enable the u
213. derline Hidden Block Static Block Status Line Factory default Unavailable This option determines whether or not the 25th screen line is used as a status line when the emulator is in any DEC VT terminal emulation mode When Unavailable or Host Writable is selected the host can write application specific messages to the 25th line Selecting None will prevent this Ignore Numlock Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether or not the Num Lock key toggles Num Lock mode on and off when pressed When selected the Num Lock key will perform the function defined by the terminal emulation 6 76 Setup Menus Keyboard Type Factory default 101 102 Windows XPe only This TeemTalk for Windows XPe option enables driver less support for a 122 or 108 key keyboard instead of the standard 101 102 key keyboard Preferred Font This enables you to specify the font to be used for displaying characters The available settings depend on the fonts installed Preferred Char Set Factory default DEC MCS This enables you to specify the character set to be used for displaying characters The DEC MCS ISO Latin 1 and ISO Latin 2 settings enable you to specify the 8 bit character set that is used within VT320 mode when the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational The DEC MCS and both ISO Latin character sets consist of two tables of characters The first table ASC
214. dialog box is set to Multinational and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to ISO Latin 1 B 6 Character Sets ISO LATIN 2 ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET Multinational 8 Bit lt O x lt Co Co lt cC c C c c c e lt Dial lt 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 DECIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This is one of three possible second halves of the Multinational character set the first half is the ASCII character set and the other possible second halves are the DEC Additional and ISO Latin 1 character sets These characters may be generated when the terminal is in VT500 7 or 8 bit mode the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to ISO Latin 2 B 7 Character Sets ANSI 437 CHARACTER SET R O w 0 D 4 a 4 r l d R CHESS a Hi CO OO N O Q OQ N lE N KIMIS C O lt amp i w _ Jia H D Mel 8 So b Go iN a C Q M aly aie os o L FSH eS 245 OCTAL DECIMAL A5 HEXADECIMAL a a a KEY This t
215. e lt extended mode Reset mode VIP mode lt 94 character mode Reset both partitions Select current partition 0 partition 0 1 partition 1 Warning bell ESC lt 0h ESC lt 01 ESCc ESC v BEL C 31 Host Command Summary DG 410 412 Emulation DG Mode In the following command sequences lt n gt represents a 1 byte argument lt nn gt represents a 2 byte argument and lt nnn gt represents a 3 byte argument Bytes are entered as ASCII characters Only the four least significant bits are used in each byte Commands that are D100 200 compatible are indicated by an CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Change attributes lt count gt lt on gt lt off gt Blink enable RS FN lt nnn gt lt n gt lt n gt ETX Blink disable EOT Blink on SO Blink off SI Dim on FS Dim off GS Protect enable RSF V Protect disable RS FW Protect on RS FL Protect off RSFM Reverse video on RSD or SYN Reverse video off RSE or STX Underscore on DC4 Underscore off NAK CURSOR Carriage return CR Cursor left EM Cursor right CAN Cursor down SUB Cursor up ETB New line LF Read screen address RS Fb Write screen address lt column gt lt row gt RS F P lt nn gt lt nn gt Read window address ENQ Write window address DLE column row Screen home RSFG Window home BS Set cursor type RS F Q lt nn gt DISPLAY Roll enable DC2 Roll disable DC3
216. e The procedure is as follows 1 Inthe Saved Items box indicate which settings are to be saved by checking the boxes next to the relevant options 2 Inthe Save As File Name text box enter a descriptive name to enable it to be identified for future selection This description will be listed in the Open Session dialog box 3 Click the OK button to save the template settings If you specified a descriptive name that already exists a message box will ask you to confirm whether or not you want to overwrite the existing name with the new settings TeemTalk for Windows XPe This option is only available if TeemTalk for Windows XPe was started without a session i e not started by clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu It will display a dialog box that enables you to save the current session configuration under a new name The procedure is as follows 1 Inthe Saved Items box indicate which settings are to be saved by checking the boxes next to the relevant options 2 Inthe Save As File Name text box enter a descriptive name up to 132 characters long to enable it to be identified for future selection This description will be listed in the Open Session dialog box Setup Menus Save Session As Save As File Name Saved Items Jv Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons v Attributes v Window Metrics v Text Rows Buffer Rows Jv Connection Z Terminal Settings Administrative Options
217. e again Note You can cancel the newly recorded keystrokes by pressing the Quit key This cancellation does not affect the previously recorded keystrokes 11 12 IBM 3270 Emulation 4 To finish and save the recording press the Record key Playback Keystrokes You can play back the contents of an Fn key as normal or one keystroke at a time The following procedure describes normal play back For one keystroke play back select Single Step Macros in the Notice Board Setup dialog box 1 2 Position the text cursor where the playback is to start Press the Play key to enter Play mode The status line will display PLAY and a series of boxes representing the Fn keys A solid box indicates that the Fn key in that position is currently storing recorded keystrokes Press the Fn key storing the recorded data to play back Playback will begin immediately as indicated by a P on the status line All the recorded keystrokes will be played back automatically When playback is com pleted the P will disappear If the recorded keystrokes included Pause then playback will halt at that point to allow you to enter keystrokes manually Press Play to resume playback from where you stopped typing If you want to cancel during the playback operation press the Quit key Editing Macros 1 2 Press Alt F3 Press the Fn key containing the macro to be edited The status line will display information about the Fn key macro as f
218. e of 1 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number Mark parity will set every eighth bit to 1 and Space parity every bit to 0 Flow Control Factory default Input This option specifies the type of flow control used by the line port to communicate readiness to transmit or receive data from the host None No flow control Input XON XOFF on received data Output XON XOFF on transmitted data 6 72 Setup Menus In Out XON XOFF on transmitted amp received data Hardware DTR CTS hardware flow control Data Bits Factory default 8 This option specifies the number of data bits sent for each transmitted character Stop Bits Factory default 1 This specifies the number of stop bits sent for each transmitted character Transmit Rate Factory default Unlimited The setting of this option determines the maximum effective baud rate that the emulator transmits terminal reports and data sent as a result of pasting data to the host On Line Factory default Selected When this option is selected normal two way communication between the emulator and the host is enabled When unselected the emulator is in Local mode and data will not be sent to or received from the host Data typed on the keyboard will be displayed on the screen or actioned if a control command is typed Local Echo Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether keyboa
219. ea ESCHwh CURSOR Cursor home ESC H or RS Line feed LF Reverse line feed ESC j New line line feed carriage return US Carriage return CR Move cursor up lines ESC A Move cursor up one line VT Move cursor down one line SYN Move cursor down lines ESC B Move cursor right columns ESC C Move cursor right one column FF Move cursor left columns ESC D Move cursor left one column BS Move cursor to line 1 and column c ESC l cH Move cursor to line 1 and column c ESC 1 c f Send cursor to line amp columns 1 80 c ESC c Send cursor to line amp columns 81 132 c ESC c Send cursor to page p line 1 amp columns 1 80 c ESC p c Send cursor to page p line 1 amp columns 81 132 c Read cursor s line amp column position ESC p c ESC C 70 Host Command Summary Read cursor s page line amp column position ESC Read cursor s line amp column position in decimal units ESC 6n Read cursor s page line amp column position in decimal units ESC 6n DISPLAY Turn screen on ESCn Turn screen off ESC o Light background with dark characters ESC b Dark background with light characters ESC d Define visual attribute s ESC G 0 Normal default video 8 Underline 1 Invisible normal video 9 Invisible underline 2 Flash Underline amp flash 3 Invisible flash Invisible underline amp flash 4 Reverse current background
220. ear EOL UT_CLEAREOL Lock Shift UT_LOCKSHIFT Clear EOP UT_CLEAREOP Mark UT_MARK Config UT_CONFIG Next UT_NEXT Ctrl UT_CTRL Print Unprotected UT_PRINTUNP Ctrl Lock UT_CTRLLOCK Print All UT_PRINTALL Cursor Down UT_DOWN RCV UT_RCV Cursor Left UT_LEFT Recall UT_RECALL Cursor Right UT_RIGHT Return UT_RETURN Cursor Up UT_UP Reverse Tab UT_REVERSETAB Delete Character UT_DELETECHAR Search Character UT_SEARCHCHAR Delete Line UT_DELETELINE Scroll Down UT_SCROLLDOWN ENV1 ENV3 UT_ENV 1 UT_ENV3 Scroll Left UT_SCROLLLEFT Escape UT_ESCAPE Scroll Right UT_SCROLLRIGHT ETX UT_ETX Scroll Up UT_SCROLLUP F1 F10 UT_F1 UT_F10 Specify UT_SPCFY Full UT_FULL Split UT_SPLIT GS UT_GS Store UT_STORE Help UT_HELP Tab UT_TAB Home UT_HOME Underscore UT_UNDERSCORE Insert Character UT_INSERTCHAR XMIT UT_XMIT A 8 Virtual Key Names Viewdata Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Star PR_STAR Cursor Right PR_RIGHT Hash PR_HASH Cursor Up PR_UP Cancel Print PR_CANCEL Exit to ANSI mode PR_EXIT Cursor Down PR_DOWN Reveal PR_REVEAL Cursor Left PR_LEFT Wyse Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Backspace WY_BACKSPACE Delete WY_DELCHAR Cursor Down WY_DOWN Delete shifted WY_DELLINE Cursor Left WY_LEFT End WY_CLRLINE Cursor Right WY_RIGHT End shifted WY_CLRSCRN Cursor Up WY_UP Insert WY_INSCHAR Delete WY_DELETE Insert shifted WY_INSLINE Del Key WY_DELKE
221. ected Areas Factory default Selected When the Send Only Selected Characters option is selected the setting of this option determines whether all selected areas on a page are sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed or only the area containing the cursor When selected this option will enable all selected areas to be sent to the host When unselected only the selected area containing the cursor will be sent to the host Line Transmission On Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether data is sent to the host a single line at a time or a full or partial page at a time when the Enter key is pressed When selected a single line of valid characters will be sent to the host In this mode the Return key has the same function as Enter When unselected a full or partial page will be sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed The size of the page is determined by the setting of the Send Partial Page and Transmit Protocol options Send Font Information Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether character set selection sequences for all character sets represented in the data block are transmitted to the host or whether spaces are substituted for characters not contained in the current character set When selected the character set selection sequences for all character sets represented in the data block will be sent When unselected characters which are not contained in the
222. ection box is displayed Introduction Notes 1 4 Getting Started Getting Started This chapter describes how to configure a session and describes various display features WBT Session Configuration Using The Connection Wizard This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the following sections 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box 2 Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Connection Information dialog box will be displayed TE Client Connection Wizard Connection Information Connection Name IIBM1 Emulation IBM3270 IBM 3270 Model 3278 2 E M International Settings C Left Ctrl acts as Reset Key L Right Ctrl acts as Enter Key Operating Language English X cancel 3 Specify the language to be used in all menus and dialog boxes by making a selection in the Operating Language list at the bottom of the dialog box Getting Started 4 Enteraname which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the terminal emulation required in the Emulation list box If additional configuration options are displayed make the relevant selections Refer to the Terminal Emulation Configuration section later in this chapter for details C
223. ection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 5 When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details All the Wyse associated emulations are configured via the Wyse Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter Note that some settings may not apply to the particular emulation currently running Selecting a setting that is not applicable to the current emulation will cause the emulator to use the default setting for that emulation when the dialog box is exited 19 3 Wyse Emulations Display Format Below the command bar described in chapter 2 the display is divided into three areas by default the status line the data area and the label line The status line which is used to display information relating to the emulation and messages from the application The following section describes the status messages that can be displayed by the emulation The data area is where data entered from the keyboard or the application is displayed The data area is set to 24 lines by 80 columns by default The label line is displayed at the bottom of the screen when the data area is set to 24 or 42 lines This is can be used to display messages or function key labels defined by the host Status Line
224. ed locally when the key or key combination is pressed This is determined by selecting Normal Remote Local or Startup in the list box when defining the key Selecting Normal will cause the macro to be processed according to the current operating mode when the key or key combination is pressed The Current Macro Definitions box displays the key and key combinations that are currently defined The Type column indicates whether the macro is processed as normal blank remote R local L or on start up S 6 97 Setup Menus You can remove the selected definition or delete all the definitions by clicking the relevant Remove button Defining A Key Or Key Combination 1 Click in the Program Key box then press the key or key combination to define The current definition will be displayed 2 Click in the With box then enter the new definition or make a selection from the list of Predefined Macros then click Apply 3 Specify how the macro is to be processed by selecting either Normal Remote Local or Startup in the list box 4 Click the Add button to accept the definition The new definition will be added to the Current Macro Definitions list 5 To save the definitions click OK to exit then select Save Session As in the File menu make sure the Keyboard Macros box is checked then click OK Key Combinations amp Sequences You can program a key to perform the function of a combination or sequence of keys For example
225. ed when the host sends graphics commands The ReGIS emulation enables you to run applications written for the DEC VT340 terminal in ReGIS mode The Tek4014 emulation enables you to run applications written for the Tektronix 4010 and 4014 terminals The VT640 emulation enables you to run applications written for the Retrographics VT640 terminal The W2119 emulation enables you to run applications written for the Westward 2119 terminal VT Terminal ID Factory default VT420 This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Either select from the list of IDs or edit the text box and enter a different termi nal identity Not all features of the specified terminal may be supported National Factory default Unselected This will only be available if the system is configured for a language that supports national replacement character sets The setting of this option determines the type of character set used to generate characters When selected a character set specific to the selected keyboard nationality is used When unselected default the emulator is in Multinational mode a character set consisting of two tables of characters is used This enables characters from any keyboard nationality to be generated Tertiary Device Attribute When the emulator is in VT420 mode Emulation set to VT500 and Terminal ID set to VT420 this option enables you to specify the tertiary device attrib
226. eemTalk Printer Setup 1 Printer DevPrint2 HP LaserJet 6P on LPT1 Cancel Setup Use Network Printer LPR LPD Hostname Through Print Action Print Direct To Port COM2 Jv PassThrough ey ie eek Configure Output Character Set F Feed Terminat E Formree erminator 7 Bit National fo seconds Close Delay 6 16 Setup Menus You can direct print data to a printer handled by the Print Manager a specific port or a network printer CE Direct Print Data To The Print Manager When running TeemTalk for Windows CE the Current System Printer Driver box displays the name of the currently selected system printer when both the Use Network Printer LPR and Print Direct To Port options are not selected Clicking the Setup button will display a Print Manager dialog box that enables you to specify printer settings If you find a through print results in data being split into lines each treated as a separate print job specify a time in the Seconds Close Delay box e g 5 seconds This will enable the next line of data to be sent before the print job is assumed to have finished and therefore prevents the print job from being closed prematurely When set to 0 printing will not start until a print end of job command is received from the host Entering any other number will cause printing to start after the specified number of seconds have elapsed regardless of whether the print end of job
227. egistry This enables you to configure each instance of the emulator differently Each set of commands other than the default set must have the following heading in the registry under HKLM Software Pericom lt product name gt Startup name where name can be any unique identifying name You can specify which set of start up commands the emulator is to use by including the following on the command line for loading the emulator where name is substituted with the actual name of the start up group required Nname If this command is not present then the emulator will use the start up commands under the Startup Default heading Connection Template To Use Registry Entry None Command Line SE description Default Setting Untitled This command enables you to override the default connection template used when the emulator is loaded as specified in the Open Session dialog box The description must exactly match the description assigned to a connection template already saved using the Save Session As dialog box and must be enclosed by double quotes Disable Bell Registry Entry Bell off Command Line BE Default Setting Enabled These commands enable you to turn off the terminal bell 20 7 Initialization Commands Enable Debug File Capture Replay Registry Entry None Command Line Debug Default Setting Disabled This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It enables
228. eground colour Select standard writing pattern Select standard writing pattern amp multiplier Set pixel change multiplier PCM Shading control Shading horizontal limit selection Shading vertical limit selection W S chading character W P binary pattern W P pattern def M multiplier W N pattern control value W EF plane selection value W F1 O W F2 C W F3 C W C W E W I hls values W I rgb character W V W R W I location W P standard pattern number WP std pattern M multiplier W M multiplier W S shading control value W S X x coordinate W S y coordinate C 57 Host Command Summary SCO Console Emulation CONTROLLING TERMINAL PROCESSING Sound audible tone BEL Select IBCSe2 compliance ESC 2L Deselect iBCSe2 compliance ESC 3L Save cursor position ESC 7 Restore cursor position ESC 8 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS Disable keyboard input ESC 2h Enable keyboard input ESC 21 Program function keys ESC Q key data 105 Key Enhanced key key ASCII ANSI PC Style Unshifted Shifted Fl F6 Fl 0 lt F2 F7 F2 1 F3 F8 F3 2 gt F4 F9 F4 3 F5 F10 F5 4 F6 F11 F6 5 A F7 F12 F7 6 B F8 F13 F8 7 C F9 F14 F9 8 D F10 Help F10 9 E F11 Do F11 F F12 F17 F12 G F13 F18 d F14 F19 a e F15 F20 f F16 c g data data string of up to 29 characters a string delimiter any character except contained in string COLOUR Set foregrou
229. eives a BEL command from the host or when the user has pressed the wrong key Field 4 Not used Field 5 Displays ERR when an error is detected Field 6 Displays BSY when the host is busy processing data The keyboard will be locked when this is displayed Field 7 This is used to display warning messages Field8 Not used Field 9 Not used Field 10 This will display P DISCT when the printer is disconnected Field 11 This will display OVERFLOW when there is a data overflow Field 12 Indicates the current line and column position of the cursor relative to the top left corner of the display which is L01 C01 Field 13 This will display the current terminal emulation mode 3107 Field 14 This will display MESS when a message is waiting to be displayed on the status line Field 15 This will display LINE when the emulation is online to the host or LOCAL when in local mode BQ 3107 Emulation Keyboard Mapping The illustration on the following page shows where BQ 3107 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the BQ 3107 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the BQ virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box BQ 3107 Emulation Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout MV ull pasn u uA p le1 u B sue sjeyoRsq asenbs u suonound p ljJlus ase Shey y u uA paul ae s yoLIq punou
230. elect and Copy Action Hotspot Cursor Select Move Cursor Rectangular Select and Copy The Select function will select all text from the start position to the finish position working left to right across the entire width of the display whereas the Select Rectan gle function will only select text contained within the rectangular area defined by the start position top left corner and the finish position bottom right corner The Select Word function will cause the word under the mouse cursor to be selected The Select and Copy function is the same as Select but will also copy the selected data to the Clipboard automatically The Rectangular Select and Copy function is the same as Select Rectangle but will also copy the selected data to the Clipboard automatically The Show Hotspots and Action Hotspots functions are described in the Hotspots section of the Getting Started chapter The Send Keyword function is very similar to 6 103 Setup Menus the hotspot feature It enables you to send delimited text displayed on the screen to the host just by clicking on it Delimiters are the same as for hotspots The Move Cursor function can be used in any of the local block modes as a quick way of positioning the text cursor within a block of text To position the text cursor move the mouse pointer to the position required hold down the modifier key s assigned with the function then click the left mouse button The Cursor Select function do
231. elimiters CHARACTER SETS ESC P t1 t2 ESC x d1 d2 Select PC character set Set national mode Set multinational mode 325 COLOUR PALETTE MODE ESC SPACE m charset ESCSPACE U ESCSPACET Select colour map values ESC SPACE fc325 bc map Select a predefined colour palette ESC SPACE pal325 Map blank attribute ESCSPACE Map reverse attribute ESC SPACE amp Select border colour ESC SPACE co1325 Disable intensity attribute ESC SPACE Enable intensity attribute ESC SPACE 370 350 COLOUR MAP MODE Select foreground colour palette ESC SPACE a pal370 Select background colour ESC SPACE c col370 Redefine character attribute association 370 350 COLOUR DIRECT MODE ESC SPACE g a fc be assoc Assign foreground colour Assign background colour Assign display attribute to unprotected characters ESC SPACE d fc370 ESC SPACE e bc370 ESC SPACE f assattr C 92 Host Command Summary Assign foreground background colours Assign fore background colours to write protected chars Assign foreground colours to write protected chars Assign background colours to write protected chars Assign display attribute to write protected characters 370 350 COLOUR MISCELLANEOUS ESC SPACE h CGAcol ESC SPACE i CGAcol ESC SPACE j fc370 ESC SPACE k fc370 ESC SPACE 1 assattr Select border colour Assign replacement character colours amp attributes ESC SPACE b c370 ESC SPACE y fc370 be attr
232. end ESC M Protected area start ESC V Protected area end ESC W Reset modified tags ESC J Selected area start ESCF Selected area end ESCG CHARACTER SET SELECTION Set GO alternate character set ESC 2 Set GO ASCII character set ESC 0 Set G1 alternate character set ESC 3 Set G1 ASCII character set ESC 1 COMPRESSED COMMANDS Compressed cursor position line c column ESC 0 1 c Compressed logical area logical attribute ESC 3 Compressed logical attributes line c column a logical attributes n number of characters Compressed visual area visual attributes Compressed visual attributes visual attributes ESC 1 c a n ESC 4 ESC 2 C 49 Host Command Summary CURSOR Autowrap disabled ESC gt 9h Autowrap enabled ESC gt 91 Carriage return carriage return only ESC gt 11 Carriage return carriage return amp line feed ESC gt 1h Cursor invisible ESC S Cursor movement keys immediate effect ESC gt 131 Cursor movement keys require host permission ESC gt 13h Cursor position report line c column ESC 1 cR Cursor tabulation control ESC W Set tab at cursor position 0 Clear tab at cursor postion 2 Clear all tab stops 3 Cursor visible ESC R Home cursor absolute ESC B Home cursor relative ESC A Index cursor down to next unlocked line ESCD Line feed line feed only ESC 20h Line feed line feed amp carriage return ESC 201 Move cursor d
233. ensity Use Bold Font gt This dialog box is displayed by selecting Attributes in the Settings menu It enables you to specify the colours used in the emulation workspace and how text with attributes is displayed To change the way a screen element is displayed select the relevant item from the Screen Element list box for example Bold BD for characters with the bold attribute The settings of the other options in the dialog box will change to reflect the settings currently assigned to the screen element and the Sample Text window will show how the screen element is actually displayed with these settings Text with attributes can be displayed in various ways For example characters with the underline attribute can be displayed as standard e g underlined only as a particular colour only e g green without the underline or with both attribute and a specific colour e g underlined and green The Attribute options allow you to enable or disable any of the attributes normally associated with the currently selected screen element Note that the Column Sep CS option is only applicable to the IBM 5250 emulation and the Hidden option is only applicable to the Wyse 60 emulation The setting of the Use Colours option in the Preferences box determines whether or not a specific colour is assigned to the text attribute When the Use Colours option is selected the colour of the screen element
234. eport current code set ESC 13 v CURSOR Cursor on ESC 7p Cursor off ESC 6p Move cursor up lines ESC A Move cursor down lines ESC B Move cursor right columns ESC C Move cursor left columns ESC D Move cursor to line and column c ESC 1 c H Report cursor position ESC 6n Short poll of cursor position ESC 5p Move cursor left one column BS Move cursor one tab to the right HT Move cursor tabs to the left ESC Z Line Feed LF Carriage Return CR Move cursor to begining of next line ESCE C 61 Host Command Summary Save cursor position ESC s Move cursor to last saved position ESC u DISPLAY AREA MOVEMENT Roll mode do not destroy data ESC I0u Scroll mode destroy data ESC llu Move display up lines ESC S Move display down lines ESC T EDITING Insert 1 80 blanks to the right starting at cursor position ESC Insert 1 24 or 25 lines starting at cursor position ESC L Delete character s including attributes at cursor position ESC P Delete line s including attributes at cursor position ESC M Erase line determines extent ESC K Erase in screen area determines extent ESC J INITIALIZING SCREEN amp ATTRIBUTES Define screen moving area at line t top to line b bottom ESC t br Set 24 line mode ESC lu Set 25 line mode ESC 0u Switch on off blinking in 24 25th line ESC p Flashing on Line 1 25 1 24 25 24 line mode
235. erate their shifted equivalents For example the A key unshifted will generate an uppercase A and the and keys will generate and respectively The key for generating and is disabled XmitFnctn A Factory default Unselected This option determines whether escape sequences generated by control and function keys are sent to the host or only to the terminal emulation When unselected escape sequences are only sent to the terminal emulation When selected escape sequences are sent to the host If the Local Echo option is selected the sequences will also be sent to the terminal emulation 6 30 Setup Menus SPOW B Factory default Unselected The setting of the SPace OverWrite option determines whether or not keyboard entered spaces overwrite existing characters When unselected keyboard entered spaces willoverwrite existing characters Selecting this option will cause the SPOW latch to be enabled The latch can then be activated by a carriage return When activated keyboard entered spaces will cause the cursor to move forward without deleting characters that already exist The latch can be deactivated by a tab line feed or home up command This will cause spaces to overwrite existing characters as normal InhEolWrp C Factory default Unselected The Inhibit End of line Wrap option determines whether characters wrap to the next line when the right margin is reached When selected i e inhibited on re
236. ercase English characters will be displayed as Hebrew and right to left typing Ctrl Alt F3 Toggle between left to right and right to left typing BQ 3107 Emulation BQ 3107 Emulation This chapter describes the Bull BQ 3107 terminal emulation Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the BQ3107 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial but
237. ersions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations This command specifies the size of the graphics cursor where size is a numeric value in the range 1 to 1024 i e world coordinates Save 4014 Graphics Display Registry Entry SaveTekImage on Command Line P Default Setting off Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations This specifies that the 4014 graphics display is saved when you switch to alpha mode so that it is restored when you switch back to graphics mode Set Tek Graphics Height Registry Entry GraphicsHeight lt integer gt Command Line GH lt integer gt Default Setting Not applicable Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations This specifies the height of the Tek graphics area in pixels Set Tek Graphics Width Registry Entry GraphicsWidth lt integer gt Command Line GW lt integer gt Default Setting Not applicable Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations This specifies the width of the Tek graphics area in pixels 20 18 Initialization Commands Disable Backing Store Registry Entry BackingStore off Command Line B Default Setting on Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations When TeemTalk is in ReGIS mode it automatically stores a copy of graphics data in memory when graphics are initially drawn by the host in the window a feature known as
238. es _027 Decimal value underscore character followed by a 3 digit number 033 Octal value backslash character followed by a 3 digit number u001B Unicode value backslash and u characters then unicode value E Control key value represents the control key on the keyboard e Additional value for ESC The following backslash values can be used u Unicode introducer r Carriage return n Line feed e Escape Note that as the and characters are used as value introducers to enter these as character values you need to precede them with a backslash character i e enter as and as The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value u20ac Keyboard Configuration Compose Character Sequences Compose character sequences can be used to generate codes for characters not shown on your keyboard The characters that can be composed depend on the setting of the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box When Character Set Mode is is set to National only characters found in the character set that corresponds to the selected keyboard nationality can be composed When Multinational is selected the emulator is in Multinational mode and charac ters from all national keyboard layouts may be composed The tables of characters that are used in Multinational mode depend on the setting of the Preferred Char Set
239. es the same as Move Cursor but when running the IBM 3270 or IBM 5250 emulation it also performs a cursor select The Middle Button setting enables you to make the left or right button and key combination of a two button mouse emulate the middle button of a three button mouse The setting of the Highlight When Actioned option determines whether or not a visual indication is given that a function has been actioned when a hotspot is clicked 6 104 Setup Menus Button Tools TeemTalk for Windows XPe only Button Tools Current Tool New Connection p Delete Current Buttons Commands New Connection Insert at Current Open Session Paste Ctrl V Add Custom Bitmap Print Buffer Print Screen Printer Setup PT 250 Replay File a v Visible oe Cm gt Save Session As gt Tuz j Delete Custom Bitmap This TeemTalk for Windows XPe dialog box is displayed by selecting Button Tools in the Settings menu It enables you to redefine the button tools displayed in the toolbar The Current Tool box displays the toolbar button and its function that is currently selected for editing or located where a new button is to be inserted to its left in the toolbar Clicking the down arrow button to the right will display all the current toolbar buttons in order in a box below This enables you to select a new button position for display in the Current Tool box Click the down arrow b
240. ese options specify the paper format to be used The possible settings are Don t Report NONE MFR No value returned No paper source is defined The system determines the paper type used based on the manufacturer type and model of the printer LET Letter sized paper 8 5 x 11 inches 2 16 Getting Started LEGL EXEC A4 A5 B5 C80 C132 A3 B4 LEDG Envelope Hopper Legal sized paper 8 5 x 14 inches Executive sized paper 7 25 x 10 5 inches A4 sized paper 210 mm x 297 mm A5 sized paper 148 mm x 210 mm B5 sized paper 182 mm x 257 mm Continuous form paper 8 0 inches wide Paper Source 1 only Continuous form paper 13 2 inches wide Paper Source 1 only A3 sized paper 297 mm x 420 mm B4 sized paper 257 mm x 364 mm Ledger sized paper 11 inches x 17 inches This specifies the envelope format to be used The possible settings are Don t Report NONE MFR B5 MON N9 N10 C5 DL ASCII 899 Support No value returned No envelope source is defined The system determines the envelope type used based on the manufacturer type and model of the printer B5 sized envelopes 176mm x 250mm Monarch sized envelopes 3 875 x 7 5 inches Number 9 sized envelopes 3 875 x 8 875 inches Number 10 sized envelopes 4 125 x 9 5 inches CS5 sized envelopes 162mm x 229mm DL sized envelopes 110mm x 220mm Specifies whether the single byte printer ha
241. et to Deferred pressing Shift Delete will cause a code to be sent to the host asking permission to enter Edit mode The host will reply by sending the Enter Edit Mode command Clear Unprotected Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines which characters can be erased by the host or user When selected only unprotected characters can be erased protected characters will be left untouched When unselected both protected and unprotected characters can be erased 6 83 Setup Menus Attributes Cleared Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines the effect of an erase command on character attributes When selected both attributes and characters will be cleared from display memory when an erase command is issued When this option is unselected all video attributes currently used will remain in display memory when an erase command is issued This will result in new characters being displayed with the video attributes associated with their positions on the display Protect From Host Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether or not the host can overwrite protected characters 6 84 Setup Menus Block Transmission Block Transmission OKE x Send Unprotected Only V Send Font Information Send Only Selected Areas V Send Record Separators V Send All Selected Areas Send Spaces Compressed Line Transmission On Send Partial Page PF K
242. etermines whether keyboard position codes or ASCII codes are sent to the host on key press release Note that this cannot be selected at the same time as the Keyboard Sends Scan Codesoption Auto Resize Factory default Unselected This applies to the DEC VT520 emulation only When this option is selected the window size will automatically be adjusted each time the buffer size is changed eitherby the host or through setup The following table indicates the window size lines per screen that is used for the specified number of lines per page Lines per Page 24 25 36 42 43 48 52 72 Lines per Screen 26 26 43 43 43 52 52 52 6 81 Setup Menus Tab Stops Tab Stops ok x 1 2 3 4 5 6 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 T T T T T e T T T 4 Clear All Set Every 8 This dialog box is displayed by clicking the Set Tabs button in the Terminal Settings or Wyse Settings dialog box Tab stops can be set for the DEC VT ANSI and SCO Console emulations using the Tab Stops dialog box displayed from the Terminal Settings dialog box and for the Wyse emulations by using the Tab Stops dialog box displayed from the Wyse Settings dialog box Tab stops are set every eight columns by default as indicated by the T character below the relevant column numbers If you want tab stops to be set at regular intervals other than every 8th column enter the number of columns required bet
243. ey Effect None Breakthrough O As TX Prefix O As Tx Suffix Send Key Effect Transmit Protocol Immediate O Deferred ansi Oy 131 End of Line Characters M End of Block Characters This dialog box is displayed by selecting Block Transmission in the Settings menu The options in this dialog box only apply to the block mode functionality supported by the DEC VT terminal emulations The block mode settings that are supported by other terminal emulations are specified in their respective dialog boxes Send Unprotected Only Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether protected characters can be sent to the host or not When unselected both protected and unprotected characters will be sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed When selected only unprotected characters will be sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed Send Only Selected Areas Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether all characters or only those in selected areas on the current page are sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed When unselected all characters on the current page will be sent when the Enter key is pressed When selected this option will enable only the characters in selected areas to be sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed The setting of the Send All Selected Areas option determines which selected areas are sent 6 85 Setup Menus Send All Sel
244. fault 4 1 Move text cursor 4 2 Selectrectangle 4 2 Selecting text for copy 4 2 Send keyword 4 3 Show hotspots 4 3 Multinational Character Set 6 77 N National Character Settings IBM 3270 emulation 6 52 IBM 5250 emulation 6 58 Network New Connection dialog box 6 10 New Connection Dialog Box 6 10 Notice Board Setup settings 6 54 O On Line Local Setting 6 73 Operating Language 2 1 6 24 P Parity Selection 2 27 6 72 Print Auto 6 22 Buffer 6 22 Cancel 6 22 Screen 6 21 Print Manager 2 32 6 17 Printer Port Settings Connection Wizard 2 31 Printer Setup 6 15 Product Specification D 1 Index 6 Index PT250 Emulation Charactersets Additional B 23 Block Graphics B 25 Line Drawing B 24 Displaying alternate characters 15 7 Host command summary C 49 Keyboard mapping 15 5 Session configuration 15 1 Setup settings 6 36 Status line 15 3 Virtual key names A 6 R ReGIS Emulation Host command summary C 55 Registry Commands Action on host connection close 20 5 Convert to MDIS P9 20 20 Crosshair cursor size 20 18 Disable backing store 20 19 Disablebell 20 7 Disable close window menu item 20 11 Disable colour palette 20 16 Disable Command bar 20 12 Disable Edit menu 20 14 Disable Edit menu items 20 14 Disable Exit box 20 6 Disable File menu 20 14 Disable File menu items 20 14 Disable maximize button 20 11 Disable minimize button 20 11 Disable mouse editing 20 20 Disable scrol
245. fault Setting no This command is only applicable to the MDIS P9 emulation It will convert the character to and vice versa on the UK keyboard Disable Editing Functions Registry Entry MouseEdit disabled allows highlighting but no copy paste Mousekdit off all editing functions disabled MouseEdit on all editing functions enabled Command Line MEO allows highlighting but no copy paste MF1 all editing functions disabled ME2 all editing functions enabled Default Setting All functions enabled In some cases it may be necessary to disable the copy and paste function of the mouse buttons to prevent accidental editing This can be achieved by using one of these commands When the editing functions are disabled use the Edit menu options or the numeric keypad keys Shift i e Del to copy and Shift 0 i e Ins to paste instead 20 20 Initialization Commands Auxiliary Port Set Aux Port As Bidirectional Registry Entry None Command Line BA1 Default Setting Disabled This causes the auxiliary port to be set as bidirectional Aux Port Opened At Start Up Registry Entry None Command Line BA2 Default Setting Disabled This causes the auxiliary port to be opened on start up Aux Port Opened amp Bidirectional Registry Entry None Command Line BA3 Default Setting Both functions disabled This causes the auxiliary port to be opened on start up and set as bidirectional 20 2
246. ff the top of the window when display memory is full Once enabled it can only be disabled if this button or F6 key is pressed again a reset is performed or the emulation is exited Placing the cursor on the first line and enabling Memory Lock will prevent data from automatically scrolling off the top of the display when display memory is full Instead the message MEMORY FULL Press RETURN to clear will be displayed You may use the cursor keys to edit data already displayed To disable the Memory Lock and continue entering new data press F6 or click the button again and position the cursor immediately below the last line The Memory Lock function may also be used to lock a specific number of lines from the top of the display leaving the remaining lines to scroll past them This is useful when you want column headings or instructions to remain on the display To lock a specific number of lines place the cursor on the last line to be locked and press F6 or click the button The lines from the top of the display down to the cursor line will now be locked Note You can edit data contained in locked lines but if new data is inserted it may cause data on the last line of the locked region to be pushed down into the scrolling region Display Functions F7 This button and the F7 key toggles the Display Functions mode on or off The effect of activating Display Functions mode depends on whether the emulation is in Local or Remote mode In Loca
247. fied either for yourself current user only or for all users Refer to the Session Management section later in this chapter for details When you have made your selections click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 4 then click the Connect button 2 3 Getting Started Terminal Emulation Configuration Emulation Options The Emulation options in the Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box are as follows The ADDS A2 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal as emulated by the Wyse W Y 50 50 60 terminals Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details The AIXTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive an X terminalusing X Windows The ANSI BBS emulation is a derivative of the ANSI device driver ANSLSYS supplied with all DOS based PCs and which provides the screen management for the DOS console screen PC based UNIX systems and Bulletin Board Systems BBS often rely on the ANSI emulation when being accessed by a PC The AT 386 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the AT amp T AT 386 terminal The ATT4410 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the AT amp T Dataspeed 4410 terminal Refer to the AT amp T 4410 Emulation section later in this cha
248. field read capability h hardware options y version number Screen configuration report ESC lt 11 p l c f c where p number of 80 x 25 pages available maximum lines displayable on screen c maximum columns displayable on screen f features 1 per field attribute capability 2 per character attribute capability 4 80 132 screen width selectable Printer configuration report printer type ESC lt 12 c Keyboard configuration report ESC lt 13 l nc where keyboard layout 1 standard 2 data entry n nationality 1 UK 2 USA 3 German 4 French 5 Swiss Ger 6 Swiss Fre 7 French Canadian STATUS REPORTING Report on device status device identifier ESC lt n Device status report 5 device status 6 cursor position ESC n Terminal status report ESC lt 10 e gn where e emulation mode 1 ANSI 7 bit 2 ANSI 8 bit 3 12080 mode g general status 1 7 bit comms link 2 flow control enabled 4 foreground executive active Screen status report ESC lt 11 p l c gn where p number of pages currently defined number of lines displayed 24 or 25 C 46 Host Command Summary c number of columns displayed 80 or 132 g general status 1 multiple active page format 2 per character attributes Printer status report g general status b buffer left Keyboard status report m mode g general status C
249. for storage of command sets R M Select GIN mode RPA SCREEN SETTING Select display addresing range S A coords coords Scroll from specified coordinates S coordinates Scroll from specified position S W M pcm pcv Define hardcopy region S H positions Specify printed image offset S H positions Specify output map location lightness value monochrome monitor Specify output map location RGB character Specify output map location HLS colour val Select specifed output map location colour for background Select output map location colour approx specified RGB character for background Select output map location colour approx specified HLS values for background Erase screen to current background Erase screen to specified background Specify time delay before command Control cursor display Set temporary writing controls S M location lightness S M location rgb character S M location hls values S I location S I rgb character S I hls values S S I location E S T time S C control value S W sub options C 56 Host Command Summary TEXT DISPLAY Select 1 of 17 standard sets of char cell character matrix amp char cell spacing Select character cell size Select character cell amp matrix height multiplier Select character cell spacing Select character matrix size Select character slant Select character string amp orientation Select character string orientat
250. for you Indicates that the keyboard is in Insert mode Already existing characters to the right of the cursor will move to make room for new characters that are entered 12 5 IBM 5250 Emulation Keyboard Mapping Insert mode can be disabled by pressing the Insert key again pressing the Reset key or by performing any action that sends data to the host such as pressing the Enter Clear or PF keys Indicates when input from the keyboard or mouse will not be accepted by the host When this is because an error has occured as shown in the error line pressing the Reset key will remove the error Alternatively more information can be obtained by pressing the Help key The only other keys available are Attn SysReq and Print Note that the emulation includes typeahead capability so that in most cases you can continue to enter data without waiting for the Do Not Enter message to clear as the data will be stored until the host is ready The following illustration shows where IBM 5250 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the IBM 5250 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the AS virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box Word Processing Mode The following keyboard functions are available when the IBM 5250 emulation is in Word Processing mode Symbols Command Begin Bold Centre Text Next Tex
251. ftIngS usa reire er n Eear KESERI AEri 6 61 General Settings inisio renens asean R iea 6 61 Environments Settings ccc sseeeseseeeeeceeeeseeeseeseeeaeeeees 6 63 Tab Settings anna ch anid aise aa qasasqa cians 6 68 BO 3107 Settings eisni a hisa aaa 6 69 Serial Settings soie auqa au eet ands dated 6 72 Contents 3 Contents AUXport S tUD asas qasan i raaa ai eaa AEE SA 6 74 Terminal Setting seiss nana aa aei iE 6 75 Tab Stops ionien anann E E A R E aia 6 82 Local Editing niire eit eoan eea nasi abs a EAEE 6 83 Block Transmission siciscssstesesscseeteseassstssaessssvestsesasnscssandsseasessssaseatenes 6 85 Tek 4014 S80fIB9S _ aaa asan asas aio asas 6 89 GIN Mouse Definitions 2u ee eee ceeeseceeeeseeeseseeeeseeseeeseeseeenees 6 91 ATID UES qas hasa ua a subsveends obec beac diseases 6 92 Define Keyboard Macro a aaasssssssssssssssssss 6 97 Defining A Key Or Key Combination 6 98 Specifying Characters aaa qaqas eria 6 99 Soft BUttOMS u eth eet ete u qaa dA uu kiaus 6 100 Programming A Soft Button a 6 101 Specifying Cha ractefSis issirinksi 6 102 Mouse Button Actions nispcsninsnisropi nii 6 103 Button Toolsin osai aen a vested deed 6 105 Adding B tfoBS aaa aqsaqakaqasiiassisharaiepaisccsnaiqinas das 6 105 Adding A Space Between Buttons 6 106 Removing A Button Or Space
252. ging ESC amp p 12 C Execute form feed ESC amp p4u0C Execute line feeds ESC amp pl1 4ulC Record mode on is optional ESC amp p 20 C Select external device ESC amp p4D Transfer display escape sequences no ESC amp sON Transfer display escape sequences yes ESC amp s1N REPORTS Request cursor position report disabled ESC amp x0C Request cursor position report enabled ESC amp x1C Request external printer status report ESC amp p4 Request primary terminal status report ESC Request secondary terminal status report ESC Request terminal identity report ESC s Request application program name report ESC s 12347 C 38 Host Command Summary IBM 3151 Emulation CHARACTER SET SELECTION Select GO SI Select G1 SO Select character set GO ESC lt set Select character set G1 ESC gt set CURSOR Backspace BS Carriage return new line or LTA CR Cursor down ESCB Cursor left ESCD Cursor right ESCC Cursor up ESCA Cursor home ESCH Index ESC SPM Insert cursor ESCZ Line feed VT Line feed or new line LF Line feed or erase input FF Next line ESCM Page down AID ESC B Reverse index ESC M Read cursor address ESC 5 Set buffer address Set cursor address ESC X row column ESC Y row column Reset buffer address mode ESC SPZ Tab HT Back tab ESC 2 Set column tab ESC 0 Clear column tab ESC 1 Clear all column tabs ESC SP 1 DISPLAY Clear all ESC L Clear page ESCL Create viewport ESC SP r
253. gle forms mode DC2 Exit forms mode SOH SEARCH OPERATIONS Set search mode ESCE Set search character if 80 hex or less ESC Set search character if greater than 80 hex ESC ESC SO ESC SI Reset search mode ESCF POINTER MOVEMENT Move pointer up DC3 Move pointer down LF Move pointer right ESC C or DC2 Move pointer left BS Align KBC to DCP ESC amp Tab right HT Clear variable tabs ESC Vertical tab down VT Home DC4 Jump to page ESC Position pointer at c column amp r row using hex values ESC c r Position pointer at c column amp r row using ASCII chars ESC c r Carriage return CR or LF Prevent align in cursor page ESC 6 EDITING SEQUENCES Insert character by line ESC Insert character by page ESC Delete character by line ESC Delete character by page ESC P Line insert ESCL Line delete ECM Move line up ESC gt Move line down ESC lt Clear to end of line ESC K or DCI Clear to end of page ESCJ Roll page up ESCS Roll page down ESC T Clear page SOH or FF or ESC FF C 76 Host Command Summary VIDEO ATTRIBUTE SEQUENCES Underline video highlight Reverse video highlight End highlight Start video blink Start secure video Start bright video Set reverse video Set normal video ESC 3 ESC 4 ETB CAN EM SUB ESCN ESCO TERMINAL RECONFIGURATION SEQUENCES Store ASCII codes as data Configure Data Comm Screen amp KPT buffer sizes Reconfig
254. gle in 80 column page Clear entire rectangle in 132 column page Clear page to nulls Clear page to spaces Clear page to write protected spaces Clear unprotected column to nulls Clear unprotected column to specified character Clear unprotected line to nulls from cursor Clear unprotected line foreground to nulls from cursor Clear unprotected line to spaces from cursor Clear unprotected line foreground to spaces from cursor Clear unprotected page to attribute character ESC c H line col character ESC c H line col character ESC ESC ESC ESCcK ESC c I character ESCt ESC cS ESCT ESCcR ESC C 83 Host Command Summary Clear unprotected page to nulls Clear unprotected page to nulls from cursor Clear unprotected page foreground to nulls from cursor Clear unprotected page to spaces Clear unprotected page to spaces from cursor Clear unprotected page foreground to spaces from cursor Clear unprotected page to specified character Clear unprotected rectangle in 80 column page Clear unprotected rectangle in 132 column page Clear unprotected to end of line with nulls Clear unprotected to end of line with spaces Box rectangle in 80 column page Box rectangle in 132 column page ESC ESCy ESCcQ ESC or SUB ESC Y ESCcP ESC character ESC c F line col character ESC c F line col character ESCcL ESCcO ESC c G line column ESC c G line column Box rectangle to right of c
255. he Auto Wrap option will cause the printer to automatically move to the beginning of the next line when the right margin is reached The Centre Image on Paper option is available when Graphics print is selected This will ensure that the graphics image is printed centrally on the paper The Scaling option is available when Graphics print is selected This enables the image to be scaled to suit your preference When the Use Printer Resolution option is selected you can scale the image up and when unselected you can scale the image down Scaling up when Use Printer Resolution is not selected may result in loss of some of the image The Graphics Image option is available when Graphics print is selected This enables you to specify how the graphics image is to be printed Clicking the arrow button next to the text box will cause four print options to be displayed These options allow you to print the graphics image as displayed Normal by default with black and white 6 21 Setup Menus reversed with colour converted to monochrome or colour converted to monochrome with black and white reversed Once a screen print is initiated by clicking OK another dialog box will be displayed while the screen data is being spooled out to the print manager This enables you to terminate the print process before data is actually printed Print Buffer This will send a copy of all the data contained in the window buffer to the currently selected p
256. he Define Keyboard Macros dialog box which is displayed by selecting Keyboard Macros in the Settings menu Define Keyboard Macros OR x Current Macro Definitions Key Code T Defined Macro r Create New Macro Program Key with Normal Add gt Predefined Macros Apply K_CONTROL x lt Remove Remove All Keyboard Configuration This enables you to redefine the function of most of the keys on your keyboard including the key combinations listed below Key Alt Key Shift Key Alt Shift Key Control Key Alt Control Key Control Shift Key Alt Control Shift Key Each definition may contain a string of up to 127 characters The combined total of all the characters that may be programmed into keys is determined by the 127 character limit per definition and the amount of memory available in your PC The Predefined Macros box enables you to select from a list of standard functions associated with the current terminal emulation Clicking the arrow button will display a list box in which the names of valid key functions called virtual key names are shown The Virtual Key Names appendix lists all the functions and associated virtual key names for each terminal emulation A key macro may be actioned automatically on start up or transmitted to the host or actioned locally when the key or key combination is pressed This is determined by selecting Normal Remote Local o
257. he Protocol setting and this option specifies the number of the current environment definition 6 63 Setup Menus Address Factory default D The address can be any two characters except NUL and SYNC that uniquely identify a T27 environment in a host network ID Factory default ENVMNT 1 This enables you to specify a name up to eight characters long which will be displayed on the screen to identify the current environment Append CR to LF Factory default Unselected When selected all line feed characters received from the host will be appended with carriage return characters Append LF to CR Factory default Selected When selected all carriage return characters received from the host will be appended with line feed characters Append LF to Return key Factory default Unselected This determines the result of pressing the Return key When unselected only a carriage return is performed When selected a carriage return and line feed is performed Auto form field advance Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether the text cursor moves to the next unprotected field when the current unprotected US field is filled CLR clears unprotected only Factory default Unselected This specifies whether the page clearing function clears all characters default or only unprotected characters Cursor is a block else underline Factory default Selected The cursor can be displayed
258. he keys F2 then F3 then F4 Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the lt and gt characters in the key definition box You may omit the VK_ and VT_ etc parts of the virtual key name To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other keys together type the lt character followed by the virtual key names linked together with plus sign characters and ending with the gt character For example to program the F1 key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together enter the following characters in the key definition box lt ALT F4 gt To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For example to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the key definition box lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt F4 gt Specifying Characters There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character For example the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entri
259. hether or not support of TN5250E is suppressed When this option is not selected i e TN5250E is not suppressed additional options are available by clicking the 5250 Options button These are described in the TN5250 Options section Force Negotiation These settings determine whether or not the Telnet Binary or EOR options are sup ported Both are set to no by default No Will not force any negotiations It will leave it up to the host to decide what to do DO Will force negotiation The host will be informed that the option is supported DONT Will force negotiation A negotiation packet will be sent to the host telling it that the option is not supported Break Settings The setting of these options determine whether or not a timing mark TM and or carriage return CR is sent with a Telnet break packet A timing mark is sent by de fault 2 10 Getting Started Send Location This enables you to enter the location of this terminal which may be used by the host to provide a list of users currently logged in giving their name and location TN3270 Options TN3270 Options i x 3270 LLI Device Name Connect TN3270E Options V Bind V Responses V SysReq Z Vv This dialog box is displayed by clicking the 3270 Options button in the TCP IP Telnet Configuration dialog box when TN3270 is not suppressed Connect This specifies the name of the device which the server will be requested to ass
260. ibute ETXA Flashing attribute ETXB Bold amp Flashing attributes ETXC Inverse attribute ETXD Bold amp Inverse attributes ETXE Flashing amp Inverse attributes ETXF Bold Flashing amp Inverse attributes ETXG Blank attribute ETXH Bold amp Blank attributes ETXI Flashing amp Blank attributes ETX J Bold Flashing amp Blank attributes ETXK Inverse amp Blank attributes ETX L Bold Inverse amp Blank attributes ETXM Flashing Inverse amp Blank attributes ETX N Bold Flashing Invers amp Blank attributes ETX O Underline attribute ETX P Bold amp Underline attributes ETX Q Flashing amp Underline attributes ETXR Bold Flashing amp Underline attributes ETX S Inverse amp Underline attributes ETXT Bold Inverse amp Underline attributes ETX U Flashing amp Underline attributes ETX V C 43 Host Command Summary Bold Flashing Inverse amp Underline attributes ETX W Blank amp Underline attributes ETX X Bold Blank amp Underline attributes ETX Y Flashing Blank amp Underline attributes ETXZ Bold Flashing Blank amp Underline attributes ETX Inverse Blank amp Underline attributes ETX Bold Inverse amp Underline attributes ETX Underline attribute ETX 0 Bold amp Underline attributes ETX 1 Flashing amp Underline attributes ETX 2 Bold Flashing amp Underline attributes ETX 3 Inverse amp Underline attributes ETX 4 Bold Inverse amp Underline attributes ETX 5 Flashing Inverse amp U
261. ic name for future selection in the Host Information dialog box 1 If this is anew configuration enter a name to identify it in the Configuration Name box 2 Select a Modem from the list box below The Configure button provides access to the standard Microsoft dialog boxes for specifying port settings and call options 3 Enter the Country Code Area Code and Telephone Number 4 Click the Dialing Properties button to display the standard Microsoft dialog boxes for specifying a variety of dialing formats 5 If you want the country and area codes to be ignored when dialing select Force Local If you want the area code dialed even if you are in that area select Force long distance 6 Click OK to save the settings and the name you assigned to this configuration will appear in the Modem configuration selection box in the main Host Information dialog box 2 26 Getting Started Serial Connection Settings The Serial Configuration dialog box can be displayed from the Connection Wizard Host Information dialog box by setting the Connection Type to Serial then clicking the Advanced button or the New Connection dialog box when in non WBT mode by selecting Serial in the Type list box then clicking the Configure button Configuration of Serial Cable on COMI Baud Rate Data Bits 9600 8 Parity Stop Bits None v 1 v Flow Control Transmit Rate Input Unlimited ies ae Local Echo Baud Rate Factory default
262. ie suol ounj pa eyOeIq ped y S9u unN sdeS y au uo spu B y Aq pa eoipul se uolounj s y p yueuuun IV 0 130 9 1d3SNI HVHO NMG H g eBesn Aoy IPULION eBesn Aey UW z L av gvLyOv8 Zld ktd Ol4 63 84 4 poy psig vid Osa Hd qaq 17 6 Unisys T27 Emulation 18 Unisys T27 Emulation This chapter describes features of the Unisys T27 terminal emulation Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box 2 Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed 3 Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box 4 Select the Unisys T27 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box 5 Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advance
263. ields The cursor cannot be moved into protected fields which may contain prompts or information or be empty The cursor can only be moved into unprotected fields which may also define the type of characters that can be entered In Block mode display memory is divided into pages the number of pages being determined by the application The status line will display BLOCK when you are in Block mode and PROT when in Block Protect mode 17 4 TA6530 Emulation ANSI Mode In ANSI mode characters are sent to the host as you type them and standard ANSI American National Standard Institute functions are executed Applications that run on the LXN host system generally recognize and use these functions The status line will display ANSI when you are in ANSI mode The Rule Cursor A cross hair rule cursor can be displayed by pressing the keys Alt Page Up To return to the normal cursor press Alt Page Down Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where TA6530 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the TA6530 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the TA virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box 17 5 TA6530 Emulation Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout payiyus u ym peyesouabh ase ped y DUSWNN dy UO JOU suonouni peyeyoRsg J40 S X907 WNN u uA p leJ u B a
264. ient certificates should be added to the Client Certificate key They may be given any value name Obviously if a value already exists with the same name it will be overwritten TeemTalk uses this value name to identify the certificate to the user and to link particular certificates to particular sessions Importing from the File System The SSL Connection dialog box allows users to add both CA and Client certificates by picking files from the file system These files should be in PEM certificate format and the Client file should include both the certificate and the encrypted private key An imported client certificate s registry name will be the original filename minus any path or extension 2 20 Getting Started SSH Connection Settings The optional SSH Secure Shell client server protocol is used to encrypt and transmit data securely over a network with authentication proof of client identity provided by a password and or key To enable an SSH connection select the SSH option in the Connection Wizard Host Information dialog box or when running TeemTalk in the New Connection dialog box Type list box The Telnet Port Number option must be set to the host s SSH port 22 is the default for SSH SSH Connection using Username and Password 1 Selectthe SSH option in the Connection Wizard Host Information dialog box or from the New Connection dialog Type list box when running TeemTalk 2 Display the Telnet Options dialog
265. igit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as _013 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references Start Column Factory default 1 This text box is used to specify the start column for transmitted data when no logical start of text pointer is present and the Return or Enter keys are pressed in Modify Line or Modify All mode Usually a start of text pointer is automatically generated to designate the leftmost character in the current line if it is the last line of data in display memory This pointer will remain in display memory until the line is deleted If the line has no start of text pointer data transmission will begin at the start column specified by this option The column range is from 1 to 80 inclusive Note The setting of this option may be temporarily redefined using one of the Margin Tab Col function keys See the HP700 92 Emulation chapter for details 6 33 Setup Menus FIdSeparator Factory default _ i e US This text box is used to specify the ASCII character used to indicate the end of each protected field except the last that is sent in Edit Mode To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal
266. ign to the Telnet session it may be used when requesting either a terminal or a printer session You can return the local host name by entering s after the device name To return the user name enter u after the device name You can specify how many characters of the name is returned in each case For example 3s will return the first three characters of the local host name and 3s will return the last three characters To automatically assign a new device name for each successive connection either enter dN after the name where N is a decimal value or xN where N is a hexadecimal value Each time the host requests the device name a counter will be substituted into the device name If the host rejects the device name as in use the counter will be incremented modulus N and the name retried until all possibilities have been tried at which point the emulation will report a device name rejected error For example TEST d4 will give TEST1 on all connections until the host rejects the name as in use in which case TEST2 will be used If this is already in use then TESTS is used or if already in use then TESTO These values are preserved over 2 11 Getting Started power off so the first connection of any given power on may not be TEST1 Assume that the start point is random Note There are separate counters for the IBM 3270 and IBM 5250 emulations When you achieve a TN3270E connection the LU device name that you are co
267. ility with software designed to drive the Data General D410 412 terminal Click OK to close the dialog box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection select Modem specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details DG 410 412 Emulation Keyboard Mapping The illustration on the following page shows where DG 410 412 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key func
268. ill move to the right Item 7 This will display Edit when the terminal emulation is in Edit mode Item 8 This will display the time in 24 hour format when in DEC VT500 mode if the VT525 set time command has been received from the host Item 9 Indicates the status of the printer as follows None signifies that the printer is not turned on or not connected or not installed in Microsoft Windows 2 46 Getting Started Not Ready signifies that the printer is not ready to receive data for printing Ready signifies that the printer is ready to receive data for printing Auto signifies that the emulation is in Auto Print mode in which the current cursor line is sent to the printer when a command for the cursor to move to the next line is issued Controller signifies that the emulation is in Printer Controller mode in which the host has direct control over the printer Print screen commands issued from the keyboard or mouse will be ignored ErrGen indicates that an error has occurred and a message box will be displayed indicating the error Item 10 This indicates the keyboard mode It will be blank when the keyboard is in normal mode and will display DEC when in DEC mode You can toggle between normal and DEC mode by pressing the keys Alt Num Lock together Item11 Indicates the status of the aux port as follows Ready indicates that the aux port is ready for bidirectional output In Use indicates that the aux port is
269. ines the effect of the Return key in forms mode When unselected it moves to the next line 6 62 Setup Menus Use optional poll select characters Factory default Unselected Specifies whether the optional poll select sequence 7B 7C hex is to be used instead of the standard sequence 70 71 hex default Environments Settings Lines per page Factory default 24 This specifies the number of lines allocated to each logical page of data in the range 1 to 256 Chars per line Factory default 80 This specifies the width of the page as 40 80 or 132 characters Lines per Screen Factory default 24 This specifies the number of text lines to be displayed per full screen in the rage 0 to 24 Note that lines can be displayed as single height or double height as determined by the setting of the Lines are double height option Alt US Char Factory default _ This specifies the character to be used as the unit separator This will be converted into a US character when you invoke forms mode Alt RS Char Factory default AA This specifies the character to be used as the record separator This will be converted into an RS character when you invoke forms mode Pages Factory default 2 This determines the number of pages in each environment in the range 1 to 24 Env Factory default 1 An environment is an area of memory reserved for exclusive use by applications Up to three environments can be defined depending on t
270. ing column ESC amp C Cursor relative addressing column line ESC amp a c c R Cursor relative addressing line ESC amp a R Cursor relative addressing line column ESC amp a Ir c C Cursor sensing absolute ESCa Cursor sensing relative ESC End of line wrap inhibited ESC amp s1 C End of line wrap enabled ESC amp s 0 C Memory absolute addressing column ESC amp a C Memory absolute addressing column line ESC amp a cc IR Memory absolute addressing line ESC amp a R Memory absolute addressing line column ESC amp a lr c C Move cursor home down ESC F Move cursor home up ESCH or ESCh Move cursor one column left ESC D Move cursor one column right ESC C Move cursor one line down ESC B Move cursor one line up ESCA Move cursor to left margin ESCG Move cursor to next tab stop ESC I uppercase i Move cursor to previous tab stop ESCi Screen relative addressing column ESC amp a C Screen relative addressing column line ESC amp a c c 1Y Screen relative addressing line ESC amp a Y Screen relative addressing line column ESC amp a ly cC Set tab stop at current cursor position ESC 1 C 35 Host Command Summary DISPLAY 80 column display 132 column display Clear all margins Display next page Display previous page Format mode off Format mode on Jump scroll enabled Memory lock disabled Memory lock enabled Scroll down one line Scroll up one line Select invisible disp
271. ing 64 makes 77 which is the decimal value of the displayable character M When the Ctrl control key is held down and Shift M is pressed this will generate a CR code in local mode Some setup options require you to specify one or more control characters A control character can be specified by typing to represent the Ctrl key immediately followed by the displayable character equivalent of the control character as described in the previous paragraph For example AM represents Ctrl M which generates the control character CR Another way of specifying control characters is by entering the decimal value of the ASCII character Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as 013 Character Sets ASCII CHARACTER SET Multinational 7 Bit e OI NOGO G N O 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt N lt wx Z lt c Aa D O S 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 2 pzEciAL 1B HEXADECIMAL The ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange character set will be selected when the language is set to North American or the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational This table forms the firs
272. ing command will send text to the serial port lt VK_FILE_O gt lt com1 gt text to send to serial port_013_010next line lt VK_FEND gt which will result in the following being sent text to send to serial port lt CR gt lt LF gt next line A 10 Virtual Key Names Reading Text From A File The following command format is used to read a string from a file and push it into the keyboard buffer as if typed lt VK_FILE_I gt lt filename gt max length retries termination char acter lt VK_FEND gt The string is terminated when the maximum length is read or the maximum number of retries is reached or the termination character is read Each can be defaulted by entering 0 so entering 0 0 0 will result in a maximum length of 1024 a single retry and a termination character of 26 EOF If the file does not exist an error will be displayed For example the following command will read up to 20 characters retry 5 times and end at the first lt CR gt lt VK_FILE_I gt lt c file txt gt 20 5 13 lt VK_FEND gt There is normally a 100 millisecond delay between retries however many Unix systems will round this up to one second Insert Delay The following command can be used to insert a delay of nnn tenths of a second lt VK_SLEEPnnn gt For example to insert a delay of 10 seconds you would enter lt VK_SLEEP100 gt The delay can be interrupted by pressing any key Note that
273. ing down the Ctrl key and pressing the Left or Right Cursor keys 6 75 Setup Menus Memory Rows Factory default 144 This option determines the number of text rows that are stored in memory This can be set from 0 to 528 rows by default The Display Rows option specifies the number of memory rows that can be viewed in the workspace at any one time Memory Page Size Factory default 24 When the emulator is in VT420 mode the display memory of 144 lines can be divided into several pages up to a maximum of six pages of 24 lines each The setting of this option determines the number of lines on a page and therefore how many pages are available Note that the page size can be larger than the Display Rows setting in which case you can scroll the page up or down in the window by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the Up or Down Cursor keys When the emulator is in any mode other than VT420 the page size is the same as the Display Rows setting Memory Page Width Factory default 80 This option specifies the width of display memory for DEC VT modes in the range 80 to 132 columns When the number of Display Columns is less than the page width specified here you can scroll horizontally to view the hidden columns by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the Left or Right Cursor keys Cursor Type Factory default Block This enables you to specify how the text cursor is displayed Select from the following Underline Static Un
274. ins can be changed ESC 69h Vertical split screen mode L amp R margins cannot be changed ESC 691 Move cursor to page n at same position ESC n SPP RECTANGULAR AREA OPERATIONS Copy rectangular area t Top line border Left column border b Bottom line border r Right column border Erase rectangular area t Top line border b Left column border s Source page number ESC t l b r s dt dl dp v dt Destination top line border dl Destination left column border dp Destination page number Bottom line border r Right column border ESC t l b r z C 10 Host Command Summary Fill rectangular area ESC f t 1 b r x f Decimal code of fill character b Bottom line border t Top line border r Right column border Left column border Selective erase rectangular area ESC t l b r t Top line border b Bottom line border Left column border r Right column border Select attribute change extent ESC c x c character positions affected Stream of character positions 0 or 1 Rectangular area of character positions 2 Change attributes in rectangular area ESC t l b r a r t Top line border r Right column border Left column border a Visual character attributes b Bottom line border Reverse attributes in rectangular area ESC t 1 b r a t t Top line border r Right column border Left column bo
275. insert one or more lines using the Ins Ln key for example The contents of the current and all following lines will move down the number of lines inserted causing the lines originally at the bottom of the display to be discarded When set to Character you will be able to insert one or more characters in the current line Characters to the right of the cursor position will move along If the Auto Wrap option is set to No then characters originally at the end of the current line will be discarded If set to Yes characters on all following lines will move along forcing characters at the end of the last line to be discarded When set to Both the function of the Line and Character settings will be enabled Insert Character Factory default Space The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing the Insert key When set to Space a space character will be inserted after the current cursor position When set to Mode the emulation will enter Insert mode when the Insert key is pressed Tab Operation Factory default Field The setting of this option determines whether tab stops are according to field attribute characters or column tab definitions When set to Field tab stops in a formatted page are provided by field attribute characters Column tab definitions are ignored 6 40 Setup Menus When set to Column tab stops are provided by column tab definitions Field attribute characters are ignored Enter Key Fa
276. ion f Key Is the key selection number of the key to be defined as listed below Fl 11 F5 15 F9 20 F2 12 F6 17 F10 21 F3 13 F7 18 Fll 23 F4 14 F8 19 F12 24 Is a delimiter UDS Is the user defined string consisting of hex pairs in the following ranges 3 0 through 3 9 0 through 9 4 1 through 4 6 A through F 6 1 through 6 6 a through f For example the hex encoding for PRINT would be as follows 5052494E54 This enables you to use any of the 256 character codes in the key string You can enter key definition strings in any order UDS Direction Specifies the transmission direction Oornone Normal Host and or terminal default 1 Local Terminal only 2 Remote Host only C 12 Host Command Summary PROGRAMMING ALPHANUMERIC KEYS Program Alphanumeric Key s DCS y D D ST where the data string D D format is as follows Keyl Hex Code String Function UDS UDS Direction Key2 Key Is the key station number of the key to be programmed as listed below Esc Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 110 F10 121 Page Up 85 112 F11 122 Page Down 86 113 F12 123 Cursor Left 79 114 Print Screen 124 Cursor Right 89 115 Scroll Lock 125 Cursor Up 83 116 Pause 126 Cursor Down 84 117 Insert 75 Keypad Enter 108 118 Delete 76 Return 43 119 Home 80 Backspace 15 120 End 81 Tab 16 Is a delimiter Hex Code String Function UDS UDS Direction Specifies the hex code of the character to be transmit
277. ion Saves the current session configuration Displays the Printer Setup dialog box Displays the Print Screen dialog box for producing a hardcopy of screen data in a particular format Copies selected data to the clipboard Pastes clipboard data at the current cursor position Displays help information Toggles display of the soft buttons on and off and selects the level Toggles display of the soft buttons on and off and selects the level 2 42 Getting Started The Soft Buttons Windows CE A set of soft buttons are provided which can be programmed so that they perform various functions when clicked You can toggle between command bar and soft button display either by clicking the following buttons a or by pressing the keys Ctrl Alt Left Cursor or Ctrl Alt Right Cursor Note that you can assign these functions to any other keys using the virtual key names CB_NEXT and CB_PREV You can define up to four soft button levels Level 1 is displayed by default Each level consists of twelve programmable buttons providing a combined total of 48 programmable buttons Levels stored off screen can be scrolled into view by clicking one of the arrow buttons The soft buttons are programmed using the Soft Buttons dialog box which is displayed by selecting Settings in the menu bar then Soft Buttons Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for information on programming the buttons 2 43 Getting Started
278. ion SCO CSIs C 16 Host Command Summary Restore saved cursor SCO Set cursor style Blinking block Steady block Blinking underline Steady underline Right to left copy enabled Right to left copy disabled Right to left mode enabled Right to left mode disabled Vertical line position absolute Vertical line position relative Set tab every 8 columns Set scroll speed Smooth 2 Smooth 4 Jump Clear screen on column change Do not clear screen on column change Character Sets CSI u CSI SPq none 0 1 2 3 4 CSI 96h CSI 961 CSI 34h CSI 341 CSI d CSI e CSI 5 W CSI SP p none 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CSI 951 CSI 95h Assign user preferred supplemental character set DCS s u c ST s 94 character set 0 96 character set 1 c character set as follows Default 94 Character Set Default 96 Character Set 5 DEC Supplemental A DEC Greek B 4 DEC Hebrew F 0 DEC Turkish H amp 4 DEC Cyrillic L lt User pref Supplemental M lt Down line load allocation One each Two each S1 amp S2 Select character set g G set as follows 94 Character Set 96 Character Set GO Gil Gl uo G2 G2 G3 G3 ISO Latin 1 Supplemental ISO Latin 2 Supplemental ISO Greek Supplemental ISO Hebrew Supplemental ISO Latin Cyrillic ISO Latin 5 Supplemental User pref Supplemental CSI z 1 2 ESC g c C 17 Host Command S
279. ion Select font Select subscript superscript overstrike Select width amp height multipliers for standard set 1 character matrix Set temporary writing controls Set temporary text controls T S standard set T S cell width cell height T H cell amp matrix height mult T relative position T U matrix width height T tilt T D string or S set D char or T D orientation S set T A font T pev T M width mult height mult T W sub options T B options E Specify text T text VECTOR DRAWING Draw point vp Draw vector to specified coordinates V coordinates Draw vector to specified PCV V pev Draw closed vector sequence Draw open vector sequence Set temporary writing controls WRITING CONTROL V B positions amp options E V S positions amp options E V W sub options Character shading Define writing pattern Define writing pattern amp set multiplier Pattern reversal control Pixel memory bit plane selection Select comp writing with plane 0 enabled Select comp writing with plane 1 enabled Select comp writing both planes enabled Select comp writing for current write plane selection Select erase writing mode Select output map location colour approx specified HLS values for foreground Select output map location colour approx specified RGB character for foreground Select overlay writing mode Select replace writing mode Select specified output map location for
280. ion 15 3 Wyse 60 Native Emulation Specification D 6 Wyse Emulations Character sets Native Mode ALL B 14 WY 60 Graphics 1 B 20 WY 60 Graphics 2 B 21 WY 60 Graphics 3 B 22 WY 60 Multinational 437 B 15 WY 60 Multinational 850 B 16 WY 60 PC Equivalent B 17 WY 60 Standard ANSI B 19 WY 60 Standard ASCII B 18 Host command summary C 83 Keyboard mapping 19 5 Session configuration 19 1 Setup 6 43 Specification D 7 Status line 19 4 Virtual key names A 9 Wyse PC Term Emulation Host command summary C 89 Index 10
281. is enabled To specify the left margin place the cursor in the column for the margin location and click this button or press F5 The left margin can be reset to column 1 by pressing F7 this will also reset the right margin to column 80 Note Margins are disregarded when data is transferred from display memory to the host The margins will be cleared when Format mode is enabled Right Margin F6 This function enables you to define the right margin Margins determine the bound ary for certain cursor movement commands such as carriage return and cursor home and insert character and delete character functions Data to the right of this margin will still be accessible 10 12 HP 700 92 96 Emulation When data received from the host or entered through the keyboard reaches the specified right margin the cursor will move to the left margin on the next line down as long as InhEolWrp is not selected in the HP Settings dialog box and in the case of keyboard entered data auto line feed mode is enabled To specify the right margin place the cursor in the column for the margin location and click this button or press F6 The right margin can be reset to column 80 by pressing F7 this will also reset the left margin to column 1 Note Margins are disregarded when data is transferred from display memory to the host The margins will be cleared when Format mode is enabled Cir All Margins F7 This function will reset both left
282. istrator you can either create a unique session only for your own use or you can create session templates that are available to all users of the system The session templates can only be modified by the system administrator However a user can load a session template change the setup settings then save the session to create their own local copy based on the template This copy will have the same name as the session template In order to create a new session TeemTalk must be started without a session i e not started by clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu To create a session only for your own use select the Session stored for current user only option in the Save Session As dialog box before saving the session To create a session template for all users select the Session stored for all users of system option in the Save Session As dialog box before saving the session When TeemTalk is started without a session i e not started by clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu the name of each available session template will be listed in the Open Session dialog box together with the letter T to indicate that they are templates When a user loads a template modifies the settings then saves the session a local copy of the template will be made with the same name but with the changed settings This copy will replace the template in the list of session configurations displayed
283. itten for the DEC VT320 terminal the difference is in their treatment of 8 bit control codes When VT500 7 Bit is selected all 8 bit codes are converted to their 7 bit equivalents whereas VT500 8 Bit leaves 8 bit codes unchanged If you are using VT200 applications select VT500 7 Bit Specify the required VT Terminal ID setting then click OK to close the dialog box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details DEC VT Emulations For a modem connection select Modem specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the
284. ivated when Push mode is entered The cursor will remain at its current position while you type additional characters and text will be pushed in the opposite direction of the screen orientation Edit mode is activated when the cursor is moved from its Boundary position into the Push segment area In this mode text can be edited within the Push segment while typing in the field s natural direction Bilingual Keyboard Support When a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard is selected you can toggle between the National and Latin character set by pressing the keys Shift on the IBM 3270 Emulation keypad The character N or L will be displayed on the status line to indicate which character set is currently active Selecting the Numeral Swap option in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box will cause all numbers to be displayed using the National character set when in Latin character set mode Alternate Code Page If a language supports two code pages e g Hebrew New Code and Hebrew Old Code you can switch between the two by pressing the keys Ctrl Shift Alt on the numeric keypad This function can be assigned to a different key or key combina tion by using the IB_ALTCP virtual key name Keyboard Mapping The illustration on the following page shows where IBM 3270 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the IBM 3270 keyboard can
285. j z gt K k a sz si lt L i 0 I M 1 m y 3 N i a p n i p ol _ B o DEL 15 7 PT250 Emulation Notes 15 8 Siemens 97801 Emulation 16 Siemens 97801 Emulation This chapter describes the Siemens 97801 terminal emulation Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the Siemens 97801 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display
286. k OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed 3 Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box 4 Select the Wyse terminal emulation required in the Emulation list box The WY50 WY50 and WY60 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the Wyse WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 terminals respectively The ADDS A2 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals The HZ 1500 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hazeltine 1500 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals The TVI 910 TVI 920 and TVI 925 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the TeleVideo 910 920 and 925 terminals respec tively as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals 19 1 Wyse Emulations 5 Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in ch
287. k will not start printing until it receives a print end of job command from the host Entering any other number will cause TeemTalk to print after the specified number of seconds have elapsed regardless of whether the print end of job command has been received from the host If you require the port to be kept open all the time to stop the printer resetting enter 1 minus one Setup Menus Direct Print Data To A Specific Port To direct print data to a specific port select Print Direct To Port and specify the Printer Port Selecting the FormFeed Terminator option will cause the printer to advance the paper to the top of the form when it has finished printing The Output Character Set option enables you to specify the character set used for printing when Print Direct To Port is selected This allows non ISO Latin 1 printers to be used Selecting Auto Line Feed will cause the printer to print at the beginning of the next line when a carriage return command is received When a serial port is selected clicking the Setup button will display a dialog box in which you can specify the baud rate parity flow control data bits and stop bits settings These options are described in the Serial Settings section Configuration of COMI H E Baud Rate Data Bits 9600 X 8 X Parity Stop Bits None fi z Flow Control Input X If supported clicking the Advanced button will display a dia
288. kspace at the cursor position by pressing the keys Alt Page Down which toggles it on and off The setting of this option determines whether it is displayed as a horizontal rule vertical rule or both Follows Cursor Factory default Unselected When the rule is displayed in the emulation workspace the setting of this option determines whether or not the rule follows the cursor when it moves Notice Board Options This will display the Notice Board Setup dialog box as described in the next section Keyboard Unlock Delay Factory default 0 This option is available when the IBM 3270 Model is not set to a printer When the keyboard is unlocked by the host this specifies a delay in milliseconds before characters are sent Print Bypass Character This option is available when the IBM 3270 Model option is set to a printer The Start Seq box enables you to enter the character or sequence of characters that initiate a print bypass The end sequence that terminates the print bypass can be specified either by entering the actual characters in the End Seq box when Specify End Sequence is selected or by specifying the number of characters that make up the end sequence in the End Length box when End on Non Hex is selected If no End Seq is entered the bypass is assumed to be for a single pair of characters only If an End Seq is specified characters in the data stream between the start and end are interpreted as encoded ASCII For example
289. l being emulated in response to a terminal identification request from the host Model 11 supports only one viewport containing 24 or 25 rows and 80 columns Model 31 supports up to three viewports 80 or 132 columns wide and pass through printing IBM 3270 Options The setting of the IBM 3270 Model option specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported TN3287 printing is supported by selecting 3287 1 One of four display sizes can be selected 3278 9 2 24 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 3 32 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 4 43 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 5 27 rows by 132 columns 3278 settings with the E extension provide support for the following extended attributes these are supported by the 3279 as standard 3270 Field Attributes Extended Highlighting Foreground Colour Query Reply Inbound Structured Fields The setting of the Left Ctrl acts as Reset Key option determines whether or not the left Control key performs the same function as the Reset key Getting Started The setting of the Right Ctrl acts as Enter Key option determines whether or not the right Control key performs the same function as the keypad Enter key IBM 5250 Options The IBM 5250 Model option specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the specified terminal ma
290. l mode activating Display Functions mode will cause sub sequently received control codes and escape sequences to be displayed on the screen but not actioned Exceptions to this rule are the commands issued when the button or F7 key is pressed and the carriage return and line feed commands which will be executed In Remote mode activating Display Functions mode will cause subsequently received control codes and escape sequences to be transmitted to the host but not actioned locally Exceptions to this rule are the commands issued when the button or F7 key is pressed and the carriage return and line feed commands which will be executed If the Local Echo option is enabled in the HP Settings dialog box see the Setup Menus chapter commands will be displayed on the screen as well as transmit ted to the host Note If the XmitFnctn A option is selected in the HP Settings dialog box the button and F7 key will not deactivate Display Functions mode 10 7 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Auto LF F8 This button and the F8 key enables or disables Auto Line Feed mode When enabled a line feed command is automatically appended to every carriage return command generated from the keyboard The setting may be saved by selecting Save Session in the File menu Configuration Selection This set of function buttons is displayed by pressing the F9 key which is equivalent to the HP 700 92 96 User System key These functions enable you to access th
291. lations TA 6530 Settings for configuring the Tandem 6530 emulation IBM 3270 Settings for configuring the IBM 3270 emulation IBM 5250 Settings for configuring the IBM 5250 emulation 6 24 Setup Menus Unisys T27 Settings BQ 3107 Settings Serial Settings Auxport Settings Terminal Settings Local Editing Block Transmission Tek 4014 Settings GIN Mouse Definitions Attributes Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Mouse Button Actions Button Tools for configuring the Unisys T27 emulation for configuring the Bull BQ 3107 emulation for specifying serial communication settings for specifying auxilliary port settings for specifying terminal and display settings for specifying DEC VT Block Edit mode local editing functions for specifying DEC VT Block Edit mode text formatting and transmission for specifying graphics text settings screen mapping resolution and GIN termination characters Graphics versions of TeemTalk only for defining GIN mouse button codes Graphics versions of TeemTalk only for assigning colours and specifying how characters with attributes are displayed for redefining the function of keys for defining soft button functions for defining mouse functions TeemTalk for Windows XPe only for defining the toolbat floating button palette 6 25 Setup Menus Emulation Settings Emulation Settings m Alpha Emulation VT Terminal ID eso 7 Bit vrazo Characte
292. lay Select visible display Set left margin Set right margin Smooth scroll enabled Define colour pair ESC amp w 6 f 80 X ESC amp w 6 f 132 X ESC 9 ESCU ESC V ESC X ESC W ESC amp k0 ESC m ESC1 ESC T ESCS ESC amp w 13 F ESC amp w 12 F ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC amp k1 ESC amp v parameters parameters can be one or more of the following lt 0 1 gt m lt decimal gt a lt decimal gt b lt decimal gt c lt decimal gt x lt decimal gt y lt decimal gt z lt 0 7 gt i lt 0 7 gt s lt 0 7 gt RGB 0 or HSL 1 colour specification method Red or Hue colour value for foreground Green or Saturation colour value for foreground Blue or Luminosity colour value for foreground Red or Hue colour value for background Green or Saturation colour value for background Blue or Luminosity colour value for background Colour pair to be initialized Colour pair to be selected Colour pair definition status Assign colours to colour pair decimal ESC amp v a b c x y z lt colour pair gt i Select an alpha colour pair 0 7 ESC amp v S EDITING Clear display memory from cursor ESCJ Clear line or field from cursor ESCK Delete character ESC P Delete line ESCM Insert character mode ESCQ Insert line ESCL Modify all mode disabled ESC amp kOM Modify all mode enabled ESC amp k 1M Replace character mode ESCR Unprotected field end ESC Unprotected field start ESC C 36 Host Co
293. lbar 20 15 Disable Settings menu 20 15 Disable Settings menu items 20 15 Disable sixel graphics scaling 20 19 Disable status bar amp DEC status line 20 16 Disable System menu 20 11 Disable System menu amp Min Max buttons 20 12 Disable tool buttons on command bar 20 12 Disable Tools menu 20 15 Enable plane masking 20 19 Graphics redraw on resize 20 17 New session warning message 20 5 Reflection 4 colour support 20 17 Save 4014 graphics display 20 18 Set Tek graphics height 20 18 Set Tek graphics width 20 18 Soft buttons displayed 20 16 Startup command group to action 20 7 Window maximized 20 9 Window minimized 20 9 Workspace fills screen 20 9 Registry Entries Command summary 20 2 Reset Terminal 6 9 s Save Session 6 13 Save Session CE 6 5 Save Session XPe 6 6 SCO Console Emulation Host command summary C 58 Virtual key names A 7 Scrolling Horizontally DEC VT emulations 7 5 Serial Connection Settings 2 27 Serial Port Sending textto A 10 Virtual key names A 10 Session Management XPe 2 39 Opening new 6 12 Save 6 13 Saveas 6 14 Session Configuration BQ 3107 emulation 8 1 DEC VT emulations 7 1 DG 410 412 emulation 9 1 HP 700 92 96 emulation 10 1 IBM 3151 emulation 13 1 Index 7 Index IBM 3270 emulation 11 1 IBM 5250 emulation 12 1 MDIS Prism emulations 14 1 PT250 emulation 15 1 Siemens 97801 emulation 16 1 TA6530 emulation 17 1 Unisys T27 emulation 18 1 Wyseemulations 19 1 Se
294. le ESCi Select long dash line style ESC d Select long dash line style ESCI Select short dash line style ESCc Select short dash line style ESCk Select solid line style ESC Select solid line style ESCe Select solid line style ESCf Select solid line style ESC g Select solid line style ESCh Select solid line style ESC m Select solid line style ESCn Select solid line style ESC o C 69 Host Command Summary TVI 955 Emulation GENERAL OPERATION Block mode on Local mode on Half duplex mode on Full duplex mode on Return to previous conversational mode Set terminal operating mode s 0 955 1 950 Reset terminal operating mode s 0 955 1 950 Select a terminal operating value 0 955 1 950 Select a programming compatibility mode 0 955 1 950 Reset terminal to factory default values Reset terminal to saved settings values Reset function keys to factory default values Reset editing keys to factory default values Monitor mode on Monitor mode off CHARACTER SETS amp BLOCK GRAPHICS ESCB ESCc ESCDH ESCDF ESC C ESC h ESC 1 ESC 1 2 v ESC 10 v ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC 2 ESC 3 ESCU ESC X or ESCu Select character set 0 US ASCII 1 UK ASCII ESC 9 v Special graphics mode on ESC Special graphics mode off ESC Select a character from the multinational character set CTRL U Read 7 bit data words ESC 11 Read 8 bit data words ESC 1h Define block graphics ar
295. le menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection select Modem specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details The Unisys T27 emulation is configured using the Unisys T27 Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter 18 2 Unisys T27 Emulation The Status Bar L LTIA we ne me ro ure On The host connection is active but the Unisys T27 emulation does not have an active address Off No line activity
296. leared from the display when the number of columns is changed Backspace DEL Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether or not a backspace command performs a delete Ignore Nulls Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether Null characters received from the host are actioned or ignored High Function Terminal Factory default Selected This applies to the AIXTerm emulation It enables you to switch between HFT High Function Terminal mode default and VT100 mode Cursor Moves Right to Left Factory default Unselected This applies to the DEC VT AIXTerm Ansi BBS AT 386 and Sco Console emulations It enables you change the direction in which the text cursor moves across the display Copy Right to Left Factory default Unselected This applies to the DEC VT AIXTerm Ansi BBS AT 386 and Sco Console emulations It enables the copy commands to function in right to left display mode 6 80 Setup Menus Keyboard Sends Scan Codes Factory default Unselected This applies to the DEC VT520 VT PC Term and Wyse PC Term emulations It determines whether keyboard scan codes or ASCII codes are sent to the host on key press release Note that this cannot be selected at the same time as the Keyboard Sends Position Codesoption Keyboard Sends Position Codes Factory default Unselected This applies to the DEC VT520 VT PC Term and Wyse PC Term emulations It d
297. lect GIN mode ESC SUB Select GIN mode ESC 4g Select GIN mode ESC 5g Select Graphics Text mode CR Select Graphics Text mode US Select Graphics Text mode ESC FF Select Incremental Point mode RS Select Point mode FS Select Vector mode GS Select Vector mode ESC GS VECTOR MODE Clear Vector mode screen ESC FF Define user line style x pixels on pixels off ESC a Define user line style y pixels on pixels off ESC b Define user line style z pixels on pixels off ESC c Disable block fill erase ESC ETX Disable dark vector BEL Disable dark vector ESC BEL Disable rectangle drawing ESC r Enable block fill erase ESC STX Enable circle plotting ASCII equiv of coordinates ESC O Enable dark vector GS Enable dark vector ESC GS Enable rectangle drawing c corner coordinates ESC R c c Select 3 dot dash line style ESCe Select 3 dot dash line style ESC m Select dot dash line style ESC b Select dot dash line style ESC j Select dotted line style ESCa Select dotted line style ESCi Select long dot dash line style ESCf Select long dot dash line style ESCn Select long dash line style ESC d Select long dash line style ESCI Select medium dash line style ESC g Select medium dash line style ESC o Select short dash line style ESC c Select short dash line style ESC k Select solid line style ESC Select solid line style ESCh Select user defined line style a ESC x Select user defined line style b ESC y Select u
298. lick the Add to Custom Colours button to apply the change to the set of custom colours 6 96 Setup Menus Define Keyboard Macros Define Keyboard Macros OKE x Current Macro Definitions Key Code T Defined Macro Create New Macro Program Key with Normal X J Add gt Predefined Macros Apply VK_CONTROL X This dialog box is displayed by selecting Keyboard Macros in the Settings menu lt Remove Remove All The Define Keyboard Macros dialog box enables you to redefine the function of most of the keys on your keyboard including the key combinations listed below Key Shift Key Control Key Control Shift Key Alt Key Alt Shift Key Alt Control Key Alt Control Shift Key Each definition may contain a string of up to 127 characters The combined total of all the characters that may be programmed into keys is determined by the 127 character limit per definition and the amount of memory available in your PC The Predefined Macros box enables you to select from a list of standard functions associated with the current terminal emulation Clicking the arrow button will display a list box in which the names of valid key functions called virtual key names are shown The Virtual Key Names appendix lists all the functions and associated virtual key names for each terminal emulation A key macro may be actioned automatically on start up or transmitted to the host or action
299. lick the Define button to display the colourdefinition facilities Color Basic colors i g eA e e Hue 160 il mr Enn Sat 240 mar r ma tee m Lum 120 mm r r ee a G E E E E Emi moana m Color Red f0 Green 0 Blue 255S Add to Custom Colors This provides two methods for specifying a different colour one visual and the other numeric All the settings initially displayed relate to the colour selected in the Attributes dialog box and shown in the large Colour box When you start changing any of the settings the Colour box will display the new colour Visual Method The full range of colours available is displayed in the large colour selection box A target cursor is positioned over the currently selected colour To select a new colour you can either click on the colour required or drag the target cursor over it The colour displayed in the Colour box will change accordingly The lightness of the selected colour can be altered by dragging the triangular pointer up or down the vertical bar to 6 95 Setup Menus the right When you have the required colour click the Add to Custom Colours button to apply the change to the set of custom colours Numeric Value Method The numeric value of Hue Lightness and Saturation or the Red Green and Blue percentage values can be entered directly in the text boxes The colour displayed in the Colour box will change accordingly When you have the required colour c
300. licking the International Settings button will display keyboard language and character set options for the selected terminal emulation Refer to the relevant emulation settings dialog box description in the Setup Menus chapter for details Note that the DEC VT options are located in the Emulation and Terminal Settings dialog boxes 7 Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box TE Client Connection Wizard Host Information Connection Type irr Host Name Modem O Serial E J Host Rollover On Connection Fail For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button and enter the name or Internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box Selecting the Host Rollover On Connection Fail option will present four Host Name entry boxes The emulator will attempt to connect to each specified host in turn until one is success ful Click Advanced for Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section later in this chapter for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section later in this chapter for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section later in this chapter for details Getting Started 10 The optional
301. log box that enables you to send printer specific commands to specify for example font size colour or page header and footer Advanced Printer Configuration joke x Sequences To Send At Initialisation Init amp l6D At Termination Term E Setup Menus CE Direct Print Data To A Network Printer To direct print data to a printer on the network when running TeemTalk for Windows CE select Use Network Printer LPR and enter the LPD Hostname Clicking the Setup button will display a dialog box that enables you to specify various print settings LPD Device Settings OKE x LPD Device dev1 Printer Name Job Name 2 C lt User Name SY Number of Copies i Retries fo Retry Delay 0 Secs Add Banner Debug Information You must specify the Printer Name The Job Name and User Name entries are optional the User Name will default to root if none is specified The Number of Copies to print is set to 1 by default You can specify how many times the LPR protocol will attempt to execute the print job before cancelling by setting the number of Retries and the number of seconds delay between each attempt When Add Banner is selected information about this print job will be printed with it You can display a message box which will indicate the progress of the print job by selecting Debug Information If supported clicking the Advanced button will display a dialog box that enables yo
302. lready installed the root certificate you will have been given to verify the server you are going to connect to click Add under Root Certificates and choose the file containing the certificate This will import the certificate and add its name to the list If the server you are going to connect to requires you to have a client certificate choose the relevant certificate from the Client Certificate drop down list If you have not already installed your client certificate click Add under Client Certificate and choose the file containing the certificate This will import the certificate and add its name to the list 2 18 Getting Started 7 Youmay optionally enter your Password for the client certificate here too If you check Save this password will be stored encrypted along with the certificate itself Please note this is a security risk as anyone who can acquire a copy of your registry will be able to use your certificate 8 Once you have configured the certificates click OK and then Connect in the New Connection dialog box 9 Login as usual when the telnet login prompt appears Error Messages Could not connect TCP IP socket The most likely causes of this error are that the service is not running on the server or the port number is incorrect Could not connect SSL socket Please check that your client certificate is correct This message is returned if the server refuses the SSL connection The most likely causes are
303. lt Reverse amp underline 5 Invisible reverse Invisible reverse amp underline 6 Reverse and flash gt Reverse underline amp flash 7 Invisible reverse amp flash Invisible reverse underline amp flash Attributes occupy a character space ESC F0 Attributes do not occupy a character space ESC F 1 Half intensity mode ESC 5h Full intensity mode ESC 51 Page base attribute mode ESC 2h Line base attribute mode ESC 21 Select status line visual attribute s ESC 3 v 0 Normal 2 Normal underline 1 Reverse 3 Reverse underline Set cursor style to ESC 0 Cursor not displayed 3 Flashing underline cursor 1 Flashing block cursor 4 Steady underline cursor 2 Steady block cursor Enable 132 columns per line ESC 3h Enable 80 columns per line ESC 31 EDITING MODES Autowrap mode on ESC 7h Autowrap mode off ESC 71 New line mode on ESC 6h New line mode off ESC 61 DOWN key sends CTRL J ESC 9h DOWN key sends CTRL V ESC 91 Turn on write protect mode ESC Turn off write protect mode ESC Turn on protect mode ESC amp Turn off protect mode ESC C 71 Host Command Summary EDITING DATA Enable page edit mode ESCN Enable line edit mode ESCO Enable insert mode ESC q Enable replace mode ESCr Load a replacement character ESC e Insert a replacement character at cursor position ESCQ Insert replacement characters at cursor position ESC Insert line of replacement characters on current line ESCE Inser
304. m then select either 5555_B01 monochrome or 5555_C01 colour for display or 5553 B01 for printing 6 Specify if you want the right or left Control keys to perform the same function as the keypad Enter or Reset keys respectively 7 Specify the IBM5250 Monochrome setting Note that all IBM 5250 models support both monochrome and colour display When monochrome is selected characters will be displayed in green and intense fields will be displayed in white When monochrome is not selected the settings specified in the Attributes dialog box described in the Setup Menus chapter will be used for the display 8 Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 12 2 IBM 5250 Emulation Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box the
305. m of ten characters 2 14 Getting Started 5250 Printer Options 5250 Printer ptions OKE x Printer Environment Device Name T Mfg Type and Model MSGQ Name MSGQ Library Font Paper Source 1 Paper Source 2 MFR Envelope Hopper ASCII899 Support Don t Report w WSCST Name WSCST Library This dialog box is displayed by clicking the 5250 Options button in the TCP IP Telnet Configuration dialog box when TN5250 is not suppressed and the IBM 5250 Model is set to 3812 1 a printer Device Name Specifies the name of the printer device IGC Feature This is always set to Don t Report Transform Specifies whether the printer will use the host print transform function to generate ASCII printer data This is always set to Yes The Mfg Type and Model option must specify the printer manufacturer type and model Mfg Type and Model Specifies the manufacturer type and model of the printer The entry must exactly match an AS400 printer type string including the asterisk character The following valid entries are for the IBM AS 400 V3R1 Note that the list can change according to AS 400 settings IBM2380 IBM2381 IBM2390 IBM2391 IBM3812 IBM3816 IBM3912HP IBM3916HP IBM39302 IBM39303 IBM4019 IBM4019HP IBM4029 IBM4029HP IBM4037 IBM4039HP IBM4070 IBM4070EP IBM4072 IBM4076 IBM42011 IBM42012 IBM42013 IBM42021 IBM42022 IBM42023 IBM42071 IBM42072 IBM42081 IBM42
306. m or user Field 10 Displays NUM when Num Lock is activated otherwise this field is blank Field 11 Displays INS when Insert mode is activated In Replace mode default this field is blank Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where PT250 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the PT250 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the PT virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box 15 5 PT250 Emulation Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout 33O S 39071 WNN u uA p le1 u B ae sy yoLsq u suonound sdeS y ay uo spu B au Aq pa yedipul se uonounj s y p yueuuun V 0 q IH3SNID aBesn y IPULIUON Besn y 1IV H31N3 z Na9a A ana 9 S tv gt 6 8 L gyl avLiova WHO 00 97N NWAN ews p ll q elun WSN apo ebueyo WHO abie7 p ll qelun 91n ldd bdd NANNAN d13H uolounj 9 660 e Oldd Old 64d 64 S LASYVHO peylys USUM GVLMOVAE Se suo oun AVL C 15 6 PT250 Emulation Displaying Alternate Characters PT250 mode uses two character sets called Standard and Alternate to display characters Both sets
307. man 36 Romanian C 18 Host Command Summary 12 Swedish 13 Norwegian 14 French 38 SCS 39 Russian 40 Latin American Key position mode set key position Key position mode reset char codes North American Greek selection set North American North American Greek selection reset Greek keyboard Program alphanumeric key for see below Program function key for see below CSI 81h CSI 811 CSI 57h CSI 571 DCS y ST DCS x ST Key Mod Func UDS Dir Key Mod Func UDS Dir Key VT PC Keyboard Mod Modifier Key 11 F1 F1 0 none Normal 12 F2 F2 1 Normal 13 F3 F3 2 Shift 14 F4 F4 3 Alt 15 F5 F5 4 Alt Shift 17 F6 F6 5 Control 18 F7 F7 6 Shift Ctrl 19 F8 F8 7 Alt Ctrl 20 F9 F9 8 Alt Ctrl Shift 21 F10 F10 23 F11 F11 24 F12 F12 Func Local function number 25 F13 26 F14 UDS User defined sequence 28 F15 29 F16 Dir UDS Direction 31 F17 0 none Normal 32 F18 1 Local 33 F19 2 Remote 34 F20 Program key action CSI z None none 0 Lock keys amp modifiers 1 Restore factory defaults 2 Recall key definitions 3 Program key free memory report t total bytes f free CSI t ft y Request program key free memory CSI x Request key definition n Key station number m Modifier key Normal Shift Alt Alt Shift Control Shift Ctrl Alt Ctrl Alt Ctrl Shift CSI n m w C 19 Host Command Summary Request ke
308. me useful for spreadsheets In Block mode this specifies 1 page mode transmission Selecting 80 x 25 will enable 25 rows of 80 columns to be displayed at the same time In Block mode this specifies 1 page mode transmission Block Mode Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines how data is transmitted to the host When unselected each character entered from the keyboard is immediately sent to the host which processes it then echoes it back to the display When Block mode is selected characters are displayed but not sent to the host until the Enter key is pressed The size of the block of characters is determined by the Line Block Mode option 6 36 Setup Menus Line Block Mode Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines how much data is transmitted when the emulation is in Block mode and the Enter key is pressed When unselected the contents of the screen page will be sent to the host When selected the contents of the current cursor line will be sent Multinational Character Sets Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines which characters may be generated from the keyboard When unselected the character set for the keyboard nationality specified in the Emulation Settings dialog box is mapped to GO the default character set mode as indicated on the status line In effect national characters from the Additional character set are swapped with S
309. mission of protected areas ESC 1h Enable transmission of selected characters only ESC 171 End of block indicator character s ESC l 0 no 1 FF 2 ETX 3 EOT 4 CR 5 DC3 End selected area ESC G Enter edit mode ESC 10h Enter interactive mode ESC 101 Function according to ANSI rules ESC 531 Function as VT131 terminal ESC 53h Line termination characters ASCII decimal ESC s Space compression mode off ESC 131 Space compression mode on ESC 13h Start selected area ESCF Transmission occurs immediately ESC 14h Transmission waits for host ESC 141 Transmit block of data ESC 5 Transmit scrolling region ESC 16h Transmit VT131 or ANSI partial page ESC 161 PRINTING Auto print off ESC 4i Auto print on ESC 5i Form feed at end of print ESC 18h No form feed at end of print ESC 181 Print controller on ESC 5i Print controller off ESC 4i C 5 Host Command Summary Print cursor line ESC 1i Print page ESC i Print page prints complete page ESC 19h Print page prints scrolling region only ESC 191 REPORTS Report compatibility level ESC gt c Report current colour ESC M Report cursor position ESC 6n Report keyboard nationality ESC 26n Report operating status ESC 5n Report terminal emulation mode ESC 0 Report VT terminal identity ESC 0c Report VT terminal identity ESC c Report VT terminal identity ESCZ ANSI VT500 Emulation When running the VT500 7 or 8 bit emulation the foll
310. mmand Summary FUNCTION KEYS Begin user key definition mode ESC j Default definition for f1 key ESC p Default definition for f2 key ESCq Default definition for f3 key ESCr Default definition for f4 key ESCs Default definition for f5 key ESCt Default definition for f6 key ESCu Default definition for f7 key ESC v Default definition for f8 key ESC w Define f key ESC amp f Disable User System amp Menu and label Modes ESC amp jS Enable User System amp Menu and label Modes ESC amp jR Enable f keys amp remove labels and status line ESC amp j Enable amp display Modes labels ESC amp j A Enable amp display user function key labels ESC amp jB End user key definition mode ESC k Replace key labels with character string ESC amp j n L s Restore labels ESC amp jC GENERAL OPERATION 7 bits amp existing parity ESC amp k OI 8 bits amp no parity ESC amp k 11 Audible tone disabled ESC amp k0D Audible tone enabled ESC amp k1D Check parity no ESC amp s0Z Check parity yes ESC amp s1Z Configuration menus locked ESC amp q1L Configuration menus unlocked ESC amp q0L Data speed high ESC amp s1X Data speed low ESC amp s0X DC2 not inhibited ESC amp sOH DC2 inhibited ESC amp s 1H Delay one second ESC Display functions mode disabled ESCZ Display functions mode enabled ESC Y Enter VT220 7 bit mode 25 line display keypad F1 F4 mapped to top left F1 F4 keys F5 F12 as per VT220 ESC amp k1 Hand shake not
311. mmands list box Click the Insert at Current button Click OK when you have finished The toolbar will immediately be updated Removing A Button Or Space 1 Click the down arrow button to the right of the Current Tool box to display the buttons currently in the toolbar Click on the button or space to be deleted so that it is displayed in the Current Tool box Click the down arrow button again to display the Command options Click the Delete Current button to remove the button or space from the toolbar Click OK when you have finished Saving The Button Tools When you have finished defining button tools you can save them so that they will be reasserted when the emulator is loaded or reset by selecting Save Session in the File menu Assigning User Defined Functions You can enter a definition of your own in the Current Tool text box The definition can contain key functions and control characters to be actioned as well as normal text 6 106 Setup Menus Specifying Key Functions You can cause a key function to be actioned by including the virtual key name of the key enclosed by the lt and gt characters You may omit the VK_ and VT_ parts etc of the virtual key name For example the Enter key would be specified as lt ENTER gt To send the function of a key combination type the lt character followed by the virtual key names linked together with characters and ending with the gt character For example
312. mode ESC X Execute self tests ESC P Execute self test while loading ESC z Print current screen Conv or selected page Block ESC 0 zero Read buffer Block mode ESC lt Read emulation configuration ESC Read with address Block mode ESC Read with address extended Block mode ESC J Read with address all Block mode ESC Read with address all extended Block mode ESC K Read with all attributes Block mode ESC Q Reinitialize Block mode ESC q Set buffer address Block mode DC1 Set buffer address extended ESC C Set emulation configuration ESC v Soft reset ESC p Text start Block mode STX Text end Block mode ETX Sound bell BEL C 65 Host Command Summary KEYBOARD Define Return key Conversational mode ESC u Lock keyboard ESCc Unlock keyboard ESC b Simulate function key ESC d REPORTS Report cursor address ESCa Report emulation status ESC Report firmware revision level ESC _ ANSI Mode CHARACTER SETS Select GO character set ESC Select G1 character set ESC Shift out to GO character set SI Shift out to G1 character set SO CURSOR Autowrap enabled ESC 7h Autowrap disabled ESC 71 Clear tab stops 0 cursor position 2 or 3 all ESC g Cursor enabled ESC 25h Cursor disabled ESC 251 Horizontal tab HT LF is LFCR new line mode ESC 20h LF is LF only ESC 201 Move cursor left one column BS Move cursor left columns ESC D Move cursor right
313. mulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details The TVI 950 and TVI 955 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the Tele Video 950 and 955 terminals respectively The Unisys T27 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Unisys T27 terminal Refer to the Unisys T27 Emulation chapter for details The Viewdata 40 Viewdata 80 and Viewdata Split modes enable access to a viewdata service using one of three display formats as described in the Viewdata Mode section later in this chapter The VT PCTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed for the PC Term mode supported by DEC This is the same as the VT510 emulation except that keyboard scan codes are sent on key press release instead of ASCII codes by default The VT52 and VT100 emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT52 and VT100 terminals respectively Refer to the DEC VT Emulations chapter for details The VT500 7 Bit and VT500 8 Bit emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT320 terminal the difference is in their treatment of 8 bit control codes 2 5 Getting Started When VT500 7 Bit is selected all 8 bit codes are converted to their 7 bit equivalents whereas VT500 8 Bit leaves 8 bit codes unchanged If you are using VT200 applications select VT500 7 Bit Refer to the DEC VT Emulations chapter for details The VT HP
314. mulation Wyse Emulations Describes features of the Wyse WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 emulations Initialization Commands Describes commands that can be included in the registry and on the command line to specify the emulator start up configuration Virtual Key Names Lists all the virtual key names that enable you to include a specific key function in a user definition Character Sets Shows the supported character set code tables Introduction Appendix C Host Command Summary Lists the host commands that are supported in each terminal emula tion mode Appendix D Product Specification Describes the level of support provided by each terminal emulation Terms amp Conventions This User s Guide uses the following terms and conventions 1 When references to keys on the keyboard are shown linked by a plus sign this means that two or more keys have to be pressed at the same time For example press Alt F means press and hold down the Alt key press the F key then release both keys Click means position the mouse pointer over an element on the display then quickly press and release the specified mouse button Double click means position the mouse pointer over an element on the display then quickly press and release the specified mouse button twice in quicksuccession Drag the pointer means hold down the left mouse button or button assigned with the select function and slide the mouse so that a sel
315. mulator is loaded or reset by selecting Save Session in the File menu The Toolbar Assigning User Defined Functions You can enter a definition of your own in the Current Tool text box The definition can contain key functions and control characters to be actioned as well as normal text Specifying Key Functions You can cause a key function to be actioned by including the virtual key name of the key enclosed by the lt and gt characters You may omit the VK_ and VT_ parts etc of the virtual key name For example the Enter key would be specified as lt ENTER gt To send the function of a key combination type the lt character followed by the virtual key names linked together with characters and ending with the gt character For example Alt F4 would be specified as lt ALT F4 gt To send the function of a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For example F2 then F3 then F4 would be specified as lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt F4 gt Specifying Characters There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character For example the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries _027 Decimal value underscore character followed by a 3 digit number 033 Octal v
316. munications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details BQ 3107 Emulation The Status Bar The status bar displayed along the bottom of the window will show the status of various operations RUN BLOCK P DISCT L81 C81 3187 LINE Fi F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FIO Fit F12 F13 F14 F15 Field1 This will always display RUN indiocating that the line shown corre sponds to normal operation Field2 Indicates whether you are in Block or Character mode In Block mode keyboard entered data is displayed and processed locally allowing you to edit it before a block of data is sent to the host In Character mode keyboard entered data is sent simultaneously to the host and the display You can change the mode using the Operating Mode option in the BQ 3107 Settings dialog box Field3 This will display a bell symbol when the terminal emulation rec
317. n Televideo 955 Display Terminal Operator s Manual 131969 00 B Sept 1985 Limitations Page print flip mode not supported Serial configuration commands not supported Select character set commands not supported Unisys T27 Specification Burroughs T27 Programmer s Reference Manual 1196904 Aug 1986 Limitations Print protocol printer sessions and auxiliary i o are not supported Some local only keyboard ctrl and esc commands are not supported Data sharing and scratchpad functions are not supported Wyse 60 Native Emulation Specification WY 60 Programmer s Guide 880261 01 Rev A Limitations Only 16 colours supported not 64 Some colour commands are not supported No page edit mode Modem and aux port commands not supported No Keyboard scan code mode Character cell size commands not supported Product Specification Function key label save commands not supported Automatic font loading not supported Remote caps lock commands not supported Ignore nulls commands not supported Attribute overwrite mode not supported Disable intensity commands not supported Some select personality commands not supported Wyseword mode not supported Wyse 50 50 TVI 910 925 950 ADDS A2 HZ 1500 Wyse PC Term Specification WY355 ES Reference Manual 883227 01 Rev A Limitations All modes As Wyse 60 above where applicable TVI modes Select Print Line termination characters
318. n the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the HP 700 92 96 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box This emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hewlett Packard 700 92 2392A 2622A 70094 and 70096 terminals Click OK to close the dialog box Display the HP Settings dialog box from the Settings menu and specify the required Terminal ID setting 70092 default 2392A 2622A 70094 or 70096 then click OK to close the dialog box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection select Modem specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options
319. n ESC 20h Select relative origin mode ESC 6h Set tab stop at current cursor position ESCH Tab cursor backward tabs ESC Z Tab cursor forward tabs ESC I C 3 Host Command Summary DISPLAY Scroll display down lines ESC T Scroll display up lines ESC S Select 80 column display mode ESC 31 Select 132 column display mode ESC 3h Select invisible display ESC 751 Select normal colour display mode ESC 51 Select reverse colour display mode ESC 5h Select thin line graphics in ANSI BBS mode ESC 10m Select visible display ESC 75h Set top t and bottom b margin positions ESC t br EDITING Delete characters from cursor position right ESC P Delete lines from cursor position down ESC M Enable all characters to be erased ESC 6h Enable erasure of unprotected characters only ESC 61 End protected area ESC W Erase characters amp attributes from cursor right ESC X Erase line portion 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC K Erase screen portion 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC J Insert blank lines ESC L Insert space characters ESC Protect characters with attribute s ESC Select insert mode ESC 4h Select replace mode ESC 41 Start protected area ESC V GENERAL OPERATION Cancel current ESC sequence amp display error CAN Local echo mode on ESC 121 Local echo mode off ESC 12h Reset features in ESC h commands ESC 1 Reset terminal emulation ESC c Rest
320. n Meaning White 75 80 Row column cursor position Readiness amp System Connection T A J This indicates that a Telnet session is running This indicates that the protocol for communication between an application program and the IBM 3270 emulation is not system network architecture SNA This indicates that the current screen is a Network Virtual Ter minal screen This screen is displayed when IBM 3270 mode is entered before a telnet session has been initiated with the remote host This enables you to enter login text Note that you will be returned to this screen when you log off This indicates that the current screen is an IBM 3270 screen This screen will be displayed when you have initiated a Telnet session with the host This indicates that you are currently communicating with the host operating system not the application IBM 3270 Emulation Do Not Enter The Do Not Enter X symbol will appear when input from the keyboard or mouse will not be accepted by the host except Reset and SysReq Symbols to the right of this will indicate the reason Pressing the Reset key will remove some of these symbols from the status line Note that the emulation includes typeahead capability so that in most cases you can continue to enter data without waiting for the Do Not Enter message to clear as the data will be stored until the host is ready X PROGnnn Indicates that a programming error in the d
321. n SGI 697 500 Swedish SWB 697 278 Norwegian NWB 697 277 French FAB 697 297 Spanish SPB 697 284 Portuguese PRB 697 37 Japanese Kanji Katakana JKB 1172 290 300 Korean KOB 1173 833 834 Simplified Chinese RCB 1174 836 837 Traditional Chinese TAB 1175 37 835 Hebrew New Code NCB 941 424 Hebrew Old Code 941 803 Thai THB 1176 838 Greek GNB 925 875 Cyrillic CYB 960 880 Turkish TRB 1152 1026 Russian RUB 1150 1025 Czech CSB 959 870 Slovak SKB 959 870 Polish POB 959 870 Icelandic ICB 697 871 Arabic 697 420 6 60 Setup Menus Unisys T27 Settings Unisys T27 Settings Oke x Environments Tab Settings Protocol None Y Tx Number p v Beep on NAK Downstream Terminal Por None z This dialog box is displayed by selecting Unisys T27 in the Settings menu General Settings Protocol Factory default None This can be set to None Poll Select or Point to Point Selecting Poll Select will enable up to three environments Only one environment can be enabled when Point to Point is selected Tx Number Factory default 0 This specifies a sequence of numbers to ensure correct sequencing of messages sent between the Unisys T27 emulation and the host The valid numbers are as follows 00 None 01 0 1 no checking 02 A no checking 03 0 1 checking 04 A checking 05 0 1 with reset 06 A with reset 07 0 9 08 0 99 09 0 999 10 0 9 with reset 11 0 99 with reset 12 0 999 with
322. n applications written for the DEC VT340 terminal in ReGIS mode The Tek4014 emulation enables you to run applications written for the Tektronix 4010 and 4014 terminals The VT640 emulation enables you to run applications written for the Retrographics VT640 terminal The W2119 emulation enables you to run applications written for the Westward 2119 terminal DEC Suite Options The VT Terminal ID option applies to the DEC VT emulations It specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported The Cursor Moves Right to Left option applies to the DEC VT Ansi BBS AIXTerm AT 386 and Sco Console emulations It enables you change the direction in which the text cursor moves across the display Getting Started The High Function Terminal option is displayed when the AIXTerm emulation is selected This enables you to switch between HFT High Function Terminal mode default and VT100 mode BQ 3107 Option The VIP Mode option enables you to set the VIP mode to 7700 or 7760 HP 700 92 96 Option The HP Model option specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request This can be set to 70092 default 2392A 2622A 70094 or 70096 Not all features of the specified terminal may be supported IBM 3151 Option The setting of the IBM 3151 Model option identifies the terminal mode
323. n click Next 9 The following four dialog boxes provide further configuration options which are described in chapter 2 Click Next to advance through the dialog boxes Automate Login Process Printer Port Settings GUI Overrides Aux Port Settings 10 When you have made your selections click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager 11 In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box 2 Set the Alpha Emulation option to IBM5250 then click OK The terminal will now be in Network Virtual Terminal mode 3 Display the Settings menu and select IBM 5250 to display the IBM 5250 Settings dialog box 4 Specify the IBM 5250 Model This is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the terminal model may be supported This also allows you to specify whether the display is treated as monochrome green for normal characters white for intense attribute or colour for attributes The terminal models currently supported and their display charac
324. n status line h hour 24 m minutes Display controls on Display controls off Rectangular fill c fill character sr start row sc start column er end row ec end column EDITING ESC 2 ESC 1 ESC 0 ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC h m p ESC 3h ESC 31 ESC c sr sc er ec z Selective erase line 0 from to 2 all ESC K Selective erase screen 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC J GENERAL OPERATION Enter HP 700 92 96 mode 0 zero ESC amp k0 Select C1 7 bit control mode ESC SPF Select C1 8 bit control mode ESC SP G KEYBOARD Set national keyboard ESC 2 space r 1 American 14 French 2 British 15 Spanish 3 Belgian 16 Portuguese 4 Canadian 19 Hebrew 5 Danish 22 Greek 6 Finnish 29 Turkish 7 German 31 Hungarian 8 Dutch 33 Slovak 9 Italian 34 Czech 10 Swiss French 35 Polish 11 Swiss German 36 Romanian 12 Swedish 38 Serbian 13 Norwegian 39 Russian Select application keypad mode ESC 66h Select numeric keypad mode ESC 661 Set DEC keyboard mode ESC 99h Reset DEC keyboard mode ESC 991 PF KEYS Clear all PF keys ESC P0 11ESC Lock PF keys ESC P1 01ESC Program a PF key ESC P ESC Host Command Summary PRINTING Enable bidirectional printing ESC 7i Disable bidirectional printing ESC 61 Enable printer tablet to talk directly to host one way ESC 9i Disable printer tablet from talking directly to host ESC 8i
325. n the Script window To change the order of the script lines use the up and down arrow buttons to the right of the Script window Repeat this procedure for each prompt as required If you want to edit one of the script lines select the line in the Script window then click Remove to send it to the edit boxes on the left Make the change s then click Add to send it back to the script Note that this will now be the last line of the script When the Script window contains all the required responses to the relevant prompts in the correct order click Finish 2 30 Getting Started Printer Port Settings The Printer Port Settings dialog box provides several print options The options available depend on whether you are running TeemTalk for Windows CE or XPe TeemTalk for Windows CE Printer Port Settings OR x Printer Port Parallel Cable on LPT1 x Use Network Printer LPR s Advanced FormFeed Terminator Auto Line Feed Output Character Set p Seconds Close Delay 150 Latin 1 x TeemTalk for Windows XPe Printer Port Settings Print Printer OK Acrobat PDF writer on LPT1 Apple Laserwriter NT 51 8 on COM Cancel Generic PostScript Printer on LPT1 hd ii Advanced LPD Hostname Use Network Printer LPR Through Print Action Print Direct To Port LPT1 JV PassThru Auto Line Feed FormFeed Terminator Output Character Set ISO Latin 1 x
326. n to display the New Connection dialog box 2 Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed 3 Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box 4 Select the IBM 5250 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box 5 Select the IBM 5250 Model This is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the terminal model may be supported This also allows you to specify whether the display is treated 12 1 IBM 5250 Emulation as monochrome green for normal characters white for intense attribute or colour for attributes The terminal models currently supported and their display character istics are listed below Type Display Rows x Columns 5291 1 Monochrome 24 x 80 5292 2 Colour 24 x 80 5251 11 Monochrome 24 x 80 3179_2 Colour 24 x 80 default 3196_Al Monochrome 24 x 80 3180_2 Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477_FC Colour 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477_FG Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3486_BA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487_HA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487_HC Colour 24 x 80 5555_B01 Monochrome 24 x 80 5555_C01 Colour 24 x 80 The printer models supported are listed below 3812 1 Single byte printer 5553 B01 Double byte printer If double byte character sets e g Japanese are supported and you wish to use the
327. nabled ESC 4h Pad character is null ESC gt 71 Pad character is space ESC gt 7h C 51 Host Command Summary Read cursor character ESC Read cursor character normal mode ESC gt 231 Read cursor character erase mode ESC gt 23h GENERAL OPERATION Action all control characters except CR amp HT ESC gt 14h Action all control characters including CR amp HT ESC gt 141 DOS merge mode disabled ESC gt 251 DOS merge mode enabled ESC gt 25h Host notification mode disabled ESC gt 161 Host notification mode enabled ESC gt 16h Local echo mode on ESC 121 Local echo mode off ESC 12h Reset to initial state ESCc Tab characters separate fields enabled ESC gt 17h Tab characters separate fields disabled ESC gt 171 KEYBOARD Application program command ESC _ ESC Menu 0 Ctrl Shift Help 4 Help 1 Shift Menu 5 Shift Help 2 Ctrl Menu 6 Ctrl Help 3 Ctrl Shift Menu 7 Cursor movement keys immediate effect ESC gt 131 Cursor movement keys require host permission ESC gt 13h E2 mode enabled Enter 4 ESC sequences ESC gt 21h E2 mode disabled Enter functions as normal ESC gt 211 Escape key disabled ESC H Escape key enabled ESC I Flow control codes from kbd not sent immediately ESC gt 15h Flow control codes from keyboard sent immediately ESC gt 151 Function keys F PF PA terminated with CR ESC gt 18h Function keys not terminated with CR ESC gt 181 Hard keyboard lock disabled ESC Hard ke
328. name To program a soft button so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other keys together type the lt character followed by the virtual key names linked together with plus sign characters and ending with the gt character 6 101 Setup Menus For example to program a button so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together enter the following characters in the Command box lt ALT F4 gt To program a button so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For example to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the Command box lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt F4 gt Specifying Characters There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character For example the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries _027 Decimal value underscore character followed by a 3 digit number 033 Octal value backslash character followed by a 3 digit number u001B Unicode value backslash and u characters then unicode value E Control key value represen
329. name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 14 1 MDIS Prism Emulations For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the MDI P12 P8 or MDI Prism 9 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box Display the File menu from the command bar
330. nctI nS aa a saanssiqangiasicanaqancascanisanakiaaquycayuayianhus 9 3 Key COdesSu aa am as aan SR u halus is 9 5 HP 700 92 96 Emulation 10 1 Session Configuratioh u u aS qay saa asas 10 1 W BI NIOeS yaa asahan hs costs EEE a A EEEE 10 1 Non WBT Mod u l l eo S aba E 10 2 Display Configuration 10 3 Keyboard M ppInpa l n N u E aS 10 3 Buttons amp Function Keys 10 5 Mode Selecties errire eaa e a ii E 10 5 Configuration Selection eee ceceseceeeeseeeeesseeesesseeeeeeeeesees 10 8 DS VICE COMO live L uman Saam aaa a apasaq ata d 10 8 Device Modes p us as h n ua ee e 10 10 Margins Tabs amp Start Column a aaaaassssas 10 11 KEV Programming eaa anr En EEEE A 10 13 Character Display Attributes 10 16 IBM 3270 Emulation 11 1 TNIV ODUCHLON mo mute m amp m E ETEA E EN e 11 1 Session Configuration icsse e aara Il 1 WBE Mode sdin a E R a aS 11 1 Non WBT Mod s a anaq RE m SR ua is 11 2 Network Virtual Terminal Mode 11 4 IBM 3287 1 Printer Support ccccccsccessecessceeseceesneeesseceeaeceeneeeeees 11 4 SYSREG Key SHDDOYTU a na a n awasqa ana ha yes 11 4 The StQtus Line sa aa au papa AS a us 11 5 Text Display ODUONS ere s l nna a n eon apa es 11 9 Keyboard Mapping
331. nd amp background colour ESC 2 fg bg m fg and bg are integers as listed below Dull Colour Bold 0 Black 8 1 Blue 9 2 Green 10 3 Cyan 11 4 Red 12 5 Magenta 13 6 Yellow 14 7 White 15 C 58 Host Command Summary Set inverse amp foreground amp background colour as above ESC 7 fg bg m Set normal foreground colour integer as above ESC F Set normal background colour integer as above ESC G Set reverse foreground colour integer as above ESC H Set reverse background colour integer as above ESC 1I Set graphic foreground colour integer as above ESC J Set graphic background colour integer as above ESC K Request current colour attribute integer as above ESC M CONTROLLING THE SCREEN DISPLAY Assign attribute s to following characters ESC m Default attributes 0 Bold on 1 Underline on 4 Flashing on 5 Inverse video on 7 Blank 8 Fill regions with attribute integer as below ESC L 0 Fill with current attribute 2 Select iBCSe2 compliance 1 Fill with normal attribute 3 Deselect iBCSe2 compliance Select page 1 6 ESC z Clear page FF Scroll display up lines insert blank lines ESC S Scroll display down lines insert blank lines ESC T Access bank 1 amp 2 characters using decimal values Clear tab stops 0 cursor position 3 all ESC g 0 255 ESC g CURSOR Cursor on ESC 25h Cursor off ES
332. nd Summary lt Button Status gt is of the format 00110LMR where LMR indicates which button caused the event lt Column gt and lt Row gt are the alphanumeric position of the mouse REPORTS Report application name amp version in DEC VT modes ESC 0 1234 c C 95 Host Command Summary Notes C 96 Product Specification Product Specification This appendix describes the level of support provided by each terminal emulation Introduction The following sections describe the level of support provided by each terminal emulation throughout the product range Note that your product version may not support all the terminal emulations listed here General Limitations Key click not supported Badge and Magnetic Card reader support are supported via Wedged data devices connected to the unit s keyboard No downloadable program module The keyboard layouts may differ but substantially provide the same capabilities as the native terminal No screensavers File Transfer protocols not supported on embedded products thin clients APIs not supported on embedded products thin clients Smooth Scroll and Variable Scroll rates not supported No graphics or APA graphics Product Specification Telnet Specification Implements RFC 854 855 856 857 858 860 1091 1408 1571 1572 Implements RFC 1205 2877 for IBM 5250 Implements RFC 2355 1576 1646 1647 for IBM 3
333. nd enter the LPD Hostname Clicking the Configure button will display a dialog box which enables you to specify various print settings LPD Device Settings i E LPD Device dev1 Printer Name Q Job Name U User Name J gt _ i Number of Copies Was Retries J0 Retry Delay 0 Secs 1 Add Banner O Debug Information You must specify the Printer Name The Job Name and User Name entries are optional the User Name will default to root if none is specified The Number of Copies to print is set to 1 by default You can specify how many times the LPR protocol will attempt to execute the print job before cancelling by setting the number of Retries and the number of seconds delay between each attempt When Add Banner is selected information about this print job will be printed with it You can display a message box which will indicate the progress of the print job by selecting Debug Information If supported clicking the Advanced button will display a dialog box that enables you to send printer specific commands to specify for example font size colour or page header and footer Advanced Printer Configuration OFE x Sequences To Send At Initialisation Init amp l6D At Termination Term E 2 34 Getting Started XPe Direct Print Data To A Network Printer To direct print data to a printer on the network when running Windows XPe select Use Network Printer LPR an
334. nderline attribute f1 N LABEL METETA t amp dD For any other attribute or combination of attributes substitute the last character in the second line D in the example above with the relevant character from the following table A B CODE F GIH II J KLMN OS Half Brightness eee eie e ee Underline ee ee o oo Inverse Video e e e e Flashing e e e e e Invisible e End Attribute When you have finished assigning character attribute commands to f keys press F9 to exit from the User Key Definition menu then F10 to enable the User Keys and display the defined attribute labels 10 16 IBM 3270 Emulation 11 IBM 3270 Emulation This chapter describes features of the IBM 3270 terminal emulation Introduction The IBM 3270 emulator provides emulation of all four models of the IBM 3278 alphanumeric terminal and also supports the IBM 3287 1 printer The terminal emulation supports Extended Attribute mode which allows different representation of highlighted fields and permits host definition of text colours Note that you can modify colours using the Attribute Settings dialog box but they cannot be saved as colours are mapped differently in this mode The emulation also includes typeahead capability so that you can continue to enter data without waiting for a prompt from the host Session Configuration WBT Mode This
335. nderline attributes ETX 6 Bold Flashing Inverse amp Underline attributes ETX7 Blank amp Underline attributes ETX 8 Inverse Blank amp Underline attributes ETX Flashing Inverse Blank amp Underline attributes ETX Flashing Inverse Blank amp Underline attributes ETX _ EDITING Insert number of blank characters from cursor position ESC Delete number of characters from cursor position ESC P Insert number of blank lines from cursor position ESC L Delete number of lines from cursor position ESC M Replace character mode ESC 41 Insert character mode ESC 4h Blank number of columns from cursor position ESC X Erase in field 0 from cursor 1 to cursor 2 all ESC N Erase in line 0 from cursor 1 to cursor 2 all ESC K Erase in page 0 from cursor 1 to cursor 2 all ESC J Enable erasure of unprotected characters only ESC 61 Enable all characters to be erased including protected ESC 6h Erasing characters clears display attributes to default ESC lt 51 Erasing characters retains display attributes ESC lt 5h ENCODING DATA Escape sequence introducer ESC Control sequence introducer ESC Device control string ESC P String terminator ESC Cancel CAN Abort control sequence amp display error SUB Set mode ESC m m m h Reset mode ESC m m m 1 FORMATTING DATA Move cursor to left margin of current line CR Move cursor down one line LF Move cursor down one line ESC D
336. ndicated by a button with a dark centre These buttons behave just like radio buttons in that clicking one will cause the previously selected button to be deselected Some options require you to type information in a text box such as the End of Line Characters option When an option has many possible settings these will be shown in a list box The Alpha Emulation option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is an example of this To make a selection using the mouse click the arrow button to display a drop down list box then click on the setting required If the list is long a scroll bar may be displayed To make a selection using the keyboard press the up or down cursor keys to cycle through the available settings until the one required is highlighted in the box 6 3 Setup Menus To select a dialog box option Mouse Click the check box button or list box The current setting is highlighted or surrounded by a dotted rectangle or both Keyboard Move to the option to be changed either by holding down the Alt key and pressing the key bearing the character underlined in the option if one is displayed or press the Tab key to move forward through the options left to right top to bottom or Shift Tab to move backwards until the required option is highlighted Press the Spacebar to toggle check boxes or buttons on or off To close a dialog box without actioning changes Mouse Click the Cancel button Keyboard Pres
337. ndicates full duplex mode HDX indicates half duplex mode LCL indicates local mode BLK indicates block mode HBLK indicates half duplex block mode HLD indicates that display update has been suspended Pressing the Hold key will toggle display update on and off Field5 gt AUX indicates that the emulation is in auxiliary print or transparent print mode lt AUX indicates that the emulation is in auxiliary receive mode AUX indicates that the emulation is in auxiliary receive mode and auxiliary print mode AUX indicates that a print screen operation is in progress Standard Status Line Field6 rrr cce indicates the current row and column position of the cursor Extended Status Line Field6 PROT indicates that Protect mode is on Field 7 WPRT indicates that Write protect mode is on when in Protect mode Field 8 INS indicates that Insert mode is on Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where Wyse keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the Wyse keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the WY virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box 19 5 Wyse Emulations Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout p ljJlus u uA poyesouab oie ped y Su unN y UO JOU suonouni pa eyoeI1g 44O SI 32907 WNN Uu uA p u f aie suollouni payeyoeIg ped y ou wny sdeo y ay uo spu B
338. nect emulator attempts to reconnect Command Line E emulator exits immediately E1 emulator does not exit E2 emulator attempts to reconnect Default Setting Message box displayed When the host closes the connection or the connection fails the emulator normally displays a message box giving you the option to reconnect cancel or exit These commands will disable the message box and cause the emulator to immediately perform the required option Disable New Session Warning Message Box Registry Entry SessionWarning off Command Line OS Default Setting Enabled A warning message is displayed by default when you attempt to open a new session while a session is currently open These commands enable you to disable the message box so that the emulator automatically closes the current session and opens the new session 20 5 Initialization Commands Disable Exit Message Box Registry Entry WarnExit off Command Line J Default Setting Enabled A message box will be displayed if you attempt to exit the emulator while a network session is still active These commands will disable the message box so that the emulator automatically closes the network connection when it is exited 20 6 Initialization Commands Session Configuration Start up Command Group To Action Registry Entry None Command Line Nname Default Setting Default You can specify more than one set of start up commands in the r
339. nes with a scroll region of 24 lines A row of function buttons is displayed along the bottom of the window These correspond to the function keys F1 through F8 on the keyboard f1 f2 3 4 AT amp T 5 6 7 8 4418 You can action a programmed function either by pressing the function key or click ing the equivalent button displayed on the screen The middle button has no function when clicked To program the function keys press any F1 F8 key shifted The Program Function Keys menu will be displayed PROGRAM FUNCTION KEYS Fi End Entry F Exit and Save F8 Exit f1 OP Each line relates to one particular function key and its button The two fields following the f key number allow you to enter a two line label of up to sixteen characters for the equivalent button on the screen These are followed by the definition line which contains an escape sequence by default Each definition can contain up to 50 ASCII characters To program an f key press the F1 key to move the cursor to the relevant line and use the cursor keys to move from one section of the line to another You must press the F1 key to end each definition line entry so that extra space characters are not sent to the host Note that using the cursor keys to move to the next line will cause the remainder of the definition line to be sent as spaces When you have finished defining the f keys press F7 to save the definitions and exit from the menu If you want to exit with
340. ng any of the DEC VT terminal emulations though some of the fields and buttons will be applicable to other emulations as well Q Local Pause VT500 7 Bit 1 1 001 001 Overstrike Mode Printer Ready Aux Ready 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Item 1 This displays two LEDs The first LED indicates whether or not you are connected to the host It will show red when not connected and green when you are connected The second LED indicates whether or not data is being sent to or from the host It will show dull green when there is no activity red when data is being sent to the host and bright green when data is being received from the host Item 2 This button enables you to switch between Local and Online mode The label indicates the mode you will switch to if the button is clicked Item 3 This button enables you to Pause or Resume scrolling data in the window The label indicates the action that will be taken if the button is clicked Item 4 Indicates the current terminal emulation Item 5 This displays the active session always 1 the current page number always 1 and the line column location of the text cursor Item 6 This indicates whether Overstrike Mode or Insert Mode is currently selected In Overstrike Mode default new characters will replace already existing characters at the cursor position When Insert Mode is selected new characters will be inserted at the cursor position without deleting existing characters which w
341. nitialization Commands Flashing Characters Enabled In All Sessions Registry Entry None Command Line FB Default Setting off This enables characters with the flashing attribute to be displayed as such in all session windows in addition to the currently focused window Reflection 4 Colour Support Registry Entry iR4colours on Command Line R4 Default Setting off These commands will cause the colours displayed by the emulator to be compatible with Reflection 4 software Graphics Redraw On Resize Registry Entry GraphicsRedraw off all on Command Line G0 2 Default Setting on Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations TeemTalk logs ReGIS or Tek graphics data in local memory by default so that if the window is resized the graphics can be quickly redrawn This command enables you to prevent logging of data log graphics data only default or log both text and graphics from which TeemTalk will use just the graphics data when the window is resized Note that specifying redraw text and graphics may cause TeemTalk to run out of memory The valid settings are as follows G off No redraw G0 off Noredraw G1 on Redraw graphics G2 alP Redraw text amp graphics 20 17 Initialization Commands Crosshair Cursor Size Registry Entry CrosshairSize 024 Command Line X 024 Default Setting 1024 Only applicable to v
342. nnected as will be displayed on the status line If the specified device is reJected by the server or host then an error message box will be displayed indicating the reason Associate This is available when the IBM 3270 Model option is set to 3287 1 a printer It is used to request that the device name of the printer associated with a particular terminal is assigned to this Telnet session The name of the terminal is specified here This is implemented as described in RFC 1647 TN3270E Options TN3270E in implemented as described in RFC 1647 These options should not be changed unless required by your System Administrator The Bind setting determines whether or not the server is allowed to send the SNA Bind image and Unbind notification to the emulator When Responses is selected positive and negative response handling is supported It allows the server to reflect to the emulator any and all definite exception and no response requests sent by the host application When SysRegq is selected some or all depending on the server of the functions of the SysReq key will be emulated and the server in an SNA environment The LU1 and LU3 Printer options are available when the IBM 3270 Model option is set to 3287 1 a printer They enable you to specify which printer type s to support 2 12 Getting Started TN5250 Options TN5250 Options i x rEnvironment Device Name User l Password gt S Library
343. ns will be automatically generated using the bitmaps in these files The Toolbar Specify the command to be performed when this button is clicked either by selecting from the Commands list or by typing your own definition in the Current Tool text box Click the Insert at Current button Click OK when you have finished The toolbar will immediately be updated Adding A Space Between Buttons 1 ON ym P PSS Click the down arrow button to the right of the Current Tool box to display the buttons currently in the toolbar Click on the button which will be to the right of the space to be added so that it is displayed in the Current Tool box Click the down arrow button again to display the Command options Select the Space option at the top of the Commands list box Click the Insert at Current button Click OK when you have finished The toolbar will immediately be updated Removing A Button Or Space 1 Click the down arrow button to the right of the Current Tool box to display the buttons currently in the toolbar Click on the button or space to be deleted so that it is displayed in the Current Tool box Click the down arrow button again to display the Command options Click the Delete Current button to remove the button or space from the toolbar Click OK when you have finished Saving The Button Tools When you have finished defining button tools you can save them so that they will be reasserted when the e
344. nselected The setting of this option determines how the emulation interprets received carriage return characters Selecting it will cause a line feed command to be appended to every carriage return command received Margin Bell Enabled Factory default Unselected This option enables or disables an audible warning when the cursor approaches the right margin column 71 or 123 8 Bit Mode Factory default Unselected This option determines whether characters are transmitted to the host in 7 bit or 8 bit format When unselected 8 bit characters are converted into 7 bit equivalents so shift in shift out characters are generated When this option is selected all characters are transmitted unchanged Swap Fnn PFnn Keys Factory default Unselected This option enables you to swap the functions of the keys mapped as PF1 through PF12 on your keyboard with the functions they have when used with the Alt key For example when this option is selected PF11 will function as Help when pressed on its own and as PF11 when used in conjunction with Alt 6 38 Setup Menus IBM 3151 Settings IBM 3151 Settings Operating Mode Row and Column Turnaround Char Fo y Ra x Ra x 80 Forcing Insert Insert Character Tab Operation Both Space v Field Enter Key Return Key Send Operation Return v Field Page V Auto Wrap Auto LF Auto New Line Terminal ID Model Default This dialog box is displayed b
345. nshifted PF keys work in Local Editing mode When set to None the unshifted function of PF keys will be disabled When set to Breakthrough unshifted PF keys will function immediately when pressed if they have been assigned functions by application software When set to As TX Prefix the function of unshifted PF keys will be sent to the host before a block of data is transmitted When set to As TX Suffix the function of unshifted PF keys will be sent to the host after a block of data is transmitted Send Key Effect Factory default Immediate The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing the Enter key when sending data to the host When Immediate is selected data will be sent to the host immediately without waiting for permission to transmit When Deferred is selected a code will be sent to the host notifying it that data is ready for transmission The keyboard will be locked until the host requests that the data is transmitted Transmit Protocol Factory default ANSI The setting of this option determines whether a partial page of data is transmitted in ANSI or VT131 format when the Send Partial Page option is selected When ANSI is selected Local Editing mode will function according to ANSI American National Standards Institute rules When VT131 is selected Local Editing mode will function in the same way as a VT131 terminal Select this option when running software written for the VT131 6 87 Setup
346. nt data to a specific port select Print Direct To Port and specify the Printer Port Selecting the FormFeed Terminator option will cause the printer to advance the paper to the top of the form when it has finished printing The Output Character Set option enables you to specify the character set used for printing when Print Direct To Port is selected This allows non ISO Latin 1 printers to be used Selecting Auto Line Feed will cause the printer to print at the beginning of the next line when a carriage return command is received When a serial port is selected clicking the Configure button will display a dialog box in which you can specify the baud rate parity flow control data bits and stop bits settings These options are described in the Serial Settings section Configuration of COMI joke E Baud Rate __ Data Bits 9600 8 Parity Stop Bits None zlih Flow Control Input If supported clicking the Advanced button will display a dialog box that enables you to send printer specific commands to specify for example font size colour or page header and footer Advanced Printer Configuration OFE x Sequences To Send At Initialisation Init amp l6D At Termination Term E 2 33 Getting Started CE Direct Print Data To A Network Printer To direct print data to a printer on the network when running Windows CE select Use Network Printer LPR a
347. nter Key option determines whether or not the right Control key performs the same function as the keypad Enter key The setting of the Carriage Return acts as Enter Key option determines whether or not the Return key performs the same function as the keypad Enter key Getting Started TCP IP Connection Settings The TCP IP Telnet Configuration dialog box can be displayed from the Connection Wizard Host Information dialog box by setting the Connection Type to TCP IP then clicking the Advanced button or the New Connection dialog box when in non WBT mode by selecting TCP IP in the Type list box then clicking the Configure button TCP IP Telnet Configuration ok Host Port Number Telnet Name Fa oo Local Port Number bo _ Enable Keep Alives Suppress pForce Negotiation Echo Binary v 7 EOR Ino v A rBreak Settings V TM with Break m _s2s0 options _ CR with Break Send Location Note that the options available and the default settings depend on the current terminal emulation Host Port Number This enables you to specify the Telnet port number The default Telnet port number 23 can be substituted with any valid 16 bit port number Specifying a number outside the valid range will cause the setting to default to 1 Ifan SSH Secure Shell connection is to be made set this to the host s SSH port number 22 is the default for SSH Local Port Number This enables you to specify the local
348. nu The emulation is in Character mode when the button does not display an asterisk Each character will be sent to the host as it is entered at the keyboard When Block mode is activated as indicated by an asterisk data entered at the keyboard will not be sent to the host until the Enter key is pressed In this mode displayed text may be edited locally before it is transmitted to the host Control codes such as CR carriage return and LF line feed are acted upon locally and are not transmitted to the host when Enter is pressed Remote Mode F4 The current setting of this button determines whether pressing an alphanumeric key causes a character to be sent to the host remote or only to the display local The button and F4 key toggles between Remote mode and Local mode The setting may be saved by selecting Save Session in the File menu The emulation is in Local mode when the button does not display an asterisk Pressing alphanumeric keys will cause characters to be sent to the display only When Remote mode is activated as indicated by an asterisk pressing alphanumeric keys will cause characters to be sent to the host 10 6 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Terminal Test F5 When this button or F5 key is pressed the HP 700 92 96 emulation will perform a self test and display a test screen showing all the displayable characters Memory Lock F6 This enables data to be locked on the display so that it is not scrolled o
349. o the left mouse button and how to redefine them Chapter 5 The Toolbar Describes how to use the TeemTalk for Windows XPe toolbar and assign functions to the buttons Chapter 6 Setup Menus Describes all the commands and setup dialog boxes that can be accessed via drop down menus in the command bar 1 1 Introduction Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Chapter 20 Appendix A Appendix B DEC VT Emulations Describes features of the DEC VT emulations BQ 3107 Emulation Describes features of the Bull BQ 3107 emulation DG 410 412 Emulation Describes features of the Data General D410 412 emulation HP700 92 96 Emulation Describes features of the Hewlett Packard HP700 92 emulation IBM 3270 Emulation Describes features of the IBM 3270 emulation IBM 5250 Emulation Describes features of the IBM 5250 emulation IBM 3151 Emulation Describes features of the IBM 3151 emulation MDIS Prism Emulations Describes features of the McDonnell Douglas Prism 8 Prism 9 and Prism 12 terminal emulations PT250 Emulation Describes features of the Prime PT250 emulation Siemens 97801 Emulation Describes features of the Siemens 97801 emulation TA6530 Emulation Describes features of the Tandem 6530 emulation Unisys T27 Emulation Describes features of the Unisys T27 e
350. of the lines on the display Telserv Format Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines how network data is treated When selected data will be treated in Tandem network server Telserv format When unselected data will be treated in serial format 6 48 Setup Menus Return Function Factory default Unselected This option specifies whether or not the function of the Enter key is defined by the application when in Block mode When selected the key is regarded as an application specific function key Normally this should be unselected Bell On Factory default Selected This option enables or disables an audible tone which is heard when the emulation warns you about something This needs to be selected when you want to use the Bell Column feature Bell Column Factory default 0 This option enables you to specify a particular column on the display which will cause an audible warning to sound when the cursor passes through it The valid range of column numbers is 1 to 80 Setting this option to 0 will disable the feature The Bell On option must be selected for this feature to work 6 49 Setup Menus IBM 3270 Settings IBM 3270 Settings OKE x r IBM 3270 Model p Right to Left Options 22795 274132 Colour gt Numeral Swap Symbol Swap r Rule Line Cross v Follows Cursor Keyboard Unlock Notice Board Options HE Delay jo EON Courier New
351. og box is only available if your version of TeemTalk supports graphics emulations It is displayed by selecting GIN Mouse in the Settings menu This enables you to specify the code which each mouse button sends when it is pressed and released Each definition can consist of a maximum of 10 characters The default settings are shown in the dialog box above and can be reasserted once changed by clicking the Default button Control characters are entered either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the ESC escape character can be entered by typing the characters and representing the keys Ctrl which when pressed together would generate the ESC character Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of ESC is 27 so this would be entered as _027 6 91 Setup Menus Attributes Attributes Foreground Background Screen Element kh mun j mumi Attribute Sample Text Preferences Flashing FL Underline UL Inverse IV Intensity INJ Column Sep CS Hidden HIJ Cancel Default Set Colour Ansi Palette mL Fm u LlUse Colours a Inverse Colours Swap Black White AutoColour Ansi Colours Disabled IColours Cleared with Attribute Attributes use Normal BG Use Italic with Int
352. ollows is a Macro Item 1 Displays EDIT or INSERT depending on the current mode Item 2 Indicates the number of new keystrokes that may be stored Item 3 Displays the current Fn key number Item 4 Displays the cursor position within the macro i e the number of key strokes from the start of the macro Item 5 Displays the contents of the macro 11 13 IBM 3270 Emulation 3 Use the Left or Right cursor keys to move the cursor one character position at a time through the macro or the Up or Down cursor keys to move 20 character positions at a time 4 Ifrequired press the Insert key to toggle between Insert and Edit mode as indicated in the status line 5 Make the required changes to the macro 6 To save the edit press Alt F3 7 Press Quit to exit Error Codes The following error codes may appear on the status line if an error occurs during recording or playback 9001 9003 9007 9010 9015 Exceeded the maximum number of allowed keystrokes Remedy Press the Record key to exit Record mode To record a new keystroke sequence either a Press the Record key and the target Fn key that has erasable data then enter the new data b Press the Record key and the target Fn key that has erasable data then press the Delete key to erase the recorded data for that key You pressed an invalid Fn key while performing the Record or Play function Remedy Press the Reset key You pressed
353. om In addition there is a single counter for the unit so concurrent sessions will start from subsequent values For example if session one uses TEST1 then session two will use TEST2 Where a device name collision occurs i e the device name is already in use on the host the host will ask again for the device name during the same connection In this 2 13 Getting Started case TEST1 TEST2 may all be tried in one connection until the host accepts one or all possibilities have been tried In the latter case the same name is sent twice in succession to indicate to the host all names have been tried If concurrent 5250 sessions are started before a previous session has negotiated an acceptable device name it is possible that the two sessions will access the counter simultaneously and not all possible names will be tried by each session This should not cause a problem unless the separate sessions use different modulo values for example session one device name TEST d4 and session two device name ANOTHER d100 or are connecting to different hosts Note There are separate counters for the IBM 3270 and IBM 5250 emulations User Password Library Menu These options enable you to specify the initial entries required on the standard startup screen so that it can be bypassed Each entry can be a maximum of ten characters Program This enables you to specify the name of the initial program to run The entry can be a maximu
354. option When this is set to DEC MCS the ASCII 7 bit and DEC Additional 8 bit character sets are used When this option is set to ISO Latin 1 the ASCII 7 bit and ISO Latin 1 Additional 8 bit character sets are used The Character Sets appendix shows all the tables of characters that may be selected If a character is a diacritical symbol e g or and this symbol does not appear on the keyboard an equivalent character can be used in some cases The diacritical symbols and the possible substitutes are shown below There are no equivalents for the circumflex accent and tilde mark Diacritical Mark Equivalent Character Acute accent Apostrophe Umlaut Double quote Grave accent Single quote Ring mark Asterisk or degree sign To compose a character first find the character you wish to compose in the left hand column of the following tables The two characters shown in the right hand column are the keys that are used to create it Several alternatives may be given for generating the same character A compose sequence is initiated by pressing the keys Alt C together followed by the key bearing the first character then the key bearing the second character Note The compose character sequence can also be initiated by pressing a key defined with the COMPOSE virtual key name A compose character sequence may be abandoned before completion by pressing the Delete key Pressing Alt C or the key defined with the COMPOS
355. ore saved features ESC 8 Save features char set attrib s cursor origin ESC 7 Select VT52 mode ESC 21 Select VT100 mode from VT320 mode ESC 61 p Select VT400 7 bit mode ESC 62 1 p Select VT400 8 bit mode ESC 62 p Select VT400 8 bit mode can be 0 or 2 ESC 62 p Select Wyse 60 mode ESC 42h Set features in ESC h commands ESC h Soft reset ESC p Sound audible tone BEL Transmit rate limited to 150 180 cps ESC 73h Transmit rate unlimited ESC 731 C 4 Host Command Summary KEYBOARD Backspace key performs backspace only ESC 67h Backspace key performs delete ESC 671 Data processing keys mode ESC 68h Disable key autorepeat ESC 81 Disable keyboard ESC Disable keyboard input ESC 2h Enable key autorepeat ESC 8h Enable keyboard ESC b Enable keyboard input ESC 21 Select cursor key application mode ESC 1h Select cursor key normal mode ESC 11 Select keypad application mode ESC Select keypad numeric mode ESC gt Typewriter keys mode ESC 681 LOCAL EDITING Data block for transmission is cursor line ESC 11h Data block for transmission is page ESC 111 Disable transmission of protected areas ESC 11 Edit key changes mode immediately ESC 16h Edit key waits for host to enable mode change ESC 161 Enable all selected areas to be transmitted ESC 15h Enable only cursor area to be transmitted ESC 151 Enable transmission of all characters ESC 17h Enable trans
356. ormation dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 15 1 PT250 Emulation Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button The PT250 emulation is configured using the PT250 Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and sele
357. ory default US CR This option applies to all emulations and specifies the ASCII characters used to indicate the end of a line and a block when a block of data is sent to the host When set to US CR the line terminator is a US character and the block terminator is a CR character When set to CRLF ETX the line terminators are the CR and LF characters and the block terminator is an ETX character Attribute Type Factory default Page The setting of this option determines whether display attributes are active to the end of the line or the end of the page The Character setting only applies to the WY 60 emulation and causes attributes to only apply to characters written to the screen The WY 50 ADDS A2 and HZ 1500 emulations only support the Page setting Code Page Factory default PC Multinational 437 This option determines the set of characters that form the second half of the multinational character set when in multinational mode as set by the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box 6 44 Setup Menus ASCII Font Factory default WY ASCII This option determines whether the Wyse ASCII or PC standard character set is used as the first half of the multinational character set when in multinational mode as set by the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box WPRT Attribute Factory default Dim This option applies to all emulations and enables you to specify the appearance
358. ote that the Column Sep CS option is only applicable to the IBM 5250 emulation and the Hidden option is only applicable to the Wyse 60 emulation Use Colours When selected the currently selected screen element will be displayed in the colours highlighted in the Foreground and Background colour palettes For default display deselect this option Inverse Colours Factory default Unselected When this option is selected characters with the inverse attribute will have the text foreground colour swapped with that of the text cell background 6 93 Setup Menus Swap Black White Factory default Unselected When selected anything that has the white attribute will be displayed as black and vice versa AutoColour Factory default Unselected This option is only applicable to the DEC VT terminal emulations When selected displayed characters are colour coded according to type For example all numeric characters are displayed in one colour while all alphabetic characters are displayed in another Deselecting this option will display characters according to the settings in this dialog box Ansi Colours Disabled Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause ANSI colour commands to be ignored Colours Cleared With Attributes Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether or not the foreground and background colours are cleared to the default colours when an ANSI clear attributes
359. out saving the settings press F8 2 48 Getting Started Viewdata Mode You can select one of three display formats for viewdata mode 40 column 80 column or Split Screen Selecting Viewdata 40 or 80 mode will enable a single viewdata page of 40 or 80 columns wide by 24 lines deep to be displayed Viewdata Split enables simultaneous display of two pages side by side each page consisting of 24 lines and 40 columns Receipt of a clear screen command will move the cursor to the home position of the opposite page and its contents will be erased ready for the next page The keys mapped as PF1 through PF4 have the following functions in viewdata mode PF1 PF3 Reveal PF2 PF4 Exitto ANSI mode 2 49 Getting Started Notes 2 50 Keyboard Configuration Keyboard Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the keyboard define key functions and compose special characters Keyboard Mapping The keyboard is mapped as close as possible to the terminal being emulated An llustration showing the mapping of key functions on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT style keyboard layout is shown in each terminal emulation chapter Special key functions supported by each terminal emulation can be mapped to keys using the predefined macros listed in the Define Key Macros dialog box as described in the next section Defining Key Functions You can redefine the function of keys on the keyboard using t
360. owing commands will be executed in addition those listed previously for ANSI VT 100 CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Assign attribute s to following characters Attributes Invisible 8 Flashing off Bold off 22 Reverse video off Underline off 24 Invisible off Non erase attribute on Non erase attribute off 0 or 2 CHARACTER SET SELECTION ESC m 25 27 28 ESC 1 q ESC q Assign G2 label to character set Assign G3 label to character set DEC Additional ISO Latin 1 Additional Assign G1 labelled set to 8 bit codes Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character Assign G2 labelled set to 8 bit codes Assign G3 labelled set to 7 bit codes Assign G3 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character Assign G3 labelled set to 8 bit codes Clear redefinable character set Load redefinable character set Preferred Additional set is DEC Preferred Additional set is ISO Latin 1 Select Multinational character set mode Select National character set mode Extra character sets ESC second is parameter ESC 5 A ESC ESCn ESCN ESC ESC o ESCO ESCI ESCP1 1 2 SP ESC ESC P ESC ESC P 0 u 5 ESC ESCP 1 u A ESC ESC 421 ESC 42h C 6 Host Command Summary DISPLAY Display host writable status line Display indicator status line Display no status line Send data to main display Send data to status line Display time o
361. owing line after the key END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY 6 You should then be able to connect to the server using your keyfile SSH Key File Permissions If you find that public key authentication does not work when you have copied your public key to authorized_keys it is probably because the file permissions on HOME HOME ssh or HOME ssh authorized_Keys are more permissive than SSH allows by default This may be resolved by executing the following on the server chmod go w HOME HOME ssh chmod 600 HOME ssh authorized_keys If this is not possible for some reason an alternative is to set StrictModes no in sshd_config however this is not recommended More information can be found at http www openssh com faq html 2 25 Getting Started Modem Connection Settings The Modem Settings dialog box can be displayed from the Connection Wizard Host Information dialog box by setting the Connection Type to Modem then clicking the Advanced button or the New Connection dialog box when in non WBT mode by selecting Modem in the Type list box then clicking the Configure button Modem Settings mi E Configuration Name Select a Modem Hayes Compatible on COM1 v Configure Country Code Area Code Telephone Number 44 1908 Dialing From Pericom Force long distance Dialing Properties Force local This enables you to define a particular modem configuration which can be saved under a specif
362. own to next unlocked line Ist column ESCE Move cursor down lines ESC B Move cursor down unlocked lines to 1st column ESC E Move cursor left columns ESC D Move cursor right columns ESC C Move cursor to column absolute ESC G Move cursor to line absolute ESC d Move cursor to absolute line 1 amp column c ESC 1 cH Move cursor to relative line 1 amp column c ESC 1 cf Move cursor up unlocked lines ESC A Move cursor up unlocked lines to 1st column ESC F Restore cursor amp attributes ESC Q Reverse index cursor up to next unlocked line ESCM Save cursor amp attributes ESC O Set tab stop at current cursor position ESCH Tab cursor backward tab stops ESC Z Tab cursor forward tab stops ESC I DISPLAY Clear display memory except locked lines ESC Display size ESC N 80 columns by 24 lines 1 80 columns by 48 lines 2 pages 2 132 columns by 27 lines 3 80 columns by 25 lines 4 Display error message string ESC ESC Display invisible ESC E Display memory 24 lines 1 page ESC gt 111 Display memory 48 lines 2 pages ESC gt 11h Display status line ESC T C 50 Host Command Summary Display system line data on line preserved ESC U Display system line blank ESC V Display visible ESC P Jump scroll enabled ESC gt 51 Lock lines screen line number to begin n of lines ESC 1 n u Next page 1 page one 2 page two ESC U Page down
363. ox then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection If necessary enter the appropriate information to establish an IBM host session in the Network Virtual Terminal mode screen When an IBM host session has been established the screen will switch out of Network Virtual Terminal mode and display the IBM 3270 emulation screen Note You will be returned to the Network Virtual Terminal screen when the connection to the IBM host has been closed IBM 3270 Emulation Network Virtual Terminal Mode Network Virtual Terminal N VT mode allows the operator to communicate with a network gateway in ASCID for routing logon etc before the full IBM terminal emulation protocol is established NVT mode is indicated by the symbol in the status line along the bottom of the display NVT mode displays an unformatted screen for data entry allowing most of the keyboard functionality for local editing However when the Enter key is pressed the line that the cursor is positioned on will be sent over Telnet as an ASCII string with CR LF terminators The cursor will then be positioned at the start of the next line ASCII data received over Telnet will also be displayed at the current cursor position A CR character will be actione
364. plate CE When running TeemTalk for Windows CE you can save the current session configuration as a connection template To make the emulator automatically attempt to make a host connection using the same settings the next time it is loaded display the File menu and select the Save Session option You can create multiple connection templates when the terminal is not in WBT mode any one of which can be selected for use The procedure is as follows 1 Inthe File menu select the Save Session As option to display the following dialog box Save Session As OKE x Save As File Name Untitled Saved Items V Keyboard Macros V Soft Buttons V Attributes V window Metrics V Text Rows V Buffer Rows V Connection V Terminal Settings 2 Inthe Saved Items box indicate which settings are to be saved by checking the boxes next to the relevant options 3 Inthe Save As File Name text box enter a descriptive name to enable it to be identified for future selection This description will be listed in the Open Session dialog box 4 Click the OK button to save the template settings If you specified a descriptive name that already exists a message box will ask you to confirm whether or not you want to overwrite the existing name with the new settings 6 5 Setup Menus Selecting A Connection Template CE The Open Session dialog box enables you to select a connection template to use when the terminal is not in WB
365. printer or not Data will be sent to the printer when an asterisk is displayed on this button To Display F3 This toggle function determines whether data is sent to the display or not Data will be sent to the display when an asterisk is displayed on this button Advance Page F4 When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function clicking this button or pressing F4 will cause paper in the printer to be advanced to the top of the next page Advance Line F5 When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function clicking this button or pressing F5 will cause paper in the printer to be advanced by one line Copy All F6 When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function clicking this button or pressing F6 will cause a copy of all lines from and including the cursor line to the last line in display memory to be sent to the printer The cursor will move to the leftmost column on the next line when the current line has been printed You can cancel printing at the end of the current line by pressing Return Note If the cursor is positioned on a line below the last display able line of data nothing will be sent to the printer Copy Page F7 When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function clicking this button or pressing F7 will cause a copy of all lines from and including the cursor line to the last line displayed on the screen to be sent to the printer The cu
366. pter for details The BQ 3107 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Bull BQ 3107 terminal Refer to the BQ 3107 Emulation chapter for details The DG 410 412 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Data General D410 and D412 terminals Refer to the DG 410 412 Emulation chapter for details The HP 700 92 96 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hewlett Packard 700 92 2392A 2622A 70094 and 70096 terminals This emulation is described in detail in the HP 700 92 96 Emulation chapter The HZ1500 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hazeltine 1500 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details The IBM 3151 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the IBM 3151 terminal Refer to the JBM 3151 Emulation chapter for information on this emulation The IBM 3270 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the IBM 3270 terminal Note that the initial display will be an ASCII text screen known as Network Virtual Terminal mode NVT mode for short The setting of the IBM 3270 Model option determines the size of the display and whether or not extended attributes are supported Refer to the JBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details Getting Started The IBM 5250 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive I
367. pter for details The VT HP220 emulation is based on the VT500 terminal series and includes the HP function keys F1 F8 not user programmable The terminal ID is set to VT220 The VT100 emulation is an enhanced version of the VT100 emulation that provides additional functionality such as colours It is the same as the VT UTF8 emulation except that it only supports ASCII characters 0 127 decimal The VT UTF8 emulation is an enhanced version of the VT100 emulation that supports non English and drawing characters It supports localization of the single byte and double byte character sets and all other languages supported by Windows Additional functionality such as colours is also provided The WY50 WY50 and WY60 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the Wyse WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 terminals respectively Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for information on these emulations The WYSE PCTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed for the PC Term personality supported by Wyse Keyboard scan codes are sent on key press release instead of ASCII codes by default Graphics Emulation Factory default ReGIS This option is only available if this version of TeemTalk supports graphics emulations and the Alpha Emulation option is set to one of the DEC VT Ansi BBS AIXTerm 6 28 Setup Menus AT 386 or Sco Console emulations The setting determines the graphics mode that will be enter
368. r Left 79 114 Print Screen 124 Cursor Right 89 115 Scroll Lock 125 Cursor Up 83 116 Pause 126 Cursor Down 84 117 Insert 75 Keypad Enter 108 118 Delete 76 Return 43 119 Home 80 Backspace 15 120 End 81 Tab 16 Is an integer that specifies the modifier key that is to be pressed at the same time as the defined key Oornone Normal 5 Control 1 Normal 6 Shift Control 2 Shift 7 Alt Control 3 Alt 8 Alt Control Shift 4 Alt Shift Is a number associated with a local function as listed below For example function number 0 makes the key or key modifier inoperative Function number 100 indicates a user defined sequence UDS and a UDS direction is defined following the slash delimiter 0 No Function 91 Backspace 93 Escape 100 UDS 92 Cancel 94 Delete Is the user defined sequence specified in Hex format Each hex code in this string represents a value transmitted by the defined key combined with the modifiers Esc Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 Is a delimiter Mod Function UDS UDS Direction Specifies the transmission direction Oornone Normal Host and or terminal default 1 Local Terminal only 2 Remote Host only C 14 Host Command Summary ANSI VT520 Emulation When running the VT520 emulation the following commands will be executed in addition to those listed for ANSI VT100 and VT500 Note that an asterisk before a command description indicates the command is accepted but not actioned
369. r Set Mode _ National Tertiary Device Attribute Answerback String _ Answerback Concealed This dialog box is displayed by selecting Emulation in the Settings menu Alpha Emulation Not available in WBT mode The setting of this option determines the current alpha emulation mode The ADDS A2 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details The AIXTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive an X terminal using X Windows The ANSI BBS emulation is a derivative of the ANSI device driver ANSI SYS supplied with all DOS based PCs and which provides the screen management for the DOS console screen PC based UNIX systems and Bulletin Board Systems BBS often rely on the ANSI emulation when being accessed by a PC In ANSI BBS mode the screen size is adjusted to 25 lines and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is automatically set to Ansi The setting of the Ansi Code Page option in this dialog box determines the characters available in the ANSI BBS set The AT 386 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the AT amp T AT 386 terminal The ATT4410 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the AT amp T Dataspeed 4410 terminal Refer to the AT amp T 4410 Emulation section in the Getting Sta
370. r Startup in the list box when defining the key Selecting Normal will cause the macro to be processed according to the current operating mode when the key or key combination is pressed The Current Macro Definitions box displays the key and key combinations that are currently defined The Type column indicates whether the macro is processed as normal blank remote R local L or on start up S You can remove the selected definition or delete all the definitions by clicking the relevant Remove button Defining A Key Or Key Combination 1 Click in the Program Key box then press the key or key combination to define The current definition will be displayed 2 Click in the With box then enter the new definition or make a selection from the list of Predefined Macros then click Apply 3 Specify how the macro is to be processed by selecting either Normal Remote Local or Startup in the list box 4 Click the Add button to accept the definition The new definition will be added to the Current Macro Definitions list 5 To save the definitions click OK to exit then select Save Session As in the File menu make sure the Keyboard Macros box is checked then click OK Keyboard Configuration Key Combinations amp Sequences You can program a key to perform the function of a combination or sequence of keys For example you can cause the F1 key to perform the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together or pressing t
371. r not pressing the Backspace key will cause characters to be deleted CR CR NULL Factory default Unselected This option must only be selected if you are going to use the QEDIT application It overcomes a bug within QEDIT that ignores the LF character if the terminal transmits CR LF Inserting a NULL after the CR character cures the problem 6 32 Setup Menus Display Form Feeds Factory default Selected When selected this will cause form feeds to be represented on the display as Fr characters Ignore Form Feeds Factory default Unselected When the emulator receives a form feed command from the host it normally results in a line feed on the display in HP 700 92 mode Selecting this option will cause the emulator to ignore all form feed commands received from the host Return Def Factory default M i e CR This enables you to define the function of the Return key Up to two characters may be used to define the key If a second character is a space it will be ignored To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the default code for the Return key function CR carriage return can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three d
372. raphics mode off ESCHCTRL C Received CR mode off ESC e4 Received CR mode on ESCe5 Run script in Wyse and TVI ADDS HZ enhanced modes Set MODEM port receive handshake Set MODEM port transmit handshake HOST COMMUNICATIONS ESC c s filename CR ESC c 2 handshake ESC c 4 handshake Select terminal emulation emulation Wyse 50 Wyse 50 Wyse 60 4 TVI 910 TVI 912 920 TVI 925 ADDS VP A2 HZ 1500 amp VT52 VT100 VT220 7 VT220 8 VT320 7 VT320 8 ESC emulation 6 QW A C 86 Host Command Summary Enhance mode on ESC Enhance mode off ESC SP Monitor mode on display control codes ESC U Monitor mode off ESC u or ESC X Block mode on ESCB Half duplex mode on ESC CESC DH Half duplex block mode on ESC D H ESC B Full duplex mode on ESC C ESC DF ACK mode 6 off 7 on ESC e Set MODEM port operating parameters ESC c 0 b s p w Set maximum data transmission speed ESC c 6 max Send terminal ID ESC SP Program answerback message ESC c answer CTRL Y Answerback message conceal lt send ESC c KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS Application key mode on ESC 3 Application key mode off ESC 2 Keyboard locked ESC or SI Keyboard unlocked ESC or SO Caps lock on ESCe amp Caps lock off ESC e Clear all programmable keys ESCcU Clear key definition ESC z key DEL Key repeat on ESCe Key repeat off ESCe Margin bell on ESCeM Margin bell off ESCeL Set margin bell at cur
373. rd entered characters are displayed on the screen as well as sent to the host When unselected characters are not displayed when they are transmitted unless the host echoes them back 6 73 Setup Menus Auxport Setup Terminal Emulation Auxport Setup Ti E Auxiliary Port Configure Functionality Bi directional i Open at session start up This dialog box is displayed by selecting Auxport in the Settings menu It enables you to specify a COM or LPT port for bidirectional output when in any DEC VT mode ANSI BBS Sco Console HP 700 92 or IBM 3151 mode The Functionality options enable you to set the auxiliary port as bidirectional and specify that it is to be opened at start up Clicking the Configure button will display a dialog box in which you can specify settings for the COM port The options in it are described in the Serial Settings section earlier in this chapter Configuration of COMI H E Baud Rate __ Data Bits 9600 8 Parity Stop Bits None z fi z Flow Control Input X 6 74 Setup Menus Terminal Settings Terminal Settings jok Display a E r Memory ns a pPreferences Rows Rows 144 _ Save Screen Before Clearing 4 Columns gq Page Size 24 x Z Vertical Coupling idth Horizontal Coupling Use 80 Column Font Page Width fso w Page Coupling r Cursor Type q NM
374. rder a Visual character attributes b Bottom line border VT420 REPORTS Tertiary device attribute request ESC c or ESC 0c Request extended cursor position report ESC 6n Request checksum of rectangular area ESC id p t l b r y id Request label Left column border p Page number b Bottom line border t Top line border r Right column border Request macro space report ESC 62n Request memory checksum report request label ESC 63 In Request multiple session status report ESC 85n Request window report ESC v C 11 Host Command Summary ANSI VT510 Emulation When running the VT510 emulation the following commands will be executed in addition those listed for ANSI VT100 and VT500 USER DEFINED KEYS Download definitions for user defined keys DCS c 1 m D D ST c O or none 1 O or none 1 m 0 2 or none 1 3 4 vertical bar D D are the key Clear all keys before loading new values 0 is default Load new UDK values clear old values only when redefined Lock the keys Do not lock the keys against future redefinition Defines the shifted function key Defines the unshifted function key Defines the alternate unshifted function key Defines the alternate shifted function key The final character Key definition strings follow and these are terminated by ST definition strings in the following format Key1 UDS UDS Direction Key2 UDS UDS Direct
375. re continuing with the recording or playback Note that local Fn key functions cannot be recorded The keys used to initiate recording and playback are shown below together with the equivalent virtual key names which can be used to assign the functions to any key on the keyboard 101 102 Key Keyboard Virtual Key Names Record Alt F7 IB_RECORD Pause Shift Pause IB_PAUSE Quit Alt Escape IB_QUIT Play Alt F8 IB_PLAY Edit Alt F3 IB_FEDIT Recording Keystrokes 1 Press Record to enter Record mode The status line will display RECRD and a number from 0 1500 indicating the number of new keystrokes that may be stored A series of boxes displayed to the right represent the Fn keys A solid box indicates that the Fn key in that position is currently storing recorded keystrokes Press the Fn key which will store the keystrokes On 101 102 keyboards you can also use Shift Fn The status line will display R F where R indicates you are in Record mode k is the number of keystrokes that may be stored and F is the number of the Fn key pressed Note Ifyou press a pre recorded Fn key its contents will be replaced with the following keystrokes You can also remove the contents of the Fn key before recording by pressing the Delete key Enter the keystrokes to be recorded You may pause recording at any time to allow keystrokes to be entered manually when played back by pressing Pause To continue recording press Paus
376. rectory called ssh You may have to create this directory yourself Within the ssh directory you need a file called authorized_keys Again if it is not there you will have to create it Using whatever editor is available on your server you need to paste the key into the file and save it If the authorized_keys file does not exist you can just do the following cat gt authorized_keys Edit Paste from the TeemTalk menu Control C Finally logon and restart from step 1 Select your key file from the drop down list Enter your passphrase if it has not been saved and click OK Click the Connect button TeemTalk will attempt to connect to the host 2 24 Getting Started SSH Connection to an SSH Communications Security Tectia Server using a Key File 1 Follow the instructions in the previous section for using a keyfile withopenSSH up to and including step 12 2 If they do not already exist you need to create a directory ssh2 and a text file within it called authorization 3 Create another text file and paste your key into it For example cat gt mykey pub Control V Control C 4 Add the following line to the authorization file key mykey pub 5 You then have to edit your key file as follows Remove ssh dsa or ssh rsa from the start of the key Remove Comment from the end of the key Insert the following lines before the key BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY Subject Your name Comment And add the foll
377. ree other sets of function labels Device Control F1 Clicking this button or pressing F1 will cause the Device Control function labels to be displayed The buttons and keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the following section entitled Device Control Margins Tabs Col F2 Clicking this button or pressing F2 will cause the Margins Tabs Col function labels to be displayed The buttons and keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the section entitled Margins Tabs amp Start Column Modes F4 Clicking this button or pressing F4 will cause the Mode Selection function labels to be displayed The buttons and keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the previous section entitled Mode Selection Device Control Device To To Advance 1 1 Advance Copy Copy Copy Modes Ext Dev Display Page Line All Page Line This set of function buttons is displayed by pressing the F9 key which is equivalent to the HP 700 92 96 User System key then F1 These functions enable you to select the device s to which data is sent and also to copy portions of data from display memory to the printer 10 8 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Device Modes F1 Clicking this button or pressing F1 will cause the Device Modes function labels to be displayed The keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the following section entitled Device Modes To Ext Dev F2 This toggle function determines whether data is sent to the
378. retrieve and display data The Fn keys can store a total of 1500 keystrokes A sequence of recorded keystrokes may be interrupted so that keystrokes can be entered manually before continuing with the recording or playback Note that local Fn key functions cannot be recorded The keys used to initiate recording and playback are shown below together with the equivalent virtual key names which can be used to assign the functions to any key on the keyboard 101 102 Key Keyboard Virtual Key Names Record Alt F4 AS_RECORD Pause Shift Pause AS_PAUSE Quit Alt LControl see note AS_QUIT Play Alt F5 AS_PLAY Note Quit is Alt Left Control if Left Control is defined as the Reset key Recording Keystrokes 1 Press Record to enter Record mode The status line will display RECRD and a number from 0 1500 indicating the number of new keystrokes that may be stored A series of boxes displayed to the right represent the Fn keys A solid box indicates that the Fn key in that position is currently storing recorded keystrokes 12 9 IBM 5250 Emulation 2 Press the Fn key which will store the keystrokes On 101 102 keyboards you can also use Shift Fn The status line will display R F where R indicates you are in Record mode 3 is the number of keystrokes that may be stored and F is the number of the Fn key pressed Note Ifyou press a pre recorded Fn key its contents will be replaced with the following keystrokes
379. rint mode off ESC 4i Transparent print mode on ESC 5i Auxiliary print mode on ESC 5i Auxiliary print mode off ESC 4i C 60 Host Command Summary Siemens 97801 Emulation CHARACTER SET SELECTION Assign International character set to GO ESC Assign International character set to G1 ESC Assign International A character set to GO ESC B Assign International A character set to G1 ESC B Assign German character set to GO ESC K Assign German character set to G1 ESC K Assign Brackets character set to GO ESC w Assign Brackets character set to G1 ESC w Assign FACET character set to GO ESC c Assign FACET character set to G1 ESC c Assign IBM character set to GO ESC v Assign IBM character set to G1 ESC v Assign Euro character set to GO ESC u Assign Euro character set to G1 ESC u Assign Mathematics Symbols character set to GO ESC t Assign Mathematics Symbols character set to G1 ESC t Assign Blanks character set to GO ESC y Assign Blanks character set to G1 ESC y Assign G2 to GO ESC x Assign G2 to G1 ESC x Load G2 with character set s or B K w ESC s Load character generator address es with new symbol ESCRB ESC Three bytes address and 28 byte description of pattern in hex format Switch to GO same as keyboard Ctrl O SI Switch to G1 same as keyboard Ctrl N SO Switch within GO national international ESC 5v Lock Change Code key ESC 10 v Unlock Change Code key ESC 1 v R
380. rinter Auto Print This toggles auto print mode on and off as indicated by a tick when auto print mode is on Auto print mode causes each line of data to be transmitted to the printer when the cursor moves to a new line as a result of a carriage return line feed vertical tab or form feed Cancel Print This will cancel the current Print Screen or Print Buffer function Eject Page This option enables data that has been spooled to the printer to be printed Exit This option will cause the emulator to shut down 6 22 Setup Menus Edit Menu EB Clipboard Text Clipboard Graphics Select All Clear Buffer Clipboard Text Clipboard Graphics Selecting one of these options will enable selected text or graphics to be copied to the clipboard when the Copy command is used The Paste and Select All commands will also be enabled A tick will be displayed next to the option when it is selected Copy The Copy commands become available when data has been selected They will cause the currently selected text or graphics to be copied to the clipboard The data can then be inserted in a different position or another file using the Paste command The next block of data that is copied will delete the previous block on the clipboard The first Copy option enables you to perform a standard copy The last three options are only available when Clipboard Graphics is selected They enable you to copy the graphic
381. rline blink 6 Bold underline 14 Reverse underline blink 7 Bold blink 15 Bold reverse underline blink f Foreground colour index 0 15 b Background colour index 0 15 Alternate text colour blink enabled CSI 115h Alternate text colour blink disabled CSI 1151 Alternate text colour underline enabled CSI 114h Alternate text colour underline disabled CSI 1141 Bold and blink foreground amp background enabled CSI 116h Bold and blink foreground only enabled CSI 1161 Colour table request value 1 HLS 2 RGB CSI2 u Colour table reply to host parameter group DCS 2 s ST Colour table restore format parameter group DCS 2 p ST group of 5 parameters n s 1 2 3 n Colour number 0 255 s Colour coordinate system 0 illegal 1 HLS 2 RGB 1 HLS hue 0 360 or RGB red 0 100 2 HLS lightness 0 100 or RGB green 0 100 3 HLS saturation 0 100 or RGB blue 0 100 Select colour look up table CSI 0 Mono 1 Alternate colour use text attributes 2 Alternate colour 3 ANSI SGR colour Text Processing Cursor backward tabulation no of active tab positions CSI Z Cursor horizontal absolute no of active char positions CSI G Cursor horizontal forward tab no of active tab positions CSI I Cursor next line number of active position CSI E Cursor previous line number of active position CSI F Save cursor posit
382. rnet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection select Modem specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details The Tandem 6530 emulation is configured using the TA6530 Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter 17 2 TA6530 Emulation The Status Line The last 25th line in the window is used to display messages and status information You can enable or disable display of a border which separates this line from the rest of the lines above it by setting the Status Border option in the TA6530 Settings dialog box accordingly The status line is divided into two fields The first and leftmost field is used to display messages of up to
383. rol 4 Read control 5 Read control 6 Read control 7 Read model Read model extended Read terminal ID Read all Read line send line Read message send message Read page send page Write send mark Set control 1 Set control 2 Set control 3 Set control 4 Set control 5 Set control 6 Set control 7 KEYBOARD ESC 6 DLE STX DLE ETX DLEEOT DLE DC2 DLE DC4 DC1 XON DC3 XOFF ESC SP ESC SP ESC SPS ESC S ESC SP7 ESC 7 ESC 7 ESC 7 ESC 7 ESC 7 ESC amp 7 ESC SP 6 ESC 6 ESC 6 ESC 8 ESC 8 ESC SP 8 ESC 8 ESCE ESC SP 9 mode1 mode2 op ESC 9 mode1 mode2 op ESC 9 mode1 mode2 op ESC 9 mode operation ESC 9 m1 m2 m3 m4 op ESC 9 ml m2 m3 m4 op ESC amp 9 m1 m2 m3 op Disable print key attention Disable reset key attention Enable print key attention Enable reset key attention Keyboard lock Keyboard unlock Load programmable function key Set all default function keys ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC fn fnx ff fp ESC ESC SPt Set default function key ESC t key PRINTING Print line ESCU Print message ESC V Print screen ESC SP W Print viewport ESC W C 41 Host Command Summary MDIS Prism 8 amp Prism 9 Emulations CHARACTER SET SELECTION Assign GO label to character set Assign G1 label to character set Assign G2 label to character set Assign G3 label to character
384. rovides a summary of all the registry entries and command line options supported by the emulator This is followed by sections describing the commands in detail grouped according to their function 20 1 Initialization Commands Command Summary Note that indicates the command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator H indicates the command is only available if your version of TeemTalk supports graphics emulations Host Connection Command Function Registry Entry Command Line Load Winsock on start up none LW Exit on connection close fail ExitOnClose on E No exit on connection close fail ExitOnClose off E1 Reconnect on close fail ExitOnClose Connect E2 New session warning message Session Warning off OS Close connection on exit WarnkExit off J Session Configuration Command Function Registry Entry Command Line Start up command group to action none Ngroupname Session configuration to use none SE description Disable bell Bell off BE Enable debug Capture Replay none Debug Enable debug log send receive none Debug2Way Display Command Function Registry Entry Command Line Window minimized on start up WindowSize minimized MI Window maximized on start up WindowSize maximized MZ Window full screen on start up WindowSize FullScreen F Disable window frame resize none WF Title to display in title bar none T title
385. rsor will move to the leftmost column on the next line when the current line has been printed You can cancel printing at the end of the current line by pressing Return Note If the cursor is positioned on a line below the last display able line of data nothing will be sent to the printer 10 9 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Copy Line F8 When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function clicking this button or pressing F8 will cause a copy of the line containing the cursor to be sent to the printer The cursor will move to the leftmost column on the next line when the line has been printed Note If the cursor is positioned on a line below the last display able line of data nothing will be sent to the printer If the cursor is positioned on an empty line between two blocks of data the printer will perform a carriage return and line Jeed Device Modes ss ee ee SS ES a Device Control F1 Clicking this button or pressing F1 will cause the Device Control function labels to be displayed enabling you to select the device s to which data is sent and also to copy portions of data from display memory to the printer The buttons and keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the previous section entitled Device Control Record Mode F2 This is used to copy data received from the host to the printer and or display depending on the setting of the To Ext Dev and To Display labels in the Device Control men
386. rt mode off replace mode on ESCr Insert space character ESCQ Insert line of spaces ESCE Delete cursor character ESC W Delete cursor line ESCR CLEARING DATA Clear page to nulls ESC Clear page to spaces ESC Clear page to write protected spaces ESC Clear unprotected page to spaces ESC or ESC Clear unprotected page to nulls ESC Clear unprotected page to display attribute ESC attr Clear unprotected page to spaces from cursor ESC Y Clear unprotected page to nulls from cursor ESC y Clear unprotected line to spaces from cursor ESC T Clear unprotected line to nulls from cursor ESCt Fill page with Hs ESCF C 91 Host Command Summary SENDING DATA Send line through cursor ESC 6 Send unprotected line through cursor ESC 4 Send page through cursor ESC7 Send unprotected page through cursor ESC 5 Mark block beginning ESC CTRLB Mark block end ESC CTRLC Send entire block ESC s Send unprotected characters in block ESCS Report terminal status ESC Report attribute under cursor ESCD PRINT FUNCTIONS Print formatted page through cursor ESCP Print formatted unprotected page through cursor ESC P Print unformatted page through cursor ESC p or ESCL Auxiliary print mode off ESCA Auxiliary print mode on ESC Transparent print mode off ESCa Transparent print mode on ESC Bidirectional mode off CTRLT Bidirectional mode on CTRLR Pass next incoming character to printer enhanced CTRL P schar Set print terminator Define d
387. rted chapter for details The BQ 3107 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Bull BQ 3107 terminal Refer to the BQ 3107 Emulation chapter for details 6 26 Setup Menus The DG 410 412 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Data General D410 and D412 terminals Refer to the DG 410 412 Emulation chapter for details The HP 700 92 96 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hewlett Packard 700 92 2392A 2622A 70094 and 70096 terminals This emulation is described in detail in the HP 700 92 96 Emulation chapter The HZ1500 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hazeltine 1500 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details The IBM 3151 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the IBM 3151 terminal Refer to the BM 3151 Emulation chapter for details The IBM 3270 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the IBM 3270 terminal Note that the initial display will be an ASCII text screen known as Network Virtual Terminal mode NVT mode for short The setting of the IBM 3270 Model option in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box determines the size of the display and whether or not extended attributes are supported Refer to the JBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details The IBM 5250 emulation provides compatibility with sof
388. ry modes Boundary mode and Edit mode Boundary mode is activated when Push mode is entered The cursor will remain at its current position while you type additional characters and text will be pushed in the opposite direction of the screen orientation Edit mode is activated when the cursor is moved from its Boundary position into the Push segment area In this mode text can be edited within the Push segment while typing in the field s natural direction Bilingual Keyboard Support When a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard is selected you can toggle between the National and Latin character set by pressing the keys Shift on the 12 8 IBM 5250 Emulation keypad The character N or L will be displayed on the status line to indicate which character set is currently active Selecting the Numeral Swap option in the IBM 5250 Settings dialog box will cause all numbers to be displayed using the National character set when in Latin character set mode Alternate Code Page If a language supports two code pages e g Hebrew New Code and Hebrew Old Code you can switch between the two by pressing the keys Ctrl Shift Alt on the numeric keypad This function can be assigned to a different key or key combina tion by using the AS_ALTCP virtual key name Record amp Playback Keystrokes Facility The record playback keystrokes facility enables you to eliminate repetitive operations by using the Fn keys to store
389. s This copy will replace the template in the list of session configurations displayed in the Open Session dialog box Note that the T template indicator will no longer be displayed Setup Menus Save Using New Session Name If TeemTalk for Windows XPe was started without a session i e not started by clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu you can save the session configuration under a new name 1 Inthe File menu select Save Session As option to display the following dialog box Save As File Name Uae r Saved Items V Keyboard Macros v Soft Buttons V Attributes v Window Metrics 7 Text Rows V Buffer Rows Z Connection 7 Terminal Settings Administrative Options Session Stored for all users of system C Session stored for current user Nigel only 2 Inthe Saved Items box indicate which settings are to be saved by checking the boxes next to the relevant options 3 Inthe Save As File Name text box enter a descriptive name up to 132 characters long to enable it to be identified for future selection This description will be listed in the Open Session dialog box 4 Click the OK button to save the session If you specified a session name that already exists a message box will ask you to confirm whether you want to overwrite the existing session name with the new settings Selecting A Session Configuration XPe If TeemTalk for Windows XPe was started
390. s ASCII code page 899 installed Selecting Don t Report will cause no value to be returned WSCST Name Specifies the name of the object containing pointers to the work station customizing tables WSCST Library Specifies the library name of the object containing pointers to the work station customizing tables 2 17 Getting Started SSL Connection Settings The optional SSL Secure Sockets Layer protocol enables authenticated and encrypted communication between clients and servers Before anyone can connect to a server the system administrator must make available a copy of the root certificate used to sign the server s identity certificate and the number of the telnet port the server is listening on the default for secure telnet is 992 Additionally the system administrator may issue each user or terminal with their own password protected client certificate To make an SSL connection 1 Select the SSL option in the Connection Wizard Host Information dialog box or from the New Connection dialog Type list box when running TeemTalk Display the Telnet Options dialog box and change the port to the number specified by the system administrator then click OK Click the Advanced or Configure button to display the SSL Connection dialog box SSL Connection Root Certificates Cancel Add Remove r Client Certificate Do not use a client certificate hed Password T Save If you have not a
391. s image with black and white reversed with colour converted to monochrome or both Paste This will cause data that has been copied to the clipboard to be pasted at the current cursor position The same block of data may be pasted repeatedly as the clipboard stores it until the Copy command is used again Select All This will cause the window contents not the entire buffer to be selected Clear Buffer This will erase the contents of the window and the scroll buffer 6 23 Setup Menus Settings Menu v English French German Emulation HP 700 392 96 Serial Auxport Terminal Local Editing Block Transmission Attributes Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Mouse Button Action The English French and German options enable you to select the language that will be used in all menus and dialog boxes The following dialog boxes can be displayed from this menu Note that the dialog boxes used to configure specific emulations can only be displayed when the relevant emulation is running Emulation Settings for specifying the terminal emulation keyboard nationality and the answerback string HP 700 92 96 Settings for configuring the HP 700 92 96 emulation PT 250 Settings for configuring the Prime PT250 emulation IBM 3151 Settings for configuring the IBM 3151 emulation Wyse Settings for configuring the Wyse 50 50 60 TVI 910 920 925 ADDS A2 and HZ 1500 emu
392. s of the emulator They will cause the emulation workspace to fill the entire display when the emulator is loaded while retaining the default number of lines and columns Disable Window Frame Resize Registry Entry None Command Line WF Default Setting Enabled This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It prevents the mouse from resizing the window by dragging the edge 20 9 Initialization Commands WindowTitle Registry Entry None Command Line T title Default Setting Emulator name This enables you to specify the title that is to be displayed in the title bar This is useful when you are running more than one instance of the emulator If no title is specified then the name of your version of the emulator will be displayed Window Subtitle Registry Entry None Command Line ST subtitle Default Setting Untitled This enables you to specify a subtitle for display in the title bar of a specific emulator window By default the subtitle is the name of the session Disable Title Bar Registry Entry None Command Line TB Default Setting on This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It will remove the title bar from the window Disable Min Maximize amp Close Buttons Registry Entry None Command Line SY Default Setting on This will remove the Control System menu icon and the minimize and maximize buttons from the emulator
393. s the Tab or Shift Tab keys to move the cursor until it rests over the Cancel button and press Return or the Spacebar To close a dialog box and action changes Mouse Click the OK button Keyboard Press Return Default Settings You can restore the factory default settings of all the setup options by selecting the Factory Default option in the File menu Some dialog boxes include a Default button to enable the default settings of options contained in the dialog box to be reasserted Specifying Characters In Setup Entries There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character in a setup entry For example the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries _027 Decimal value underscore character followed by a 3 digit number 033 Octal value backslash character followed by a 3 digit number u001B Unicode value backslash and u characters then unicode value E Control key value represents the control key on the keyboard e Additional value for ESC Setup Menus The following backslash values can be used u Unicode introducer r Carriage return n Line feed e Escape Note that as the and characters are used as value introducers to enter these as character values you need to precede them with a backslash character i e enter as and as The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value u20ac Creating A Connection Tem
394. s what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported Clicking the arrow button will display a drop down list box showing the available settings 70092 2392A 2622A 70094 or 70096 If you are using the keyboard press the up or down arrow keys until the setting required is displayed You can either select from this list or enter a different terminal identity in the text box 6 34 Setup Menus Pages Factory default 4 In HP 700 92 96 mode the display area is 80 or 132 columns by 24 lines with 168 lines stored off screen giving a total display memory of 192 lines This option enables you to specify whether display memory is divided into 2 4 6 or 8 pages Typeahead Enabled Factory default Unselected When the emulator is connected to an HP 3000 you normally have to wait for the host to send a prompt before you can enter new data at the keyboard otherwise the data is ignored Selecting this option will enable you to type continuously without waiting for the prompt Data is stored in the keyboard buffer and each time the emulator receives a prompt it will send a line of data to the host Block mode also supports typeahead Host Prompt Character Factory default Q i e DC1 Some hosts send a prompt character to the terminal to indicate that they are ready to receive the next line or block of data This option enables you to
395. s wide Pressing the N C key once will change the display width to 135 columns Note that the margins will not be affected by this key DG 410 412 Emulation Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout poylys aie s y y u ym p leiu u B ale sjeyOesq u SUOWOUN sdeS y y uo spu B y Aq peyeolpul se uonouni s y pay ewun V besn Aey IeULION besn y yy x poo a N 313730 eur JO pug oL seg 103 Bedq seJ Dd 3 p ss iduioo PuuoN OIN TOH 1089S INIHd Pa HOSS 10498 os suno woon 234 Hd Old 63 84 24 94 S4 s 9 4 DG 410 412 Emulation Composing Characters The Data General D410 keyboard has a SPCL key which enables you to generate characters from the DG International character set You can generate the same characters by using the method described for the DEC emulation Refer to the Compose Character Sequences section in the Keyboard Configuration chapter for details Key Codes The following table lists the decimal value of codes generated when keys that emulate those found on the Data General keyboard are pressed alone or in conjunc tion with the Shift and or Ctrl keys Note that each code shown is the second code generated when the key or key combination is pressed the first always
396. selected The Select and Copy function is the same as Select but will also copy the selected data to the Clipboard automatically The Rectangular Select and Copy function is the same as Select Rectangle but will also copy the selected data to the Clipboard automatically Moving The Cursor In Block Mode When the emulator is in any of the local block modes you can use the mouse instead of the cursor keys to position the text cursor using the Move Cursor function To position the text cursor move the mouse pointer to the position required hold down the Alt key then click the left mouse button The Cursor Select function does the same as Move Cursor but when running the IBM 3270 or IBM 5250 emulation it also performs a cursor select Mouse Functions Send Keyword The Send Keyword function enables you to click on any delimited word displayed on the screen and it will be sent to the host as long as the word is not already defined as a hotspot Keyword delimiters are space NULL and Show amp Action Hotspots A hotspot facility is provided which enables you to invoke a function by clicking the mouse pointer on a keyword displayed on the screen For example an application may display information relating to keys you can press to perform a particular function Instead of pressing the key on the keyboard you could invoke the function by holding down the Alt key and clicking the mouse pointer on the displayed ke
397. selected the keys will send their programmed definitions CR CR NULL Factory default Selected This option allows you to disable the NULL being automatically sent on CR 6 47 Setup Menus TA6530 Settings TA 6530 Settings OR x Power On Mode Packet Block CONY v OFF v V Status Border Return Function V Telserv Format V Bell On Bell Column FN This dialog box is displayed by selecting TA 6530 in the Settings menu Power On Mode Factory default Conversational This option determines the operating mode that is in effect when the TA6530 emulation is entered Note Changing the current setting will not take effect until you re load the emulation so you will need to save the new setting before exiting the emulation Conversational and Block modes are normally used for applications running on a NonStop host system and ANSI mode for applications running on an LXN host system Save the new setting before exiting the emulation by selecting Save Session in the File menu Packet Block Factory default OFF This option specifies whether you want to use packet blocking for X 25 communica tions line support and if so the size of the packet block The size may be set to any of the listed 128 byte increments or by setting this option to OFF the default size of 260 bytes Status Border Factory default Selected This option enables you to display a thin border which separates the status line from the rest
398. ser defined line style c ESC z C 80 Host Command Summary W2119 Emulation ALPHANUMARIC MODE Select G0 character set for alpha text ESCSI Select G1 character set for alpha text ESC SO CURSOR MOVEMENT Move cursor down 1 pixel ESC b Move cursor down 16 pixels ESC B Move cursor left 1 pixel ESC d Move cursor left 16 pixels ESC D Move cursor right 1 pixel ESC c Move cursor right 16 pixels ESC C Move cursor up pixel ESC a Move cursor up 16 pixels ESC A Move cursor to beginning of line ESC CR Move text cursor down LF Move text cursor left BS Move text cursor right HT Move text cursor up VT Move text cursor to start of line CR GENERAL OPERATION Clear screen amp enter Graphics Text mode ESC FF Copy screen data to parallel port ESC ETB Deselect write through amp selective erase ESC SOH Enable selective erase ESC DLE Enable write through ESC NAK Request cursor position report ESC ENQ Select bypass mode ESC CAN Sound bell BEL GRAPHICS TEXT MODE Select graphics text font 120x58 ESC Select graphics text font 132x38 ESC lt Select graphics text font 132x64 ESC Select graphics text font 146x70 ESC gt Select graphics text font 73x35 ESC 8 Select graphics text font 80x38 ESC 9 Select graphics text font 80x64 ESC Select text zoom factor 1 ESC e Select text zoom factor 2 ESC f Select text zoom factor 3 ESC g Select text zoom factor 4 ESC h C 81 Host Command Summary MOD
399. setup menus These functions are listed below and described in the Setup Menus chapter Displays the New Connection dialog box for making a serial or faba network host connection Displays the Open Session dialog box This enables you to load La a particular setup configuration mm Displays the Save Session As dialog box This enables you to E specify how the current session configuration is to be saved The Toolbar o GC L E Dh T Copies selected data to the clipboard Pastes clipboard data at the current cursor position Displays the Printer Setup dialog box This enables you to select any printer that is configured in Microsoft Windows Will produce a hardcopy of screen data Displays the Attributes dialog box This enables you to specify the colours used in the emulation workspace and how text with attributes is displayed Displays the Keyboard Macros dialog box This shows the mapping of your keyboard and enables you to redefine the function of keys Displays the Soft Buttons dialog box for defining the function of soft buttons Displays the Mouse Button Actions dialog box for assigning up to six functions to the left mouse button Displays the Button Tools dialog box for redefining the toolbar Displays information about your version of TeemTalk The Toolbar Redefining The Toolbar Selecting Button Tools from the Settings menu will display a dialog box that enables you to redefine the
400. sition ESC L Repeat last character times ESC b GENERAL OPERATION Cancel current escape sequence CAN Execute self tests ESC y Reset emulation ESC c Set emulation configuration ESC P ESC Set mode ESC h Reset mode ESC 1 Sound bell BEL Read screen contents ESC v Terminate current escape sequence SUB Transmission enabled XON DC1 Transmission disabled XOFF DC3 KEYBOARD Lock keyboard ESC Lock keyboard ESC 2h Unlock keyboard ESC b Unlock keyboard ESC 21 REPORTS Report configuration values ESC x Report cursor position ESC 6 Report terminal ID amp version ESC c Report status of last self test ESC 5 C 67 Host Command Summary Tek 4010 4014 Emulation ALPHANUMARIC MODE Select G0 character set for alpha text ESCSI Select G1 character set for alpha text ESCSO CURSOR MOVEMENT Move cursor down 1 pixel ESC b Move cursor down 16 pixels ESC B Move cursor left 1 pixel ESC d Move cursor left 16 pixels ESC D Move cursor right 1 pixel ESC c Move cursor right 16 pixels ESC C Move cursor up 1 pixel ESC a Move cursor up 16 pixels ESC A Move cursor to beginning of line ESC CR Move text cursor down LF Move text cursor left BS Move text cursor right HT Move text cursor up VT Move text cursor to start of line CR GENERAL OPERATION Clear screen amp enter Graphics Text mode ESC FF Copy screen data to parallel port ESC ETB Request status report ESC ENQ Select bypass mode ESC
401. sor position ESC J Program function key definition ESC z fkey seq DEL Program key direction amp definition ESC Z dir key seq DEL Read key direction amp definition ESC Z key Sound Bell BEL Turn local edit mode on duplex edit mode off ESCk Turn local edit mode off duplex edit mode on ESC1 LABEL LINE Clear function key label ESC z field CR Clear shifted label line message ESC z CR Clear unshifted label line message ESC z CR Display shifted label line ESC zPCR Program display function key label ESC z field label CR Program display unshifted label line Program shifted label line ESC z text CR ESC z text CR Shifted label line off ESC z DEL SENDING DATA Begin print send at top of page ESC d Begin print send at top of screen ESCd amp Bidirectional mode off ESC d C 87 Host Command Summary Bidirectional mode on Enable transmission XON XOFF handshaking Stop transmission XON XOFF handshaking Mark block beginning Mark block end Print entire formatted page Print formatted unprotected page Print unformatted page Secondary receive mode off Secondary receive mode on Send ACK Send cursor character Send entire block Send entire cursor line Send entire page Send unprotected characters in block Send unprotected cursor line Send unprotected page Send next incoming character to printer port Transparent print mode on Turn auxiliary print mode on Turn print modes off ESC d D
402. specify the prompt character for your particular host Most hosts either use the DC1 AQ character e g HP 3000 or no prompt character When Typeahead Enabled is selected the emulator will wait for the specified prompt character from the host before transmitting the next line from the keyboard buffer 6 35 Setup Menus PT250 Settings PT 250 Settings m Screen Format LJ Block Mode ae 24 D Line Block Mode 80x48 Multinational Character Sets Truncate At End Df Line 132x27 O Screen wrap 80x25 Received LF is CR LF Cancel This dialog box is displayed by selecting PT 250 in the Settings menu Screen Format Factory default 80 x 24 The setting of this option determines the display memory format the number of lines and columns that are displayed and the amount of data transmitted to the host when the emulation is in Block mode as determined by the setting of the Block Mode option in this dialog box Selecting 80 x 24 will enable 24 rows of 80 columns to be displayed at the same time In Block mode this specifies 1 page mode transmission Selecting 80 x 48 will enable 80 columns by 24 rows to be displayed while another 24 rows are stored off screen in the display buffer These may be scrolled into view using the scroll bar In Block mode this specifies 2 page mode transmission Selecting 132 x 27 will enable 27 rows of 132 columns to be displayed at the same ti
403. ssion Configuration XPe Selecting 6 7 SetTabs 6 82 Settings Menu 6 24 Setup Menus Attributes 6 92 Auxport settings 6 74 Block Transmission 6 85 BQ 3107 settings 6 69 Button Tools 6 105 Closing 6 2 Codes in entries 6 4 Defaultsettings 6 4 Define Keyboard Macros 3 1 Displaying 6 1 Edit Menu 6 23 Emulation settings 6 26 Filemenu 6 9 GIN Mouse Definitions 6 91 HP 700 92 96 settings 6 30 IBM 3151 settings 6 39 IBM 3270 settings 6 50 IBM 5250 settings 6 56 Keyboard Macros 6 97 Local Editing settings 6 83 Menudescriptions 6 9 Mouse Button Actions 6 103 New Connection 6 10 Notice Board Setup 6 54 Open Session 6 12 Option selection 6 2 PT250 settings 6 36 Save Session As 6 14 Serialsettings 6 72 Settings menu 6 24 Soft Buttons 6 100 Specifying charactersinentries 6 4 Startup options 6 15 TA6530 settings 6 48 Tab Stops 6 82 Tek 4014 settings 6 89 Terminal settings 6 75 Unisys T27 settings 6 61 Wysesettings 6 43 Siemens 97801 Emulation Character sets Brackets B 30 Euro B 29 German B 28 International B 27 International A B 26 Host command summary C 61 Keyboard mapping 14 3 16 3 Session configuration 16 1 Soft Buttons Settings menu 6 100 Windows CE 2 43 Windows XPe 2 45 Special Characters 6 4 Specification D 1 AIXTerm D 2 Bull BQ 3107 7107 D 2 Data General D200 D410 D 3 Digital VT emulation D 3 General D 1 HP 700 92 D 3 IBM 3151 D 4 IBM 3270 D 3 IBM 5250 D 4 ICL 7561 D 4 Stratus V102 D 5 Tandem 6526 6530 D
404. st The terminal ID can be up to 20 characters long Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported Model Factory default 11 This option identifies the terminal model being emulated in response to a terminal identification request from the host Model 11 supports only one viewport containing 24 or 25 rows and 80 columns Model 31 supports up to three viewports 80 or 132 columns wide and pass through printing 6 42 Setup Menus Wyse Settings Wyse Settings ok Lines Status Line Eep Page Size Block End Set Tabs x Jus cR x Attribute Type Code Page char gt Pc Multinational 437 gt WPRT Attribute ASCII Font wy ASCII v V Dim v Multiple Page A Invisible m Reverse 80 132 Clears Underline Economy 80 Mauto Scroll C Bink auto Page z This dialog box is displayed by selecting Wyse in the Settings menu Note that some of the settings apply to the TVI 910 TVI 920 TVI 925 ADDS A2 and HZ 1500 emulations in addition to the Wyse emulations Also some settings may not apply to the particular Wyse emulation currently running Selecting a setting that is not applicable to the current emulation will cause the emulator to use the default setting for that emulation when the dialog box is exited Note The Tab Stops dialog box displayed by clicking the Set Tabs button is described later in this chapter after the Terminal Settings description Lines F
405. t lines of replacement characters starting at cursor line ESC L Delete character at cursor position ESC W Delete characters starting at cursor position ESC P Delete current line amp replace with replacement characters ESCR Delete lines at cursor line amp replace with replacement characters ESC M Erase from cursor to end of line amp replace with replacement characters ESC T Erase line portion amp replace with replacement characters 0 from cursor to cursor 2 all unprotected ESC K Erase from cursor to end of line amp replace with null characters ESCt Erase from cursor to end of page amp replace with replacement characters ESC Y Erase page portion amp replace with replacement characters 0 from cursor to cursor 2 all unprotected ESC J Erase from cursor to end of page amp replace with null characters ESC y Clear current unprotected field replace with replacement characters CAN Clear all characters amp replace with null characters ESC 955 mode Clear all characters amp replace with replacement characters reset protect and write protect modes ESC 950 mode Clear unprotected characters amp replace with replacement characters do not reset protect and write protect modes ESC 955 mode Clear unprotected characters amp replace with write protected space characters reset protect mode ESC 950 mode Clear unprotected characters amp replace with write protected space characters do not reset pro
406. t Column Half Index Down End Attribute Find Stop Code Start New Page Required Page End Insert Stop Code Begin Underline Word Underline Half Index Up Beginning of Line End of Line Top of Page End of Page Insert Carrier Return Required Space Required Tab Alt A Alt B Alt C Alt D Alt H Alt J Alt N Alt P Alt R Alt S Alt U Alt W Alt Y Alt Cursor Left Alt Cursor Right Alt Cursor Up Alt Cursor Down Alt Field Exit Alt Space Alt Tab 12 6 IBM 5250 Emulation l41O ULM pesn u ym p le1 u B ase sjeyoesq auenbs u suonSunj p lJius ae s y y u ym p leiu u B aie s yoLIq puno u suonound Ba eBesn y IPUUuON sdeo y ay uo spu B au Aq payeaipul se uonounj Shey p veuuun IV eBesn yy he 5 gt G l xo x G 2 9 4oqesei3 40383 x anald e gt plaid sei3 01443 gt waj 6 8 4 pno PSH aaa uals 5 adamo W anoh Paine awa INMAN mad qj3H q TioH 3NOH IH3SNI 8 uvv axar osa FF Sawa ana 3949058 c Hsnd 3S019 34A Vd zvd lVd dSIG SHINY urljOpua 103 c WEN PIO WYN 4 lUud 2907 1d 1 64 ui 0919S JOSIND T3SH9 Hd Oka 123 84 Zd 94 cba 13934 WOJYOOUOW ONOW 22a nasaal A oza
407. t half of the Multinational character set the second half of which may be the DEC Additional or one of the ISO Latin Additional sets as determined by the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box B 2 Character Sets NATIONAL REPLACEMENT CHARACTERS BINARY BIT a OOO OoOO OCTAL DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL A W ee a N wo ki e gt ats lt a British Canadian gt oy m Q m m Danish Norwegian wo Dutch Finnish French Belgian German Italian Portuguese Spanish E PO EI PD 3 p E Pp 3 EIM m an m m w Swedish Swiss French Swiss German c ow This table shows the characters that replace certain ASCII characters when the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to National The national character set consists of the ASCII set with the changed characters listed on the line for the selected keyboard nationality B 3 Character Sets DEC ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET Multinational 8 Bit E i i i 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 DECIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This is one of three possible second halves of the Multinational character set the first half is the ASCII charac
408. t mode on ESCk Duplex edit mode on ESC1 Sound bell CTRLG Unlock keyboard ESC Lock keyboard ESC Keyclick off ESC lt Keyclick on ESC gt C 89 Host Command Summary CAPS LOCK on enhanced CAPS LOCK off enhanced Margin bell off Margin bell on Select standard ASCII key code mode Select PC scan code mode Key repeat off enhanced Key repeat on enhanced Application key mode off Application key mode on Read keyboard status Default unit PROGRAMMING KEYS ESC e amp ESCe ESCn ESCo ESCeH ESCel ESCe ESCe ESC v2 ESC v3 ESC ESC m Program function key definition ESC z key seq DEL Clear function key definition ESC z key DEL Program key direction amp definition ESC i p1 p2 seq CTRL Y Read key direction amp definition ESC Z key Clear key direction amp definition ESC z dir key DEL Clear all programmable keys ESC c U DISPLAY Screen display off ESCO Screen display on ESC N Reverse screen light background ESC b Restore normal screen dark background ESC d Set cursor display features ESC cursor Display 25 data lines ESC Display 43 data lines ESC _ Display next page ESCK Display previous page ESCJ Load user line ESC f Display user line ESC g User line display off ESCe or ESC h Clear unshifted label line ESCz CR Program amp display function key label ESC z field label CR Clear function key label ESC z field CR Assign display attribute to a message fiel
409. t options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the DEC VT terminal emulation required in the Alpha Emulation list box The VT52 and VT100 emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT52 and VT100 terminals respectively The VT500 7 Bit and VT500 8 Bit emulations enable you to run applications wr
410. tab stops can be toggled on or off by setting the Type option to Variable then clicking the mouse pointer on or above the relevant column number To save the tab stops click the Apply button To remove all the tab stops when in Variable mode click the Clear button Note that switching from Fixed to Variable mode will clear all the default tabs To restore the default tabs click the Default button The Show Ruler option enables a tab ruler to be displayed on the 25th line of the screen 6 68 Setup Menus BQ 3107 Settings BQ 3107 7107 Settings i x isplay Preferences Unshifted Function Keys Shifted Function Keys Operating Mode VIP Mode Rendition mode Transmit Terminator Block y 7760 VIP be ETX i This dialog box is displayed by selecting BQ 3107 in the Settings menu Operating Mode Factory default Block In Block mode keyboard entered data is displayed and processed locally allowing you to edit it before a block of data is sent to the host In Character mode keyboard entered data is sent simultaneously to the host and the display VIP Mode Factory default 7760 The VIP mode can be set to 7700 or 7760 Rendition Mode Factory default VIP The setting of this option determines whether VIP or SDP display attributes are used Transmit Terminator Factory default ETX This specifies the last character that is sent to indicate the end of a block transmission The character can be ETX EOT or
411. tandard ASCID characters to form the National set mapped to GO so the Additional set contains the missing ASCII characters This means that you can still generate the full range of ASCII and Additional characters by using the Char Set function refer to the PT250 Emulation chapter for details When this option is selected both ASCII and Additional characters are available enabling characters from any keyboard nationality to be generated Truncate At End Of Line Factory default Selected This option determines what happens to received characters when the rightmost column of the display is reached When unselected on reaching the end of the line the next character will be placed in the first column of the following line When this option is selected following characters will not be displayed Screen Wrap Factory default Unselected When screen wrap is selected display memory is treated in a circular fashion When the cursor reaches the last line it will automatically wrap to the first line again and vice versa When screen wrap is unselected the cursor will not move above the first line or below the last line 6 37 Setup Menus Received LF is CR LF Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines how the emulation interprets received line feed characters Selecting it will cause a carriage return command to be appended to every line feed command received Received CR is CR LF Factory default U
412. te Key to display the SSH Key Generation dialog box SSH Key Generation xj Filename Jinyssh DSA RSA New Group Generate Key 2 22 Getting Started 6 10 11 Enter a Filename This is the name the key will be stored under in the registry and the name displayed in the Keyfile drop down list in the previous dialog box Select the type of key you wish to create openSSH servers support both DSA and RSA keys Other servers may only support one or the other Both key generation algorithms require a group of large prime numbers to generate the key Generating these primes can take a several minutes As the same primes can be used for generating different keys we have split generating primes and generating keys into two separate options Clicking New Group will generate a new set of primes for the selected algorithm Clicking New Key will create a new key of the algorithm type specified using the existing group of primes If no group of primes already exists for that algorithm the New Key option will generate them automatically The two algorithms do not share the same prime number group because they require their primes to be generated in different ways Click Generate Key to create a new key You will be prompted for a passphrase to encrypt your private key SSH Connection Please enter a passphrase for your new key Cancel Passphrase Confirm Save Enter the Passphrase and Confirmiit
413. tect mode ESC Clear unprotected characters amp replace with replacement characters ESC or SUB Clear unprotected characters amp replace with null characters ESC FUNCTION KEYS Select function key set 0 set one set two ESC 7 v Reprogram a function key 955 compatible 1 value 955 compatible 1 value Key Unshifted Shifted Key Unshifted Shifted Fl 1 A F9 9 I F2 2 B F10 J F3 3 C F11 K F4 4 D F12 lt L F5 5 E F13 M F6 6 F F14 gt N F7 7 G F15 O F8 8 H F16 P ESC 1 2 lt message gt EM C 72 Host Command Summary Additional 1 values lt space gt Clear entire current function key set from memory 0 Load function keys in sequence 2 message destination values 1 Send message to host 2 Send message to terminal 3 Send message to both host and terminal Save function key reprogramming in non volatile memory ESC 10h Do not save function key reprogramming in non volatile memory ESC 101 Invoke a function key ESC 1 REPROGRAMMING EDITING KEYS Reprogram the SEND key 950 mode ESC 0 k c k Unshifted Shifted 1 2 e 4 ESC 4 command 7 ESC 7 command 5 ESC 5 command S ESC S command 6 ESC 6 command s ESCs command Reprogram any individual editing key 955 mode ESC 0 Ps p1 p2 p3 Reprogram all editing keys ESC Ps p1 p60 KEYBOARD amp BELL Keyboard locked ESC Keyboard unlocked ESC Lock keys ESC 1 Unlock keys ESC h 11 SetUp 13 Clear Space 12 Esc 14
414. tected field is filled the setting of this option determines whether or not the cursor automatically moves to the next field Auto Wrap Tabbing Factory default Unselected When the last unprotected field on the screen is filled the setting of this option determines whether or not the cursor automatically moves back to the first field on the screen Function Keys The keys mapped as FKC1 to FKC12 on your keyboard can be programmed to send control sequences or messages when pressed The button underneath the FKC text entry boxes enables you to toggle the display of shifted and unshifted functions 6 70 Setup Menus The T Type box entry determines what happens to the programmed contents of an FKC key when pressed This can have the value 0 1 or 2 When set to 0 the contents of the Message box will be sent to the host When set to 1 the contents of the Message box together with text that can be transmitted from the screen will be sent to the host When set to 2 the contents of the Message box will not be sent to the host but will will appear on the screen to the right of the cursor position The FC box has no function The Message box entry can consist of any alphanumeric characters Control characters can also be entered either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the ASCII character ESC can be entered by typing the characters where represents the Ctrl key
415. ted with each of the four modifier states in the following order Unshifted Shifted Alternate Shifted Shift 2 and Control if omitted use default Use a period as a place holder for an undefined modifier combination The hex code represents a valid code in the current 7 bit or 8 bit character set non Use a minus preceding the hex representation of a diacritical sign if a diacritical mark is to be defined Is a number associated with a local function as listed below For example function number 0 makes the key or key modifier inoperative Function number 100 indicates a user defined sequence UDS and a UDS direction is defined following the slash delimiter 0 No Function 91 Backspace 93 Escape 100 UDS 92 Cancel 94 Delete Is the user defined sequence specified in Hex format Each hex code in this string represents a value transmitted by the defined key combined with the modifiers Specifies the transmission direction Oornone Normal Host and or terminal default 1 Local Terminal only 2 Remote Host only C 13 Host Command Summary PROGRAMMING FUNCTION KEYS Program Function Key s DCS x D D ST where the data string D D format is as follows Key1 Mod1 Function UDS UDS Direction Key2 Mod2 Function UDS UDS Direction R Key Is the key station number of the key to be programmed as listed below 110 F10 121 Page Up 85 112 F11 122 Page Down 86 113 F12 123 Curso
416. ter istics are listed below Model Display Rows x Columns 5291 1 Monochrome 24 x 80 5292 2 Colour 24 x 80 5251 11 Monochrome 24 x 80 3179_2 Colour 24 x 80 default 3196_A1 Monochrome 24 x 80 3180_2 Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477_FC Colour 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477_FG Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3486_BA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487_HA Monochrome 24 x 80 12 3 IBM 5250 Emulation 10 11 3487_HC Colour 24 x 80 5555_B01 Monochrome 24 x 80 5555_C01 Colour 24 x 80 The printer models supported are listed below 3812 1 Single byte printer 5553 B01 Double byte printer If double byte character sets e g Japanese are supported and you wish to use them then select either 5555_B01 monochrome or 5555_C01 colour for display or 5553 B01 for printing Specify the Monochrome setting Note that all IBM 5250 models support both monochrome and colour display When monochrome is selected characters will be displayed in green and intense fields will be displayed in white When mono chrome is not selected the settings specified in the Attributes dialog box de scribed in the Setup Menus chapter will be used for the display Click OK to close the dialog box Select Save Session in the File menu Select New Connection in the File menu to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet
417. ter Insert TA_CHARINS Line Delete TA_LINEDEL Cursor Down TA_DOWN Line Insert TA_LINEINS Cursor Left TA_LEFT Num Lock TA_NUMLOCK Cursor Right TA_RIGHT Page Down TA_PAGEDOWN Cursor Up TA_UP Page Up TA_PAGEUP Delete TA_DEL Print Screen TA_PRTSCR End TA_END Return TA_RETURN Erase Line TA_ERASELINE Roll Down TA_ROLLDOWN Erase Page TA_ERASEPAGE Roll Up TA_ROLLUP Escape TA_ESC Tab TA_TAB Fl F16 TA_FI TA_F16 Tab Clear TA_TABCLEAR Home TA_HOME Tab Clear All TA_TABCLRALL Keypad 0 9 TA_PADO TA_PAD9 Tab Set TA_TABSET A 7 Virtual Key Names TVI 955 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Back Tab TV_BACKTAB FO F22 TV_FO TV_F22 Backspace TV_BACKSP Go To TV_GOTO Break TV_BREAK Keypad 00 TV_PADOO Clear Entry TV_CLRENTRY Line Feed TV_LINEFEED Clear Space TV_CLRSPACE Misc Functions TV_MO TV_M9 Cursor Down TV_DOWN No Scroll TV_NOSCROLL Cursor Left TV_LEFT Print TV_PRINT Cursor Right TV_RIGHT Reset TV_RESET Cursor Up TV_UP Return TV_RETURN Delete TV_DELETE Status TV_STATUS Enter TV_ENTER Tab TV_TAB Escape TV_ESCAPE Unisys T27 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Alt UT_ALT Insert Line UT_INSERTLINE Alt Lock UT_ALTLOCK Keypad 00 UT_NUMPAD00 Back UT BACK Keypad 0 9 UT_NUMPADO 9 Backspace UT_BACKSPACE Keypad Comma UT_NUMPADCOMMA Block UT_BLOCK Keypad Decimal UT NUMPADDECIMAL Bound UT_BOUND Local UT_LOCAL Clear UT_CLEAR Lock UT_LOCK Cl
418. ter set and the other possible second halves are the ISO Latin 1 and ISO Latin 2 Additional character sets These characters may be generated when the terminal is in VT500 7 or 8 bit mode the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to DEC MCS B 4 Character Sets DEC LINE DRAWING CHARACTER SET IO T mou o m gt e OI IN O Q OINI 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ox gt N lt x Z lt cla o 0 9 9 33 OCTAL KEY ESC gt pEciMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This is a special DEC character set which is used by some applications B 5 Character Sets ISO LATIN 1 ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET Multinational 8 Bit E i i i 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 DECIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This is one of three possible second halves of the Multinational character set the first half is the ASCII character set and the other possible second halves are the DEC Additional and ISO Latin 2 character sets These characters may be generated when the terminal is in VT500 7 or 8 bit mode the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings
419. ters A coloured line separates status information from the rest of the display Information is displayed in any of nine regions within the status line as listed below 1 Readiness amp System Connection Symbol Colour Column Meaning T Blue 1 Telnet session running A Blue 2 Online non SNA 2 Blue 3 Network Virtual Terminal mode E Blue 3 My job IBM emulation screen B Blue 3 Host operating system mode 2 Do Not Enter Symbol Colour Column Meaning X PROGnnn Yellow 10 18 Program check nnn error code X oe White 10 13 Terminal wait XANUM Red 10 15 Numeric data only XX Red 10 14 Go elsewhere X SYSTEM White 10 17 System lock Ki gt Red 10 13 Too much 3 Typing Direction Symbol Colour Column Meaning gt Blue 19 Typing direction left to right lt Blue 19 Typing direction right to left 4 Bilingual Keyboard Mode Symbol Colour Column Meaning N Blue 20 National character set mode L Blue 20 Latin character set mode 5 TN3270E Device Name Symbol Colour Column Meaning dddddddd White 22 29 TN3270E actual device name connected as IBM 3270 Emulation 6 Shift Symbol NUM Colour Column Meaning Blue 43 45 Numeric lock on 7 Mode Symbol Symbol A Colour Column Meaning Blue 53 Insert mode on 8 Display Direction Symbol 4 e Colour Column Meaning Blue 73 Normal display Blue 73 Right to left mirror display 9 Cursor Position Symbol rr cc or rr ccc Colour Colum
420. text character preceding the current cursor position will be deleted or not when the Backspace key is pressed 6 89 Setup Menus Screen Mapping Factory default 1024 x by 768 y This option enables you to select the correct resolution for screen addressing when in Tek 4014 or Westward 2119 graphics modes For Tek 4014 mode select 1024 x by 768 y resolution default For Westward 2119 mode select 1024 x by 784 y resolution Gin Terminators Factory default M D i e CR EOT This option enables you to specify the termination character s that follow a GIN address transmission A maximum of 6 characters can be entered To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character s For example the ASCII character CR can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as _013 6 90 Setup Menus GIN Mouse Definitions GIN Mouse Definitions Left Down E 552417 up Centre Down E 552437 up Right Down E 552457 up Cancel Default This dial
421. that the server is expecting a client certificate but none has been specified or the client certificate specified is invalid for some reason This error may also be seen if the server is running an incompatible version of SSL TeemTalk currently supports SSL2 SSL3 and TLS The server s certificate cannot be verified The server s identity certificate was not signed by any of the root certificates installed in TeemTalk TeemTalk will not connect to a host it cannot verify Common name does not match host name The common name is part of the server s certificate SSL assumes this will match the host name given in the Host Name box in the Connection Wizard or Connect To box in the New Connection dialog box If they do not match TeemTalk will not connect to the host Notes About Certificates The SSL Protocol uses three types of certificate 1 Server certificates These are always sent by the server to the client to validate the server s identity SSL handles them internally and they are never saved on the client 2 Client certificates These are sent by the client only if the server requests them and validate the client s identity The client will need to store these locally Usually a client will only have one certificate to validate it on a particular server but different servers may require different client certificates 2 19 Getting Started 3 CA Certificate Authority or root certificates These are used to
422. the Keyboard Type and National Character Settings options below will reflect the default settings for the chosen language and should only be changed by the System Administrator If they have been changed and you wish to restore the default settings in this dialog box click the Default button Unlock Delay Factory default 0 When the keyboard is unlocked by the host this specifies a delay in milliseconds before characters are sent Rule Line Factory default Cross A rule can be displayed across the emulation workspace at the cursor position by pressing the keys Alt Page Down which toggles it on and off The setting of this option determines whether it is displayed as a horizontal rule vertical rule or both cross Follows Cursor Factory default Unselected When the rule is displayed in the emulation workspace the setting of this option determines whether or not the rule follows the cursor when it moves Numeral Swap Factory default Unselected When using a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard this will cause all numbers to be displayed using the National character set when in Latin mode Symbol Swap Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause symbols such as brackets to be displayed the correct way round when typing in right to left mode 6 57 Setup Menus Telnet Options Clicking the Telnet Options button will display a dialog box with additional options These are described in the
423. the following key functions will be enabled Ctrl Alt F1 Select Multinational 8 bit mode and left to right typing Ctrl Alt F2 Select National 7 bit mode lowercase English characters will be displayed as Hebrew and right to left typing Ctrl Alt F3 Toggle between left to right and right to left typing Save Screen Before Clearing Factory default Unselected This applies to all DEC VT emulations except VT340 and VT420 It determines the effect of a clear screen command received from the host When unselected the contents of the current page will be cleared When selected the contents of the current page will be saved and the display will scroll to the next page Save Scrolled Lines Factory default Unselected If a scroll region is set selecting this option will cause data scrolled out of the region to be stored in a history buffer Vertical Coupling Factory default Selected The setting of this VT420 mode option determines what happens when the application moves the cursor to a line not currently displayed in the window when the number of displayed lines is less than the page size When selected the display will automatically scroll vertically to keep the cursor in view When unselected the display will remain static and the cursor will move off screen to the relevant line stored in memory You can scroll the display to view the lines stored off screen by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the Up or Down Cursor keys
424. the mouse Enables you to highlight an area of the image to magnify it so that it fills the allocated space the aspect ratio is preserved Additional functions such as rotation and colouring are controlled by the host 12 11 IBM 5250 Emulation Notes 12 12 IBM 3151 Emulation 13 IBM 3151 Emulation This chapter describes features of the IBM 3151 terminal emulation Introduction The IBM 3151 emulation is based on the native mode of the IBM 3151 Model 11 terminal The emulation is configured using the IBM 3151 Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter The display is set to 24 rows by 80 columns by default but you can select one of four display formats from the IBM 3151 Settings dialog box 24 rows x 80 columns 25 rows x 80 columns 24 rows x 132 columns 25 rows x 132 columns Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter Q 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box 2 Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed 3 Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name bo
425. three main modes Conversational Block or ANSI Conversational and Block modes are normally used for applications running on a NonStop host system and ANSI mode for applications running on the LXN host system Conversational Mode In Conversational mode characters are sent to the host as you type them This is useful when applications need to interact with you on a character word or line by line basis Display memory is treated as one long page consisting of 400 lines of which 24 lines may be viewed at any one time Lines above or below those currently displayed may be scrolled into view using cursor or display control keys Once all the display memory has been used new data will force all previous lines of data up one line so that the first line is erased ensuring that the oldest data is erased first The status line will display CONV when you are in Conversational mode Block Mode In Block mode characters are stored in a communications buffer and are not transmitted to the host until the application requests them The characters are then sent as a block This enables you to enter a large amount of data and edit it locally before it is transmitted Block mode has two sub modes Block Nonprotect and Block Protect In Block Nonprotect mode you can enter any type of character at any position on the screen except on the 25th line In Block Protect mode the application divides the screen into protected and nonprotected areas called f
426. tion Virtual Key Name Alternate Code Page AS_ALTCP Field Plus AS_FIELDPLUS Attention AS_ATTN Go To End Of Line AS_GO_EOL Back Tab AS_BACKTAB Help AS_HELP Backspace AS_BACKSPACE Home AS_HOME Backspace non dest AS_NONDESTBS Insert Mode AS_INSERT Clear AS_CLEAR Monochrome AS_MONO Cursor Down AS_DOWN New Line AS_ NEWLINE Cursor Left AS_LEFT PAI PA3 AS_PAI AS_PA3 Cursor Right AS_RIGHT Pause AS_PAUSE Cursor Fast Left AS_FASTLEFT Play Keystrokes AS_ PLAY Cursor Fast Right AS_FASTRIGHT Print Local AS_PRINTLOCAL Cursor Select AS_CURSORSEL Print AS_PRINT Cursor Up AS_UP Push Mode On Off AS PUSH Delay 1 Second AS_DELAY Quit AS_QUIT Delete Character AS_DELCHAR Record Keystrokes AS_RECORD Duplicate AS_DUP Reset AS_RESET Enter AS_ENTER Roll Down AS_ROLLDOWN Erase End Of Field AS ERASEEOF Roll Up AS_ROLLUP Erase Input AS_ERASEINPUT Rule Display AS_RULE F1 F24 AS_F1 AS_F24 System Request AS_SYSREQ Field Exit AS_FIELDEXIT Tab AS_TAB Field Mark AS_FIELDMARK Test AS_TEST Field Minus AS_FIELDMINUS IBM 5250 Word Processing Mode Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Begin Bold AS_WP_BOLD Top of Page AS_WP_TOP_PAGE Begin Underline AS_WP_UNDERLINE End of Page AS_WP_END_PAGE Word Underline AS_WP_WORD_UNDER Start New Page AS _WP_NEW_PAGE End Attribute Centre Text Half Index Up Half Index Down Next Text Column Beginning of Line End of Line AS_WP_END_ATTR AS_WP_CENTRE AS_WP_HI_UP AS_WP_HI_DOWN AS_WP_NEXT_COL AS_WP
427. tion from the list or enter a valid host name or internet address The host connection will be closed if you change the settings in the New Connection dialog box and attempt to connect if you log out of the host or the host closes the connection Warning messages will be displayed if the host closes the connection or you attempt to open a new session or exit the emulator while a session is open Making A Serial Host Connection To connect to a serial host select Serial in the Type list box default then select the Com port required in the Connect To list box Click the Configure button to display the Serial Settings dialog box and make sure the settings match that of the host Click OK then Connect Serial Settings r x Baud Rate Data Bits 9600 v 8 v Parity on Bits Moe z Flow Control Transmit Rate V On Line jinput ut Unlimited fino x aut Local Echo Note These options are described in the Serial Settings section later in this chapter and only apply when the connection type is set to Serial Setup Menus Making A Network Host Connection To connect to a network host node select TCP IP in the Type list box The Connect To box will display the available devices on the network Select the name of the device required or enter the host name or IP address If the session was created using the Connection Wizard and the Host Rollover On Connection Fail option was selected you can specify up to three more hos
428. tion warning on close option If supported the optional Enable PC Style Windowing option enables multiple windows to be displayed when running CE version 4 2 and above The Mouse Cursor Style option enables you to choose from a range of cursor styles 2 37 Getting Started Aux Port Settings The Aux Port Settings dialog box enables you to specify a COM or LPT port for bidirectional output when in any DEC VT mode ANSI BBS Sco Console HP 700 92 96 or IBM 3151 mode Terminal Emulation Auxport Setup ma Auxiliary Port Figure Functionality Bi directional Open at session start up The Functionality options enable you to set the auxiliary port as bidirectional and specify that it is to be opened at start up Clicking the Configure button will display a dialog box in which you can specify settings for the COM port The options in it are described in the Serial Settings section earlier in this chapter Configuration of COMI H E Baud Rate __ rData Bits 9600 8 Parity Stop Bits None z t z Flow Control Input X 2 38 Getting Started Session Management Windows XPe The way that TeemTalk for Windows XPe sessions are created or modified depends on whether you are logged on as a system administrator or as a user without administrative privileges Logged On As System Administrator If you are logged on as a system admin
429. tions Set cursor position using P command amp options Set temporary writing controls effective only for the command using W Writing Control cmd amp options F C sub options F V sub options F P sub options F W sub options options C 55 Host Command Summary LOADING CHARACTER SETS Assign name to set currently selected for loading Select set for loading amp assign name Select specified character set for loading Specify character form in hex codes amp ASCII reference character POSITION SELECTION L A set name L A set number set name L A set number L ascii char hex codes Select active position amp move cursor to it Specify position to move to via a PCV using PCV active only for current command Specify series of positions to move to Post command active position last specified position Specify series of positions to move to Post command active position pre command active position Specify writing with first bit of pattern REQUESTING REPORTS P coordinates P W M pcm pev P S positions amp options E P B positions amp options E PI Request report of active position R P Request report of command set stored for specified character R M character Request report of last detected error R E Request report of name assigned to char set currently selected for loading R L Request report of total amp remaining space available
430. tions that are provided on the DG 410 412 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the DG virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box Key Functions Local Print The Local Print key is used to print the current window or initiate the Print Form operation You can print the contents of the current window starting with the row containing the cursor by pressing the Local Print key on its own Keyboard entered data will be ignored while the print is in progress You can abort the print operation by pressing the Local Print key again You can initiate the Print Form operation by holding down the Shift key then pressing Local Print This performs the same function as Local Print pressed on its own except that only data appearing at full intensity will be printed when protected text is disabled When protected text is enabled only unprotected text will be printed Cursor Type This key enables you to change the appearance of the cursor By default the cursor is displayed as a reverse video block Pressing and releasing the Cursor Type key one or more times will cause the cursor display to change in the following order Blinking underline Invisible cursor Blinking reverse video block Non blinking reverse video block default N C Pressing this key will cause the display of the current text region to toggle between normal and compressed character spacing mode In normal mode the display is 81 column
431. to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 17 1 TA6530 Emulation Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button The Tandem 6530 emulation is configured using the TA6530 Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the TA6530 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or inte
432. ton specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details BQ 3107 Emulation Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the BQ3107 terminal emulation required in the Alpha Emulation list box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection select Modem specify the com
433. ts in the boxes below The emulator will attempt to connect to each specified host in turn until one is successful Clicking the Telnet Options button will display a dialog box with additional options These are described in the Getting Started chapter Telnet Options fok Port Number Telnet Name vt420 Local Port Number 0 oO Enable Keep Alives Suppress _ Force Negotiation Echo Binary fno M EOR fno v 3 Break Settings 4q s o M TM with Break _s2s0 options 1 CR with Break Send Location Clicking the Connect button or the name of the host in the Connect To list box twice will cause the emulator to attempt to connect to the specified host If a connection cannot be made because the network driver is not installed or the host node name is invalid an error message will indicate this Failure to connect for any other reason will result in a Connection Failed message Making A Modem Host Connection For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have made the relevant selections click OK then Connect Dial Connection fok Configuration Name Select a Modem Hayes Compatible on COM1 v Configure 1 Country Code Area Code Telephone Number 44 1908 Dialing from Pericom Force long distance Dialing
434. ts the control key on the keyboard e Additional value for ESC The following backslash values can be used u Unicode introducer r Carriage return n Line feed e Escape Note that as the and characters are used as value introducers to enter these as character values you need to precede them with a backslash character i e enter Vas and as The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value u20ac 6 102 Setup Menus Mouse Button Actions Mouse Button Actions OR x Left Right P ml ZET carresto SSS Control action Hotspot sw assia wf Control shit show Fosos it rese i Moeaa Weno SSS Double Click Select word Unassigned VJ Highlight when Actioned This dialog box is displayed by selecting Mouse Button Actions in the Settings menu This enables you to specify the function of the left and right mouse buttons when they are clicked on their own or in conjunction with modifier keys You can assign up to six functions to each button either entering your own definition in the same format as described for keyboard macros and soft buttons or selecting from a list of standard built in functions Clicking one of the arrow buttons will display a drop down list box which lists all the standard functions that can be assigned Unassigned Send CR Select Send Keyword Extend Selection Middle Button Edit Copy Select Rectangle Edit Paste Select Word Show Hotspots S
435. tup Alt F2 IB_NB_SETUP Zoom Alt Page Up IB_NB_ZOOM Jump Ctrl Page Up IB_NB_JUMP NB Copy Ctrl Shift Page Up IB_NB_COPY Copy Shift Page Down IB_COPY Copying Screen Data To The Display 1 Position the text cursor at the start of the area to be copied 2 Press the Copy key to start the Copy function Note that the status line will display the key functions available 3 Use the cursor keys to move the text cursor to the diagonally opposite corner of the display area to be copied The currently selected area will be highlighted in green Note that you can toggle the position of the text cursor between the two diagonally opposite corners of the selected area by pressing the Return key 11 15 IBM 3270 Emulation 4 Press F13 to copy the selected area The copied area i e the target will be highlighted in red Use the cursor keys to move the red target area to the required position on the display You can also use the Jump key to move the target area to the host screen or Notice Board Press Enter on the numeric keypad to save the copied area at the current position on the display Copying Screen Data To A Function Key Note that the Notice Board Setup dialog box has several options which determine whether this facility is enabled and whether all screen data in the selected area is copied or only data in user entry fields 1 2 Position the text cursor at the start of the area to be copied Press the
436. tware designed to drive IBM 5250 type alphanumeric terminals This emulation can be used for connection to an IBM AS 400 System 36 or System 38 Note that the initial display will be an ASCII text screen known as Network Virtual Terminal mode NVT mode for short Refer to the IBM 5250 Emulation chapter for details The MDI P12 P8 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the McDonnell Douglas Prism 12 and Prism 8 terminals Refer to the MDIS Prism Emulations chapter for details The MDI Prism 9 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the McDonnell Douglas Prism 9 terminal Refer to the MDIS Prism Emulations chapter for details The PT250 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Prime PT250 terminal Refer to the PT250 Emulation chapter for details Sco Console is an emulation of the SCO UNIX box The Siemens 97801 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Siemens 97801 terminal Refer to the Siemens 97801 Emulation chapter for details The Stratus V102 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Stratus V102 terminal The TA6530 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Tandem 6530 terminal This emulation is described in the TA6530 Emulation chapter The TVI 910 TVI 920 and TVI 925 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the TeleVideo 910 920 and 925 termin
437. u Note This function does not take effect when the emulation is in Local mode In Remote mode received data is sent directly to the selected device s The keyboard will be disabled when Record mode is activated except for the F2 key which is used to exit the mode Log Bottom F3 When the cursor moves to the next line as a result of an explicit line feed or end of line wraparound the line of data which the cursor has just moved from will be sent to the printer when this function is activated This enables you to create a hardcopy of all the lines in the order in which they were entered via the keyboard or received from the host Note Both the emulation and the host must be using the ENQ ACK or Xon Xoff handshakes or a baud rate that is no higher than the rate supported by the printer 10 10 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Log Bottom remains activated until either this button or F3 is pressed again Log Top is activated a reset is performed or the emulation is exited Log Top F4 When the display memory becomes full and more data is received from the host or keyboard lines of data from the top of the display are deleted to make way for the new data The Log Top function enables the data that is removed from the top of the display to be sent to the printer when the To Ext Dev function is activated in the Device Control menu Note Both the emulation and the host must be using the ENQ ACK or Xon Xoff handshakes or a baud r
438. u suonound sdeS y y uo spu B y Aq peyeolpul se uonouni s y peyJeWWUN V E B6esn y jewloN besn y 1IV N334OSN33H40S Dan Sa EOFS JUH 30VdS1OV8 fz71 ANH anid f 7 gt 4 sn 1H3SNI 313730 poui 93A 9 PWN uaamjoq s 66o1 3301 WNN WW 8ld Id OG d13H 7 6 DEC VT Emulations Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout DEC Mode apow ped y uoneolldde ul p lej u B ase sl yoeuq asenbs u suonounj sdeS y y uo spu B y Aq peyeolpul se uonounj s y peayseWUN V 10H eBesn Aey eWON eBesn Aey yy INFSHOSINASHOS IXI Ad O313S 3d3H ani ae WHON Nna 1H3SNI aM 313740 apoW 93d 8 PUWWON uaamjaq 3 660 4907 WNN 4Y 8l4d Zid OG d13H DEC VT Emulations Typing Direction For Hebrew Language When ISO Hebrew or Ansi PC Hebrew 862 is selected as the Preferred Character Set in the Terminal Settings dialog box the following key functions will be enabled Ctrl Alt F1 Select Multinational 8 bit mode and left to right typing Ctrl Alt F2 Select National 7 bit mode low
439. u to send printer specific commands to specify for example font size colour or page header and footer Advanced Printer Configuration JOR x Sequences To Send At Initialisation Init amp l6D At Termination Term E Setup Menus XPe Direct Print Data To A Network Printer To direct print data to a printer on the network when running TeemTalk for Windows XPe select Use Network Printer LPR and enter the LPD Hostname Clicking the Setup button will display an LPD Device Settings dialog box that enables you to specify various print settings LPD Device Settings LPD Device dsdsd Printer Name Cancel Job Name User Name Number of Copies f OK 2222 Retries 0 Retry Delay 0 Secs You must specify the Printer Name The Job Name and User Name entries are optional the User Name will default to root if none is specified You can specify how many times the LPR protocol will attempt to execute the print job before cancelling by setting the number of Retries and the number of seconds delay between each attempt Clicking the Advanced button will display a dialog box that enables you to send printer specific commands to specify for example font size colour or page header and footer When Add Banner is selected information about this print job will be printed with it You can display a message box which will indicate the progress of the print job by selecting Debug Information Advan
440. ual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box 10 3 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout LINX L payiys ase s y y u ym paesu ale s eyOeIq u suonound sdeS y y uo spu B y Aq peyeolpul se uonouni s y poy ewun y H LYASNI eBesn Aey IPULION eBesn Aey Ionuoo 1049S 49S 39Vd NMOG YWHO 1X3N SWOH 615140 dvd dN 3QON Aadd 3NOH 1H3SNI saayn isasn 84 a 934 oa s430 13534 13539 a ADIN NW avh 140s Haas 313130 1H3SNI 10 4 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Buttons amp Function Keys The buttons along the bottom of the HP 700 92 06 window indicate the current function of keys F1 through F8 on the keyboard each key and equivalent button having several functions within the emulation The buttons and equivalent function keys enable selection of various operating modes and display configurations Clicking a button has the same effect as pressing the equivalent F key When a key or button is attributed an on off toggle action the button will display an asterisk when the function is selected The middle button displays the row and column position of the cursor It has no other function On entering HP 700 92 96 mode the buttons and function keys enable
441. ulation C 42 PT250 emulation C 49 ReGIS emulation C 55 SCO Console emulation C 58 Siemens 97801 emulation C 61 TA6530 emulation C 64 Tek 4010 4014 emulation C 68 TV1I955 emulation C 70 Unisys T27 emulation C 76 Viewdatamode C 78 VT400 emulation C 6 VT420 emulation C 9 VT510 emulation C 12 VT52emulation C 1 VT520 emulation C 15 VT640 emulation C 79 W2119 emulation C 81 Wyseemulations C 83 Wyse PC Term emulation C 89 Host Communications Auxport setup menu 6 74 Serial settings menu 6 72 Host Connection SSH Secure Shell 2 21 SSL Secure Sockets Layer 2 18 Host Information Connection Wizard 2 2 Hotspots Displaying all 2 47 Using 2 47 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Configuration selection 10 8 Devicecontrol 10 8 Display attributes 10 16 Function keys amp labels 10 3 Host command summary C 35 Key programming 10 13 Keyboard mapping 10 3 Margins tabs column 10 11 Mode selection 10 5 Session configuration 10 1 Setup settings 6 30 Specification D 3 Virtual key names A 4 IBM 3151 Emulation Host command summary C 39 Introduction 13 1 Keyboard mapping 13 4 Session configuration 13 1 Setup 6 39 Specification D 4 Statusbar 13 3 IBM 3270 Emulation Bilingual keyboard support 11 9 Character sets Austrian B 35 Belgian B 39 Canadian bilingual B 31 Danish B 33 English UK B 32 English US B 31 Finnish B 38 French B 34 German B 35 Italian B 36 Netherlands B 31 Norwegian B 33 Spanish B 37 Index 4
442. ule Line Cross 7 Follows Cursor English UK User Specified Charset 697 Codepage 285 r Right to Left Options Numeral Swap Symbol Swap Monochrome Ignore host cursor style Enhanced UI Hide WP Controls T Field Minus Justification Default This dialog box is displayed by selecting IBM 5250 in the Settings menu IBM 5250 Model Factory default 3179_2 This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported The terminal models and their display characteristics are listed below Model Display 5291_1 Monochrome 5292_2 Colour 5251_11 Monochrome 3179_2 Colour 3196_A1 Monochrome 3180_2 Monochrome 3477_FC Colour 3477_FG Monochrome 3486_BA Monochrome 3487_HA Monochrome 3487_HC Colour Rows x Columns 24 x 80 24 x 80 24 x 80 24 x 80 default 24 x 80 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 24 x 80 24 x 80 24 x 80 6 56 Setup Menus 5555_B01 Monochrome 24 x 80 5555_C01 Colour 24 x 80 The printer models are listed below 3812 1 Single byte printer 5553 B01 Double byte printer If double byte character sets are supported then select either 5555_B01 monochrome or 5555_C01 colour for display or 5553 B01 for printing Keyboard Type The settings of
443. ummary c character set as follows Default 94 Character Set Default 96 Character Set 4 Cyrillic DEC eee Greek DEC gt Greek NRCS 4 Hebrew DEC Hebrew NRCS 6 Portuguese NRCS amp 5 Russian NRCS 3 SCS NRCS 0 Turkish DEC 2 Turkish NRCS w gt ISO Latin 1 Supplemental ISO Latin 2 Supplemental ISO Greek Supplemental ISO Hebrew Supplemental ISO Latin 5 Supplemental ISO Latin Cyrillic Select zero symbol CSI Oval zero 1 Zero with slash 2 Zero with dot 3 Request user preferred supplemental set CSI amp u Keyboard Auto repeat rate CSI p Off 0 5 Slow 10 cps 6 15 Fast 30 cps 16 30 Copy key default Key source Key dest K s K d DCS z ST Define function key SCO Extended keyboard report Hebrew encoding mode set 8 bit char Hebrew encoding mode reset 7 bit char Keyboard language selection t keyboard type DEC keyboard layout Enhanced PC layout ESC Q Fn string APC ppp mm ST CSI 36h CSI 361 CSI t 1 SP 0 1 2 keyboard language as follows Keyboard language VT PC Keyboard language VT PC none North American 15 Spanish Oorl 16 Portuguese 2 British 19 Hebrew 3 Belgian 22 Greek 4 French Canadian 28 Canadian English 5 Danish 29 Turkish Q Turkish 6 Finnish 30 Turkish F Turkish T German 31 Hungarian 8 Dutch 33 Slovak 9 Italian 34 Czech 10 Swiss French 35 Polish 11 Swiss Ger
444. unctions File Edit Settings Note The buttons available depend on whether or not you are in WBT mode Setup Menus Windows CE Three menus can be displayed from the command bar These are headed File Edit and Settings Reset Terrninal Open Session Close Session Save Session Factory Default New Connection Save Session As Startup Options v Clipboard Text Clipboard Graphics Select All Printer Setup Print Screen Print Buffer Auto Print Cancel Print Eject Page Exit Clear Buffer Settings v English French German Emulation HP 700 92 96 IBM 5250 Unisys T2 BQ 3107 Serial Auxport Terminal Local Editing Block Transmission Attributes Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Mouse Button Action Note The options available in the menus depend on whether or not you are in WBT mode Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for a complete discussion on selecting and using the options in these menus 2 41 Getting Started The Button Tools Windows CE The TeemTalk for Windows CE button tools provide a quick way of actioning commands or displaying setup dialog boxes by just clicking a button Displays the New Connection dialog box for making a serial or network host connection Closes the current host connection Displays the Open Session dialog box This enables you to load a particular setup configurat
445. underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as _013 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references 6 88 Setup Menus Tek 4014 Settings Tek 4014 Settings Auto New Line Auto Line Feed Dual Margin I Destructive Backspace r Screen Mapping 1024 x by 768 y C 1024 x by 784 y Gin Terminators Fu D Cancel This dialog box is only available if your version of TeemTalk supports graphics emulations It is displayed when running the Tek 4014 emulation by selecting Tek Graphics in the Settings menu Auto New Line Factory default Unselected When selected this will cause a carriage return command to be appended to every line feed command received Auto Line Feed Factory default Unselected When selected this will cause a line feed command to be appended to every carriage return command received Dual Margin Factory default Unselected This option enables a second margin for graphics text When selected the window will be divided vertically into two halves The cursor will move to the top of the second margin after it has reached the last column of the bottom line of the first margin Text will then fill the right half of the window Destructive Backspace Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether the graphics
446. ure terminal Selective key programming Store data in hexadecimal codes Program function keys F1 F10 Transmit error log Copy temporary storage into nonvolatile RAM Display message in environmental user status line ESC RA start length data ESC R C ESC RB dc s kpt ESCRC ESC R D hex prog 00 hex prog 00 00 ESC R H start length data ESC R C ESC R K length key prog A 9 length key prog A9 A 9 ESCRL ESCRP ESC R S number of bytes data Transmit memory temporary storage contents to host ESC R T start number of bytes MISCELLANEOUS SEQUENCES Start escape sequence Set shift out to extended character set Reset shift out shift in Character translation bright 7 end highlight underscore 8 blink reverse 9 secure Reset keystroke lockout Fill with character Transmit terminal screen to host Toggle audible alarm Display character set Load contents of permanent storage amp reconfigure Display version number Toggle variable tabs Set mobile home Lowercase disable Lowercase enable End of text processing End of transmission ESC ESC SO or SO ESC SI or SI ESC ESC ESC _ ESC ESC or BEL ESC space C ESC space D ESC space V ESC or VT ESCD ESC Y ESCZ ETX EOT C 77 Host Command Summary Viewdata Mode COLOUR SELECTION Background cell colour previous character colour ESC Cell background colour black default ESC
447. ursor ESC c N width height COLOUR SELECTION Wyse 350 colour Select colour palette palette ID in range 0 ESC Redefine attribute association ESC m r c m r display attribute group or write protect to be redefined range 0 8 c the colour assigned range 6 m the monochrome attributes assigned 0 Normal Reverse Underline Underline amp reverse Wyse 60 ASCII colour Foreground colour palette Select border colour Background colour Assign foreground colour Assign background colour Assign display attribute to unprotected characters Redefine character attribute association Assign foreground background colours Assign fore background colours to write prot chars Assign foreground colours to write protected chars Assign background colours to write protected chars Assign display attribute to write protected characters Assign replacement character colours amp attributes CURSOR ESC Aa ESC Ab ESC Ac ESC Ad ESC Ae ESC A f ESC A g attr f b assoc ESC Ah ESC Ai ESC Aj ESC Ak ESC Al ESC A y f b a Address cursor in current 80 132 column page Address cursor in current 80 column page Address cursor in specific 80 column page Address cursor in specific 80 column window page Address cursor column Address cursor row Autowrap mode off Autowrap mode on Clear all tab stops Clear tab stop Cursor down scroll Cursor left ESC a line R
448. ursor position report line c column SYSTEM MESSAGES ESC lt 12 g bn ESC lt 13 m gn ESC lt l cR Write data into system message area starting at column ESC System messages not visible ESC lt 81 System messages displayed on last screen line ESC lt 8h TERMINAL CONTROL Soft reset ESC amp p Reset to initial state ESCc ANSI terminal emulation mode ESC lt 121 Model 12080 terminal emulation mode ESC lt 12h Sound alarm BEL MDIS Prism 12 Emulation When teemtalk is running the Prism 12 emulation the following commands will be executed in addition those listed previously for Prism 8 and Prism 9 Data stream filler character Cursor home Function key control Generate user defined codes Do not generate any codes Generate standard codes Generate short codes hex 80 B3 Set video attributes for next display field Cursor forward 1 character position Sound bell Backspace Line feed Cursor vertical position Form feed Carriage return Select Multinational character set in Multinational mode Select ASCII character set in Multinational mode Horizontal position Cursor back Cursor up Escape sequence introducer Special single shift Space compression codes Reserved NUL SOH STX 90 91 92 93 ETX ACK BEL BS LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE NAK SUB ESC GS Hex AO to Hex BF Hex E0 C 47 Host Command Summary Set S mode Hex El Cursor on He
449. ute report that is sent in response to a request from the host Answerback String This option enables you to specify the Answerback string that is sent to the host in response to an ANSI mode enquiry command The string may be up to 30 characters long Answerback Concealed Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause the Answerback string specified in the text box above to be locked from change and displayed as asterisks Note that deselecting this option will cause the Answerback string to be deleted 6 29 Setup Menus HP 700 92 96 Settings Local Echo a Terminal ID Caps Lock xmitFnctn A 70092 v spow B E be af InhEolwrp C Return Def M Start Column fi FldSeparator F BlkTerminator F Typeahead Enabled FQ Host Prompt Character This dialog box is displayed by selecting HP 700 92 96 in the Settings menu Local Echo Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether keyboard entered characters are displayed on the screen as well as sent to the host When unselected characters are not displayed when they are transmitted to the host unless the host echoes them back Caps Lock Factory default Unselected This determines whether the full 128 character ASCII range can be generated or only Teletype compatible codes When this option is unselected all 128 ASCII characters can be generated When selected unshifted alphabetic keys will gen
450. utton again to return to the Button and Command selection display The Visible option enables you to specify whether or not the toolbar is displayed Adding Buttons 1 Click the down arrow button to the right of the Current Tool box to display the buttons currently in the toolbar 2 Click on the button which will be to the right of the new button to be added so that it is displayed in the Current Tool box 3 Click the down arrow button again to display the Command options 4 Select a button bitmap from the Buttons list You can add your own bitmaps to the standard bitmap list by clicking the Add Custom Bitmap button and selecting the bitmap files to load Buttons will be automatically generated using the bitmaps in these files 6 105 Setup Menus Specify the command to be performed when this button is clicked either by selecting from the Commands list or by typing your own definition in the Current Tool text box Click the Insert at Current button Click OK when you have finished The toolbar will immediately be updated Adding A Space Between Buttons 1 ON SME P gS Click the down arrow button to the right of the Current Tool box to display the buttons currently in the toolbar Click on the button which will be to the right of the space to be added so that it is displayed in the Current Tool box Click the down arrow button again to display the Command options Select the Space option at the top of the Co
451. value of the ASCII character For example the default ASCII character US can be entered by typing the characters and _ representing the keys Ctrl _ which when pressed together would generate the US code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of US is 31 so this would be entered as _031 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references BlkTerminator Factory default i e RS This text box is used to specify the ASCII character sent to the host to indicate the end of a data block transmission To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the default ASCII character RS can be entered by typing the character twice representing the keys Ctrl which when pressed together would generate the RS code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of RS is 30 so this would be entered as _030 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references Terminal ID Factory default 70092 This specifie
452. vel 1 VT100 none 0 1 5 VT520 525 2 3 4 5 b data bits 8 bit controls none 0 2 Terminal mode emulation terminal mode Auto answerback mode set Auto answerback mode reset Conceal answerback message mode set Conceal answerback message mode reset Load answerback message data string of hex pairs 7 bit controls 1 VT520 525 VT level 5 VT100 VT52 VT PCTerm WYSE 160 60 WYSEPCTerm WYSE 50 50 WYSE 150 120 TVI 950 TVI 925 TVI 910 ADDS A2 SCO Console WYSE 325 Load banner message string of up to 30 chars e message encoding ASCII hexadecimal pairs Text as VT default char set CSI SP CSI 100h CSI 1001 CSI 101h CSI 1011 CSI 1 v ST CSI e r ST 1 2 none 0 C 22 Host Command Summary Status line type CSI No status line 0 Indicator status line 1 Host writable status line 2 Communications Select communication port CSI p h u p printer port h host port None 0 Comm1 1 Centronics 1 Comm2 2 Comm3 4 Comm3 3 note that the last is part of the command Select communication speed CSI 1 s t r comm line s speed Host transmit none 0 1 Use default none 0 Host receive 2 300 1 Printer 3 600 2 Modem Hi 4 1200 3 Modem Lo 5 2400 4 4800 5 9600 6 19200 7 38400 8 57600 9 76800 10 115200 11 note that the last is part of the command Set port parameters CSI p d y s w p port d
453. ween each tab stop next to the Set Every button then click the button Individual tab stops can be toggled on or off by clicking the mouse pointer above or below the relevant column number To remove all the tab stops click the Clear All button To save the current tab stops select Save Session in the File menu 6 82 Setup Menus Local Editing Edit Operation Interactive Edit Unavailable Edit Key Action Immediate Deferred V Clear Unprotected 1 Attributes Cleared 1 Protect From Host This dialog box is displayed by selecting Local Editing in the Settings menu Edit Operation Factory default Unavailable The setting of this option determines whether Local Editing mode can be selected and how editing is performed Selecting Unavailable will prevent you or the host from entering Edit mode Selecting Edit will cause text to be stored in page memory so that it can be edited locally This enables the host to get on with other tasks A block of data will be transmitted to the host when the Enter key is pressed Selecting Interactive will cause characters to be sent to the host as soon as they are typed at the keyboard The host will perform editing functions Edit Key Action Factory default Immediate When this option is set to Immediate Edit mode will be entered immediately when the Shift Delete key combination is pressed without waiting for the host to send the command to enter When s
454. width amp height bottom half characters ESC 4 Double width single height characters ESC 6 Select underline character mode ESC lt 1 Single width amp height normal characters ESC 5 CHARACTER SET SELECTION Assign GO label to character set ESC Assign G1 label to character set ESC ASCII N American B Italian Y British A Danish Norwegian or E or 6 Dutch 4 Portuguese 6 Finnish 5 or C Spanish Z French R Swedish 7 or H French Canadian Yor Q Swiss German K Line Drawing 0 Assign GO labelled set to 7 bit codes SI Assign G1 labelled set to 7 bit codes SO CURSOR Cursor on ESC 25h Cursor off ESC 251 Clear tab stops 0 cursor position 2 or 3 all ESC g Deselect auto carriage return ESC 201 Disable cursor ESC 501 Disable cursor autowrap ESC 71 Enable cursor ESC 50h Enable cursor autowrap ESC 7h Index cursor move down one line ESC D Insert FF character amp advance cursor FF Line feed LF Move cursor down lines ESC B Move cursor down one line VT Move cursor left columns ESC D Move cursor one column left BS Move cursor right columns ESC C Move cursor to beginning of next line ESCE Move cursor to left margin of current line CR Move cursor to line column c ESC 1 c H Move cursor to line column c ESC 1 c f Move cursor to next tab stop HT Move cursor up lines ESC A Reverse index cursor move up one line ESCM Select absolute origin mode ESC 61 Select auto carriage retur
455. window 20 10 Initialization Commands Disable Minimize Button Registry Entry MinimizeBox off Command Line MN Default Setting on These commands will remove the minimize button from the emulator window Disable Maximize Button Registry Entry MaximizeBox off Command Line MX Default Setting on These commands will remove the maximize button from the emulator window Disable Close Window Items Registry Entry MenuCloseltem off Command Line MT Default Setting on These commands will remove the Close window option from the Control System menu and disable the close window X button at the top right corner of the emulator window Disable System Menu Registry Entry SystemMenu off Command Line None Default Setting on This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It will remove the System Control menu icon from the emulator window 20 11 Initialization Commands Disable System Menu amp Min Maximize Buttons Registry Entry SystemMenu none Command Line None Default Setting on This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It will remove the System Control menu icon and the Minimize and Maximize buttons from the emulator window Disable Command Bar Registry Entry CmdBarTools 0 Command Line MA Default Setting on This will disable the command bar Disable Command Bar Registry
456. without a session i e not started by clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu you can use the Open Session dialog box to select a session configuration for TeemTalk to load This is displayed by selecting Open Session in the File menu Setup Menus Defined Sessions D Session T D Untitled T Save As Default Delete The Defined Sessions list box displays one line descriptions of session configurations that were created using the TeemTalk Connection Wizard or the Save Session As dialog box when running TeemTalk The session configuration currently loaded is highlighted Clicking on a defined session then the OK button will cause TeemTalk to load that session configuration The session configuration that TeemTalk will load by default on startup is indicated by a letter D next to its name You can change the default selection by selecting the required session description then clicking the Save As Default button Session templates created by the system administrator are indicated by the letter T after the session name Refer to the Session Management section in the Getting Started chapter for details You can delete any session configurations except templates by selecting the description then clicking the Delete button Note that if the session deleted was a copy of a template which will have the same name the template version will reappear in the Defined Sessions list as indicated b
457. wu0N 300 eBesn y UW avi avLyove JHOSYUND Osa laaoo 16 4 TA6530 Emulation 17 TA6530 Emulation This chapter describes features of the Tandem 6530 terminal emulation Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the TA6530 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer
458. x 13 1 IBM 3151 Emulation 4 5 Select the IBM 3151 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection click the Modem button then click Advanced to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select
459. x E2 Start of system message Hex E3 Cursor off Hex E4 End of system message Hex E5 Give terminal status Hex E6 Set screen format Hex E7 Display system message Hex E8 Display user line 25 Hex E9 Select active screen Hex EA Set R mode Hex EB Set video prior conditions Hex EC Screen move Hex ED Filler Hex EE Character fill Hex EF Page back Hex F5 Page forward Hex F6 Scroll back Hex F7 Scroll forward Hex F8 Run diagnostics ESC D Erase to end of page ESCJ Erase to end of line ESCK DCS sequence ESC P Printer on ESCR Printer off ESC T Print screen ESC U CSI sequence introducer ESC C 48 Host Command Summary PT250 Emulation AREA amp LOGICAL ATTRIBUTES Assert defined logical attributes ESC gt 3h Assert defined logical attributes disabled ESC gt 31 Clear reset selected areas ESC K Define area qualification ESC o All printing characters 2 Numeric characters 3 Alphabetic characters 4 Right justify in area 5 Protected no input accepted default gt 0 Must enter the area gt 1 Must fill the whole area gt 2 Set modified data tag gt 3 Define logical attributes ESC v All printing characters 2 Numeric characters 3 Alphabetic characters 4 Right justify in area 5 Protected no input accepted default gt 0 Must enter the area gt 1 Must fill the whole area gt 2 Set modified data tag gt 3 Field entry check ESC C Logical attributes start ESC L Logical attributes
460. xillary port support No Control Unit customisation The specification is also defined by the 5250 Device Capabilities report Bytes 0 thru 5 which are 0x7f 0x11 0x4e 0x00 0x03 0x80 for Display Sessions IBM 3151 Native Emulation Model 11 amp 31 Specification IBM 3151 Ascii Display Station Reference Manual GA18 2634 01 1989 ICL 7561 Specification ICL DRS300 manual R15722 001 Appendix 1 September 1986 Limitations Some field validation checks are not supported Load templates are not supported Host print protocol is not supported Product Specification Stratus V102 Specification V102 Display Terminal Operator s Manual TVI 131974 00 June 1985 Limitations Page print flip mode not supported Serial configuration commands not supported Select character set commands not supported Tandem 6526 6530 Emulation Specification Tandem 653x Multi Page Terminal Programmer s Guide 82310 B00 December 1983 Limitations Telnet Line Mode is not supported Ansi media copy commands are not supported No support for auxiliary port No support for extended buffer and cursor commands String configuration machine and directory commands not supported Data table re definition commands not supported Remote termination not supported T O device and file commands not supported Set colour configuration commands not supported Product Specification Televideo 955 Specificatio
461. y be supported The terminal models and their display characteristics are listed below Model Display Rows x Columns 5291 1 Monochrome 24 x 80 5292 2 Colour 24 x 80 5251 11 Monochrome 24 x 80 3179_2 Colour 24 x 80 default 3196_Al Monochrome 24 x 80 3180_2 Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477_FC Colour 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477_FG Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3486_BA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487_HA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487_HC Colour 24 x 80 5555_B01 Monochrome 24 x 80 5555_C01 Colour 24 x 80 The printer models are listed below 3812 1 Single byte printer 5553 B01 Double byte printer If double byte character sets e g Japanese are supported and you wish to use them then select either 5555_B01 monochrome or 5555_C01 colour for display or 5553 B01 for printing The setting of the IBM 5250 Monochrome option will match the normal display characteristic of the selected IBM 5250 model by default Note that the emulation of all IBM 5250 models supports both monochrome and colour display When monochrome is selected characters will be displayed in green and intense fields will be displayed in white When monochrome is not selected the settings specified in the Attributes dialog box described in the Setup Menus chapter will be used for the display The setting of the Left Ctrl acts as Reset Key option determines whether or not the left Control key performs the same function as the Reset key The setting of the Right Ctrl acts as E
462. y name assuming default mouse configuration Hotspots are supported in ALL terminal emulation modes A set of default hotspot keywords is provided for each mode These relate to key functions specific to the emulation For example in VT500 mode you can click on the word Help displayed on the screen and the emulator will execute the function associated with the Help key You can identify hotspots that are currently present in display memory by using the Show Hotspots function All colour attributes will be temporarily removed from the display and the hotspots will be highlighted with a red background Emulating Middle Mouse Button You can assign the function of the middle button found on a three button mouse to any button or button and key combination by using the Middle Button option Mouse Functions Notes 4 4 The Toolbar The Toolbar This chapter describes how to use and redefine the TeemTalk for Windows XPe toolbar Using The Toolbar The TeemTalk for Windows XPe toolbar provides a quick way of actioning commands or displaying setup dialog boxes by just clicking a button Sek eje ES oane k 2 You can customize the toolbar by adding or removing buttons to suit your requirements using the Button Tools dialog box which is displayed from the Settings menu The Predefined Button Tools The toolbar displayed by default contains a series of buttons defined with functions found in the
463. y selecting IBM 3151 in the Settings menu Operating Mode Factory default Echo The setting of this option determines how keyboard entered data is sent to the host and displayed on the screen In Echo mode keyboard entered data is sent only to the host The host is then responsible for returning the data to the display In Character mode keyboard entered data is sent simultaneously to the host and the display In Block mode keyboard entered data is displayed and processed locally allowing you to edit it before a block of data is sent to the host Row and Column Factory default 24 x 80 This option enables you to select one of several display formats 24 rows x 80 columns 25 rows x 80 columns 24 rows x 132 columns 25 rows x 132 columns 28 rows x 80 columns 28 rows x 132 columns 6 39 Setup Menus Note that the contents of the display will be cleared when you change the display format Turnaround Char Factory default CR This option specifies the line turnaround character LTC that is generated when a Read command is received or one of the block data transmission keys is pressed Note that selecting DC3 will disable the XON XOFF inbound and outbound pacing characters Forcing Insert Factory default Both This option specifies how an insert command affects displayed data when the screen is full When set to Off you will not be able to perform an insert operation When set to Line you will be able to
464. y the letter T 6 8 Setup Menus Menu Descriptions The following pages describe the options available in all the menus and associated dialog boxes The descriptions begin by showing the menu or dialog box as it is displayed on the screen The factory default setting is shown below each option title where applicable File Menu Factory Default Reset Terminal New Connection Open Session Specs Hace Save Session Save Session As Startup Options Printer Setup Print Screen Print Buffer Auto Print Cancel Print Eject Page Exit Factory Default This will restore the factory default settings of all the setup options A message box will be displayed asking you to confirm whether or not you want to assert the factory default settings Click the OK button to assert the factory defaults Confirm Factory Default T Eg 2 Confirm Factory Default Reset Terminal This will reset the current terminal emulation mode Setup Menus New Connection Not available in WBT mode Factory default Serial Com 1 This will display a dialog box that enables you to make a host connection New Connection Type Connect To Connect Serial v Serial Cable on Cor v Cancel Configure alnet Options The Type list box specifies the type of host connection that is to be made The Connect To box specifies the port or host to communicate with You can either make a selec
465. y type decimal key station number Report key type n decimal key station number t key type Alphanumeric key Function key Report function key definition for see below Report modifiers key state for see below CSI u CSI n t v 0 1 DCS ST DCS ST Key Mod Func UDS Dir except no Func for function key report Key VT PC Keyboard Mod Modifier Key 11 F1 F1 0 none Normal 12 F2 F2 1 Normal 13 F3 F3 2 Shift 14 F4 F4 3 Alt 15 F5 F5 4 Alt Shift 17 F6 F6 5 Control 18 F7 F7 6 Shift Ctrl 19 F8 F8 7 Alt Ctrl 20 F9 F9 8 Alt Ctrl Shift 21 F10 F10 23 F11 F11 24 F12 F12 Func Local function number 25 F13 26 F14 UDS User defined sequence 28 F15 29 F16 Dir UDS Direction 31 F17 0 none Normal 32 F18 1 Local 33 F19 2 Remote 34 F20 Set key click volume CSI SP r Off 1 Low 2 3 4 High none 0 5 6 7 8 Set lock key style CSI SP v Caps lock none 0 1 Shift lock 2 Reverse lock 3 Load LEDs CSI q Clear all LEDs 0 Light Num lock 1 Light Caps lock 2 Light Scroll lock 3 Extinguish Num lock 21 Extinguish Caps lock 22 Extinguish Scroll lock 23 C 20 Host Command Summary Printer Media copy send screen data CSI 2i Select digital printed data type CSI p Print National only none 0 1 National amp Line Drawing 2 Print Multinational 3 Print all characters 4 Select printer type CSI s DEC ANSI none 0 1
466. y with software designed to drive the Wyse WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 terminals respectively The ADDS A2 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals The HZ 1500 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hazeltine 1500 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals 19 2 Wyse Emulations The TVI 910 TVI 920 and T VI 925 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the TeleVideo 910 920 and 925 terminals respec tively as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals 3 Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box 4 Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a modem connection select Modem specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure to display configuration options Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Conn
467. yayay iyaas 2 31 GUI Overrides ren s u m este LRA Sede en 2 36 AUX Port Setting S setea a n n a side 2 38 Contents 1 Contents Session Management Windows XPe 2 39 Logged On As System Administrator a as sss 2 39 Logsed OB AS Av User Sa rE NA EAEE 2 39 TeemTalk for Windows CE Display 2 41 Setup Menus Windows CE 2 41 The Button Tools Windows CE 2 42 The Soft Buttons Windows CE 2 43 TeemTalk for Windows XPe Display 2 44 The Menu Bar Windows XPe 2 44 The Toolbar Windows XPe 2 45 The Soft Buttons Windows XPe 2 45 The StQtus BGP isis a aaa ansa aqa wui S 2 46 Hopoi ous n u E kaqa s 2 47 ATT 4410 Emulation 2 usu ai EE RER ai 2 48 Viewdata MOod eQe saa anan amani au an ential 2 49 Keyboard Configuration 3 1 Keyboard Mapping as sua a qa ua Gu u s 3 1 Defining Key Functions a 3 1 Defining A Key Or Key Combination aaaaasasass 3 2 Key Combinations
468. yboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the Unisys T27 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the UT virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box 18 4 Unisys T27 Emulation Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout payiys ase shay y u ym peyesUEBb ase S eyoeIg u suonounj sdeS y y uo spu B y Aq peyeoipul se uonounij Shey peyseWUN IV e4 gt d Yos a HOS H09 aBesn Aey jewIoN aBesn y UW M n aos Hog HOS 3ovq 103 70 HHO 0 LXAN 403 O ANN g 3 vq SINOH YVHO Adtd TV D NT 1 dul JO pu3 OL 12319 103 15 aed JO puq oL 12819 qO3 9 aur 9 9 9q INN A eur p suj JNN 18 5 Unisys T27 Emulation Notes 18 6 Wyse Emulations 19 Wyse Emulations This chapter describes features of the Wyse WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 terminal emulations Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box 2 Select Terminal Emulation Client and clic
469. yboard lock enabled ESC b Load keyboard table d data c checksum ESC lt d c ESC Numeric keypad application mode ESC gt 10h Numeric keypad numeric mode ESC gt 101 Print screen key local function ESC gt 24h Print screen key normal function ESC gt 241 Single shift three key identifier ESC 0 Single shift two key identifier ESC N Soft keyboard lock enabled ESC F Soft keyboard lock disabled ESC G Soft lock keyboard on illegal command enabled ESC gt 19h Soft lock keyboard on illegal command disabled ESC gt 191 C 52 Host Command Summary LOCAL EDITING Data block is cursor line ESC gt 4h Data block is page s depends on display memory ESC gt 41 Dump block data ESC 6 Enter character mode ESC gt 21 Enter edit block mode ESC gt 2h Modified unprotected areas only transmitted ESC gt 6h Modified amp unmodified unprotected areas transmitted ESC gt 61 Page dump waits for host request ESC Transmission waits for host request ESCS Transmit block data excluding locked lines ESC 5 Transmit selected areas ESC 171 Transmit unprotected areas depends on modified mode ESC 17h PRINTING Auto print off ESC 4i Auto print on data not displayed ESC 5i Initiate page dump ESC gt 2i Initiate screen transfer ESC gt 1i Print amp display received host data ESC gt 3i Print screen ESC Oi Print screen qualified areas ESC gt 0i REPORTS Device control string string ESC P
470. you can cause the F1 key to perform the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the lt and gt characters in the key definition box You may omit the VK_ and VT_ etc parts of the virtual key name To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other keys together type the lt character followed by the virtual key names linked together with plus sign characters and ending with the gt character For example to program the F1 key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together enter the following characters in the key definition box lt ALT F4 gt To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For example to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the key definition box lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt F4 gt 6 98 Setup Menus Specifying Characters There are various w
471. ys T27 Emulation Host command summary C 76 Keyboard mapping 18 4 Session configuration 18 1 Setup 6 61 Specification D 6 Statusbar 18 3 Virtual key names A 8 V Viewdata Mode Display formats 2 49 Host command summary C 78 Key functions 2 49 Virtual key names A 9 Virtual Key Names A 1 AT amp T 4410 emulation A 2 BQ 3107 emulation A 2 DG 410 412 emulation A 3 HP 700 92 96 emulation A 4 IBM 3270 emulation A 4 IBM 5250 emulation A 5 Index 9 Index IBM 5250 Word Processing A 5 Insertdelay A 11 MDIS Prism emulations A 6 PT250 emulation A 6 Reading text from a file A 11 SCO Console emulation A 7 Serial port functions A 10 Standard A 1 TA6530 emulation A 7 TVI955 emulation A 8 Unisys T27 emulation A 8 Viewdatamode A 9 VT500 emulation A 3 Writing text to a file A 10 Wyseemulations A 9 VT HP220 Emulation 2 6 6 28 VT UTF8 Emulation 2 6 6 28 VT100 Emulation Host command summary C 2 Session configuration 7 1 VT100 Emulation 2 6 6 28 VT400 Emulation Host command summary C 6 VT420 Emulation Host command summary C 9 VT500 Emulation Keyboard mapping 7 5 Session configuration 7 1 Virtual key names A 3 VT510 Emulation Host command summary C 12 VT52 Emulation Host command summary C 1 Session configuration 7 1 VT520 Emulation Host command summary C 15 VT640 Emulation Host command summary C 79 W W2119 Emulation Host command summary C 81 Screen mapping 6 90 Window Elements Status line PT250 emulat

HP c50 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents